Carrier Aquasnap Air Cooled Chillers With Comfortlink Controls 30Rap010 060 Users Manual 30rap 2t

30RAP010-060 to the manual 556e3ae9-fcb8-42ef-b900-abf4bd5d8276

2015-01-24

: Carrier Carrier-Aquasnap-Air-Cooled-Chillers-With-Comfortlink-Controls-30Rap010-060-Users-Manual-310468 carrier-aquasnap-air-cooled-chillers-with-comfortlink-controls-30rap010-060-users-manual-310468 carrier pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 124 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.

Catalog No. 04-53300067-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RAP-2T Pg 1 12-10 Replaces: 30RAP-1T

Controls, Start-Up, Operation,

Service, and Troubleshooting

CONTENTS

Page

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Conventions Used in this Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

Basic Controls Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-44

General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Main Base Board (MBB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Energy Management Module (EMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Current Sensor Board (CSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

AUX Board (AUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Expansion Valve Board (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Emergency On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Board Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Control Module Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) Interface . . . . . . . . . .19

Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

• COOLER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR

• COOLER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR

• COMPRESSOR RETURN GAS

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

• OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (OAT)

• DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR (DTT)

• REMOTE SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR OR DUAL

LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Energy Management Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Loss-of-Cooler Flow Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Electronic Expansion Valves (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Capacity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

• MINUTES LEFT FOR START

• MINUTES OFF TIME

• LEAD/LAG DETERMINATION

• CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES

Head Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Operation of Machine Based on Control Method

and Cooling Set Point Selection Settings. . . . . . . . .32

Cooling Set Point Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Low Sound Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Heating Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Service Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Optional Factory-Installed Hydronic Package. . . . . . .34

Cooler Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Cooler Pump Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Configuring and Operating Dual Chiller Control . . . .36

Temperature Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Demand Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

• DEMAND LIMIT (2-Stage Switch Controlled)

• EXTERNALLY POWERED DEMAND LIMIT

(4 to 20 mA Controlled)

• DEMAND LIMIT (CCN Loadshed Controlled)

Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Digital Scroll Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

• DIGITAL SCROLL OPERATION

• DIGITAL COMPRESSOR CONFIGURATION

PRE-START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,45

Page

System Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

START-UP AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,46

Actual Start-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Check Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Operating Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

• TEMPERATURES

• LOW AMBIENT OPERATION

• VOLTAGE — ALL UNITS

OPERATION SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46,47

SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-63

Electronic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

• CONTROL COMPONENTS

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

EXV Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

• FIELD SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS

• VALVE REPLACEMENT

• VALVE REASSEMBLY

Compressor Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Cooler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

• BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER

REPLACEMENT

• BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER

CLEANING

Oil Charge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX)

Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning

Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Check Refrigerant Feed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

•FILTER DRIER

• MOISTURE-LIQUID INDICATOR

• MINIMUM LOAD VALVE

• PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES

Check Unit Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

• HIGH-PRESSURE SWITCH

• PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS

• COOLER FREEZE-UP PROTECTION

• HEATER CABLE

• WINTER SHUTDOWN

Thermistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Pressure Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Chilled Water Flow Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Strainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Condenser Fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Motormaster® V Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

• GENERAL OPERATION

• CONFIGURATION

• DRIVE PROGRAMMING

•EPM CHIP

• LOSS OF CCN COMMUNICATIONS

• REPLACING DEFECTIVE MODULES

Hydronic Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64

Recommended Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX)

Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning

Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64-73

30RAP010-060

AQUASNAP® Air-Cooled Chillers

with COMFORTLINK™ Controls

CONTENTS (cont)

Page

Complete Unit Stoppage and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

• GENERAL POWER FAILURE

• UNIT ENABLE-OFF-REMOTE CONTACT SWITCH IS

OFF

• CHILLED FLUID PROOF-OF-FLOW SWITCH OPEN

• OPEN 24-V CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKERS

• COOLING LOAD SATISFIED

• THERMISTOR FAILURE

• LOW SATURATED SUCTION

• COMPRESSOR SAFETIES

Alarms and Alerts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74-89

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-100

APPENDIX C — FACTORY SETTINGS FOR

PUMP AND MANUAL STARTERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET

COMMUNICATONS WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102-109

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY

AND LOG SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-113

START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30RAP LIQUID

CHILLER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CL-1 to CL-10

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

Installing, starting up, and servicing this equipment can be

hazardous due to system pressures, electrical components, and

equipment location (roof, elevated structures, mechanical

rooms, etc.). Only trained, qualified installers and service

mechanics should install, start up, and service this equipment.

When working on this equipment, observe precautions in

the literature, and on tags, stickers, and labels attached to the

equipment, and any other safety precautions that apply. Follow

all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use

care in handling, rigging, and setting this equipment, and in

handling all electrical components.

WARNING

Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut

off all power to this equipment during installation. There

may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all discon-

nect locations to alert others not to restore power until work

is completed.

WARNING

DO NOT VENT refrigerant relief valves within a building.

Outlet from relief valves must be vented outdoors in

accordance with the latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE

(American National Standards Institute/American Society

of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers)

15 (Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration). The

accumulation of refrigerant in an enclosed space can

displace oxygen and cause asphyxiation. Provide adequate

ventilation in enclosed or low overhead areas. Inhalation of

high concentrations of vapor is harmful and may cause

heart irregularities, unconsciousness or death. Misuse can

be fatal. Vapor is heavier than air and reduces the amount

of oxygen available for breathing. Product causes eye and

skin irritation. Decomposition products are hazardous.

WARNING

DO NOT attempt to unbraze factory joints when servicing

this equipment. Compressor oil is flammable and there is

no way to detect how much oil may be in any of the

refrigerant lines. Cut lines with a tubing cutter as required

when performing service. Use a pan to catch any oil that

may come out of the lines and as a gage for how much oil

to add to system. DO NOT re-use compressor oil.

CAUTION

This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control

system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out

components, or to bypass or otherwise depart from recom-

mended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control

board or accompanying wiring may destroy the electronic

modules or electrical components.

CAUTION

To prevent potential damage to heat exchanger, always run

fluid through heat exchanger when adding or removing

refrigerant charge. Use appropriate brine solutions in cooler

fluid loop to prevent the freezing of brazed plate heat

exchanger, optional hydronic section and/or interconnecting

piping when the equipment is exposed to temperatures

below 32 F (0 °C). Proof of flow switch and strainer are

factory installed on all models. Do NOT remove power

from this chiller during winter shutdown periods without

taking precaution to remove all water from heat exchanger

and optional hydronic system. Failure to properly protect

the system from freezing may constitute abuse and may

void warranty.

CAUTION

Compressors and optional hydronic system pumps require

specific rotation. Test condenser fan(s) first to ensure

proper phasing. Swap any two incoming power leads to

correct condenser fan rotation before starting any other

motors.

CAUTION

Refrigerant charge must be removed slowly to prevent loss

of compressor oil that could result in compressor failure.

CAUTION

Puron® refrigerant (R-410A) systems operate at higher

pressures than standard R-22 systems. Do not use R-22 ser-

vice equipment or components on Puron refrigerant equip-

ment. If service equipment is not rated for Puron

refrigerant, equipment damage or personal injury may

result.

GENERAL

This publication contains Controls, Start-Up, Operation,

Service, and Troubleshooting information for the 30RAP

AquaSnap® air-cooled chillers. See Table 1. These chillers are

equipped with ComfortLink™ controls and electronic expan-

sion valves (EXVs).

Table 1 — Unit Sizes

Conventions Used in This Manual — The follow-

ing conventions for discussing configuration points for the

local display (scrolling marquee or Navigator™ accessory)

will be used in this manual.

Point names will be written with the mode name first, then

any sub-modes, then the point name, each separated by an

arrow symbol (. Names will also be shown in bold

and italics. As an example, the Lead/Lag Circuit Select Point,

which is located in the Configuration mode, Option sub-mode,

would be written as Configuration OPTNLLCS.

This path name will show the user how to navigate through

the local display to reach the desired configuration. The user

would scroll through the modes and sub-modes using the

and keys. The arrow symbol in the path name repre-

sents pressing to move into the next level of the

menu structure.

When a value is included as part of the path name, it will be

shown at the end of the path name after an equals sign. If the

value represents a configuration setting, an explanation will

be shown in parenthesis after the value. As an example,

ConfigurationOPTNLLCS = 1 (Circuit A leads).

Pressing the and keys simultaneously

will scroll an expanded text description of the point name or

value across the display. The expanded description is shown in

the local display tables but will not be shown with the path

names in text.

The CCN (Carrier Comfort Network®) point names are also

referenced in the local display tables for users configuring the

unit with CCN software instead of the local display. The CCN

tables are located in Appendix B of the manual.

Basic Controls Usage

SCROLLING MARQUEE DISPLAY — The scrolling mar-

quee display is the standard interface display to the ComfortLink

Control System for 30RAP units. The display has up and down

arrow keys, an key, and an key. These

keys are used to navigate through the different levels of the

display structure. Press the key until the highest

operating level is displayed to move through the top 11 mode

levels indicated by LEDs on the left side of the display. See

Fig. 1 and Tables 2-14.

Once within a mode or sub-mode, pressing the

and keys simultaneously will put the scrolling

marquee display into expanded text mode where the full mean-

ing of all sub-modes, items and their values can be displayed

for the current selection. Press the and

keys to return the scrolling marquee display to its default menu

of rotating display items (those items in Run Status



VIEW).

In addition, the password will be disabled, requiring that it be

entered again before changes can be made to password protect-

ed items. Press the key to exit out of the expanded

text mode.

NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration



DISP



LANG), variable is changed, all appropriate display

expansions will immediately change to the new language. No

power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring

languages.

When a specific item is located, the item name alternates

with the value. Press the key at a changeable item

and the value will be displayed. Press again and the

value will begin to flash indicating that the value can be

changed. Use the up and down arrow keys to change the value,

and confirm the value by pressing the key.

Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in

the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press

so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to

change the value or state and press the key to accept

it. Press the key to return to the next higher level of

structure. Repeat the process as required for other items.

Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are pass-

word protected. The words ‘PASS’ and ‘WORD’ will alternate

on the display when required. The default password is 0111.

Press and the 1111 password will be displayed. Press

again and the first digit will begin to flash. Use the

arrow keys to change the number and press to accept

the digit. Continue with the remaining digits of the password.

The password can only be changed through CCN operator in-

terface software such as ComfortWORKS®, ComfortVIEW™

and Service Tool.

See Tables 2-14 and Appendix A for further details.

WARNING

This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control

system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out or

bypass components or otherwise depart from recom-

mended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control

board or accompanying wiring may destroy the board or

electrical component.

UNIT NOMINAL CAPACITY (TONS)

30RAP010 10

30RAP015 14

30RAP018 16

30RAP020 19

30RAP025 24

30RAP030 28

30RAP035 34

30RAP040 39

30RAP045 43

30RAP050 48

30RAP055 53

30RAP060 56

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

Run Status

Service Test

Temperature

Pressures

Setpoints

Inputs

Outputs

Configuration

Time Clock

Operating Modes

Alarms

Alarm Status

ENTER

MODE

ESCAPE

Fig. 1 — Scrolling Marquee Display

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ACCESSORY NAVIGATOR™ DISPLAY MODULE —

The Navigator module provides a mobile user interface to the

ComfortLink™ control system, which is only available as a

field-installed accessory. The display has up and down arrow

keys, an key, and an key. These keys are

used to navigate through the different levels of the display

structure. Press the key until ‘Select a Menu Item’

is displayed to move through the top 11 mode levels indicated

by LEDs on the left side of the display. See Fig. 2.

Once within a Mode or sub-mode, a “>” indicates the cur-

rently selected item on the display screen. Pressing the

and keys simultaneously will put the Nav-

igator module into expanded text mode where the full meaning

of all sub-modes, items and their values can be displayed. Press-

ing the and keys when the display says

‘Select Menu Item’ (Mode LED level) will return the Navigator

module to its default menu of rotating display items (those items

in Run Status



VIEW). In addition, the password will be dis-

abled, requiring that it be entered again before changes can be

made to password protected items. Press the key to

exit out of the expanded text mode.

NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration



DISP



LANG), variable is changed, all appropriate display

expansions will immediately change to the new language. No

power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring

languages.

When a specific item is located, the item name appears on the

left of the display, the value will appear near the middle of the

display and the units (if any) will appear on the far right of the

display. Press the key at a changeable item and the val-

ue will begin to flash. Use the up and down arrow keys to change

the value, and confirm the value by pressing the key.

Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in

the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press

so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to

change the value or state and press the key to accept

it. Press the key to return to the next higher level of

structure. Repeat the process as required for other items.

Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are pass-

word protected. The words Enter Password will be displayed

when required, with 1111 also being displayed. The default

password is 1111. Use the arrow keys to change the number

and press to enter the digit. Continue with the re-

maining digits of the password. The password can only be

changed through CCN operator interface software such as

ComfortWORKS, ComfortVIEW and Service Tool.

Adjusting the Contrast — The contrast of the display can be

adjusted to suit ambient conditions. To adjust the contrast of

the Navigator module, press the key until the dis-

play reads, “Select a menu item.” Using the arrow keys move

to the Configuration mode. Press to obtain access to

this mode. The display will read:

> TEST OFF

METR OFF

LANG ENGLISH

Pressing will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the up

or down arrow to change “OFF” to “ON”. Pressing

will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the view

screen. Pressing and simultaneously

allows the user to adjust the display contrast. Use the up or

down arrows to adjust the contrast. The screen’s contrast will

change with the adjustment. Press to accept the

change. The Navigator module will keep this setting as long as

it is plugged in to the LEN bus.

Adjusting the Backlight Brightness — The backlight of the

display can be adjusted to suit ambient conditions. The factory

default is set to the highest level. To adjust the backlight of the

Navigator module, press the key until the display

reads, “Select a menu item.” Using the arrow keys move to the

Configuration mode. Press to obtain access to this

mode. The display will read:

> TEST OFF

METR OFF

LANG ENGLISH

Pressing will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the up

or down arrow keys to change “OFF” to “ON”. Pressing

will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the

view screen. Pressing the up and down arrow keys simultane-

ously allows the user to adjust the display brightness. Use the

up or down arrow keys to adjust screen brightness. Press

to accept the change. The Navigator module will

keep this setting as long as it is plugged in to the LEN bus.

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

Run Status

Service Tes t

Tem peratures

Pressures

Setpoints

Inputs

Outputs

Configuration

Time Clock

Operating Modes

Alarms

ENTER

ESC

MODE

Alarm Status

ComfortLink

Fig. 2 — Accessory Navigator™ Display Module

Table 2 — Scrolling Marquee Display Menu Structure*

LEGEND

Ckt — Circuit

*Throughout this text, the location of items in the menu structure will be

described in the following format:

Item Expansion (Mode Name



Sub-mode Name



ITEM)

For example, using the language selection item:

Language Selection (Configuration



DISP



LANG)

MODE RUN

STATUS

SERVICE

TEST TEMPERATURES PRESSURES SET

POINTS INPUTS OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION TIME

CLOCK

OPERATING

MODES ALARMS

SUB-MODE

Auto

View of

Run Status

(VIEW)

Service

Te st M o de

(TEST)

Ent and Leave Unit

Te m p s

(UNIT)

Pressures

Ckt A

(PRC.A)

Cooling

Setpoints

(COOL)

General

Inputs

(GEN.I)

General

Outputs

(GEN.O)

Display

Configuration

(DISP)

Time of

Day

(TIME)

Modes

(MODE)

Current

(CRNT)

Unit Run

Hour and

Start

(RUN)

Outputs

and Pumps

(OUTS)

Temperatures

Ckt A

(CIR.A)

Pressures

Ckt B

(PRC.B)

Head

Pressure

Setpoint

(HEAD)

Circuit

Inputs

(CRCT)

Outputs

Circuit A

EXV

(A.EXV)

Unit

Configuration

(UNIT)

Month,

Date, Day,

and Year

(DATE)

Reset

Alarms

(RCRN)

Compressor

Run Hours

(HOUR)

Ciruit A Comp

Te s t

(CMPA)

Temperatures

Ckt B

(CIR.B)

Brine

Freeze

Setpoint

(FRZ)

4-20mA

Inputs

(4-20)

Outputs

Circuit B

EXV

(B.EXV)

Unit Options 1

Hardware

(OPT1)

Daylight

Savings

Time

(DST)

Alarm

History

(HIST)

Local

Holiday

Schedules

(HOL.L)

Compressor

Starts

(STRT)

Ciruit B Comp

Test

(CMPB)

Outputs

Circuit A

(CIR.A)

Unit Options 2

Controls

(OPT2)

Preventive

Maintenance

(PM)

Outputs

Circuit B

(CIR.B)

CCN Network

Configuration

(CCN)

Local

Occu-

pancy

Schedule

(SCH.L)

Software

Version

(VERS)

Head Pressure

Comp. Delta

(HP.A)

Schedule

Override

(OVR)

Head Pressure

Comp. Delta

(HP.B)

Cir. A EXV

Configuration

(EXV.A)

Cir. B EXV

Configuration

(EXV.B)

Motormaster

Configuration

(MM)

Reset Cool Temp

(RSET)

Set Point and

Ramp Load

(SLCT)

Service

Configuration

(SERV)

Broadcast

Configuration

(BCST)

Table 3 — Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

VIEW EWT XXX.X FENTERING FLUID TEMP

LWT XXX.X FLEAVING FLUID TEMP

SETP XXX.X FACTIVE SETPOINT

CTPT XXX.X FCONTROL POINT

LOD.F XXX LOAD/UNLOAD FACTOR

STAT X CONTROL MODE 0 = Service Test

1 = Off Local

2 = Off CCN

3 = Off Time

4 = Off Emrgcy

5 = On Local

6 = On CCN

7 = On Time

8 = Ht Enabled

9 = Pump Delay

LD.PM LEAD PUMP

OCC YES/NO OCCUPIED

LS.AC YES/NO LOW SOUND ACTIVE

MODE YES/NO OVERRIDE MODES IN EFFECT

CAP XXX % PERCENT TOTAL CAPACITY

STGE X REQUESTED STAGE

ALRM XXX CURRENT ALARMS & ALERTS

TIME XX.XX TIME OF DAY 00.00-23.59

MNTH XX MONTH OF YEAR 1 = January, 2 = February, etc.

DATE XX DAY OF MONTH 01-31

YEAR XX YEAR OF CENTURY

RUN HRS.U XXXX HRS MACHINE OPERATING HOURS

STR.U XXXX MACHINE STARTS

HR.P1 XXXX.X PUMP 1 RUN HOURS

HR.P2 XXXX.X PUMP 2 RUN HOURS

HOUR HRS.A XXXX HRS CIRCUIT A RUN HOURS

HRS.B XXXX HRS CIRCUIT B RUN HOURS See Note

HR.A1 XXXX HRS COMPRESSOR A1 RUN HOURS

HR.A2 XXXX HRS COMPRESSOR A2 RUN HOURS

HR.B1 XXXX HRS COMPRESSOR B1 RUN HOURS See Note

HR.B2 XXXX HRS COMPRESSOR B2 RUN HOURS See Note

STRT ST.A1 XXXX COMPRESSOR A1 STARTS

ST.A2 XXXX COMPRESSOR A2 STARTS

ST.B1 XXXX COMPRESSOR B1 STARTS See Note

ST.B2 XXXX COMPRESSOR B2 STARTS See Note

PM PUMP PUMP MAINTENANCE

SI.PM XXXX HRS PUMP SERVICE INTERVAL Default: 8760

P.1.DN XXXX HRS PUMP 1 SERVICE COUNTDOWN

P.2.DN XXXX HRS PUMP 2 SERVICE COUNTDOWN

P.1.MN YES/NO PUMP 1 MAINTENANCE DONE User Entry

P.2.MN YES/NO PUMP 2 MAINTENANCE DONE User Entry

ENTER

Table 3 — Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

*Press and simultaneously to obtain version number.

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

PM (cont) PMDT PUMP MAINTENANCE DATES

P.1.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.1.M1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.1.M2 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.1.M3 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.1.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M2 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M3 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

STRN STRAINER MAINTENANCE

SI.ST XXXX HRS STRAINER SRVC INTERVAL Default: 8760

S.T.DN XXXX HRS STRAINER SRVC COUNTDOWN

S.T.MN YES/NO STRAINER MAINT. DONE User Entry

ST.DT STRAINER MAINT. DATES

S.T.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

S.T.M1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

S.T.M2 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

S.T.M3 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

S.T.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

COIL COIL MAINTENANCE

SI.CL XXXX HRS COIL SRVC INTER Default: 8760

C.L.DN XXXX HRS COIL SERVICE COUNTDOWN

C.L.MN YES/NO COIL MAINT. DONE User Entry

CL.DT COIL MAINTENANCE DATES

C.L.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

C.L.M1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

C.L.M2 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

C.L.M3 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

C.L.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

VERS MBB CESR131460-xx-xx xx-xx is Version number*

EXV CESR131172-xx-xx xx-xx is Version number*

AUX1 CESR131333-xx-xx xx-xx is Version number*

EMM CESR131174-xx-xx xx-xx is Version number*

MARQ CESR131171-xx-xx xx-xx is Version number*

NAVI CESR130227-xx-xx xx-xx is Version number*

ENTER

ESCAPE

Table 4 — Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

TEST ON/OFF SERVICE TEST MODE To Enable Service Test Mode,

move Enable/Off/Remote

Contact switch to OFF. Change

TEST to ON. Move switch to

ENABLE.

OUTS OUTPUTS AND PUMPS

EXV.A 0 to 100% EXV A % OPEN

EXV.B 0 to 100% EXV B % OPEN

FAN1 ON/OFF FAN 1 RELAY

FAN2 ON/OFF FAN 2 RELAY

FAN3 ON/OFF FAN 3 RELAY

FAN4 ON/OFF FAN 4 RELAY

FAN5 ON/OFF FAN 5 RELAY

FAN6 ON/OFF FAN 6 RELAY

V.HPA 0 to 100% VAR HEAD PRESS %

V.HPB 0 to 100% VAR HEAD PRESS %

CLP.1 ON/OFF COOLER PUMP 1 RELAY

CLP.2 ON/OFF COOLER PUMP 2 RELAY

UL.TM 0 to 15 COMP A1 UNLOAD TIME

CL.HT ON/OFF COOLER/PUMP HEATER

RMT.A ON/OFF REMOTE ALARM RELAY

CMPA CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TEST

CC.A1 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY

UL.TM 0 to 15 COMP A1 UNLOAD TIME

CC.A2 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY

CC.A3 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A3 RELAY

CC.A4 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A4 RELAY

MLV ON/OFF MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY

CMPB CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TEST See Note

CC.B1 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY

CC.B2 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY

CC.B3 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B3 RELAY

CC.B4 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B4 RELAY

ENTER

Table 5 — Temperature Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Table 6 — Pressure Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Table 7 — Set Points Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

UNIT ENT AND LEAVE UNIT TEMPS

CEWT XXX.X FCOOLER ENTERING FLUID

CLWT XXX.X FCOOLER LEAVING FLUID

OAT XXX.X FOUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE

SPT XXX.X FSPACE TEMPERATURE

DLWT XXX.X FLEAD/LAG LEAVING FLUID

CIR.A TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT A

SCT.A XXX.X FSATURATED CONDENSING TMP

SST.A XXX.X FSATURATED SUCTION TEMP

RGT.A XXX.X FCOMPR RETURN GAS TEMP

D.GAS XXX.X FDISCHARGE GAS TEMP

SH.A XXX.X ^F SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP

CIR.B TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT B See Note

SCT.B XXX.X FSATURATED CONDENSING TMP See Note

SST.B XXX.X FSATURATED SUCTION TEMP See Note

RGT.B XXX.X FCOMPR RETURN GAS TEMP See Note

SH.B XXX.X ^F SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP See Note

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

PRC.A PRESSURES CIRCUIT A

DP.A XXX.X PSIG DISCHARGE PRESSURE

SP.A XXX.X PSIG SUCTION PRESSURE

PRC.B PRESSURES CIRCUIT B See Note

DP.B XXX.X PSIG DISCHARGE PRESSURE See Note

SP.B XXX.X PSIG SUCTION PRESSURE See Note

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

COOL COOLING SETPOINTS

CSP.1 XXX.X FCOOLING SETPOINT 1 Default: 44 F

CSP.2 XXX.X FCOOLING SETPOINT 2 Default: 44 F

CSP.3 XXX.X FICE SETPOINT Default: 32 F

HEAD HEAD PRESSURE SETPOINTS

H.DP XXX.X FHEAD SETPOINT Default: 95 F

F. O N XXX.X FFAN ON SETPOINT Default: 95 F

F. O F F XXX.X FFAN OFF SETPOINT Default: 72 F

B.OFF XXX.X FBASE FAN OFF DELTA TEMP Default: 23 F

F. D LT XXX.X FFAN STAGE DELTA Default: 15 F

FRZ BRINE FREEZE SETPOINT

BR.FZ XXX.X FBRINE FREEZE POINT Default: 34 F

ENTER

Table 8 — Inputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Table 9 — Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

GEN.I GENERAL INPUTS

STST STRT/STOP START/STOP SWITCH

FLOW ON/OFF COOLER FLOW SWITCH

PM.F.1 OPEN/CLSE COOLER PUMP 1 INTERLOCK

PM.F.2 OPEN/CLSE COOLER PUMP 2 INTERLOCK

HT.RQ ON/OFF HEAT REQUEST

DLS1 ON/OFF DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1

DLS2 ON/OFF DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2

ICED ON/OFF ICE DONE

DUAL ON/OFF DUAL SETPOINT SWITCH

CRCT CIRCUITS INPUTS

FKA1 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A1 FEEDBACK

FKA2 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A2 FEEDBACK

FKA3 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A3 FEEDBACK

FKA4 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A4 FEEDBACK

FKB1 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B1 FEEDBACK See Note

FKB2 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B2 FEEDBACK See Note

FKB3 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B3 FEEDBACK See Note

FKB4 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B4 FEEDBACK See Note

4-20 4-20 MA INPUTS

DMND XX.X MA 4-20 MA DEMAND SIGNAL

RSET XX.X MA 4-20 MA RESET SIGNAL

CSP XX.X MA 4-20 MA COOLING SETPOINT

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

GEN.O GENERAL OUTPUTS

FAN1 ON/OFF FAN 1 RELAY

FAN2 ON/OFF FAN 2 RELAY

FAN3 ON/OFF FAN 3 RELAY

FAN4 ON/OFF FAN 4 RELAY

FAN5 ON/OFF FAN 5 RELAY

FAN6 ON/OFF FAN 6 RELAY

V.HPA ON/OFF FAN SPEED CIRCUIT A

V.HPB ON/OFF FAN SPEED CIRCUIT B

C.WP1 ON/OFF COOLER PUMP RELAY 1

C.WP2 ON/OFF COOLER PUMP RELAY 2

CLHT ON/OFF COOLER/PUMP HEATER

MLV.R ON/OFF MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY

ENTER

Table 9 — Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

A.EXV OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A EXV

EXV.A 0 to 100% EXV % OPEN

APPR ON/OFF CIRCUIT A APPROACH

AP.SP APPROACH SETPOINT

X.SH.R SH RESET AT MAX UNL-DIG

S.SH.R DIGLOAD TO START SH RST

SH_R AMOUNT OF SH RESET

OVR.A EXVA OVERRIDE

SPH.A SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP

ASH.S ACTIVE SUPERHEAT SETPT

AMP.S ACTIVE MOP SETPT

PLM.A CIR A EXV POSITION LIMIT

SPR.1 SPARE 1 TEMPERATURE

B.EXV OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B EXV

EXV.B 0 to 100% EXV % OPEN

APPR ON/OFF CIRCUIT B APPROACH

AP.SP APPROACH SETPOINT

OVR.B EXVB OVERRIDE

SPH.B SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP

ASH.S ACTIVE SUPERHEAT SETPT

AMP.S ACTIVE MOP SETPT

PLM.B CIR B EXV POSITION LIMIT

SPR.2 SPARE 2 TEMPERATURE

CIR.A OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A

CC.A1 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY

DPE.R ON/OFF COMP A1 LOAD PERCENT

CC.A2 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY

CC.A3 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A3 RELAY

CC.A4 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A4 RELAY

CIR.B OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B (See Note)

CC.B1 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY

CC.B2 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY

CC.B3 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B3 RELAY

CC.B4 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B4 RELAY

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

DISP DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

TEST ON/OFF TEST DISPLAY LEDS

METR ON/OFF METRIC DISPLAY Off = English; On = Metric

LANG X LANGUAGE SELECTION Default: 0

0 = English

1 = Espanol

2 = Francais

3 = Portuguese

PAS.E ENBL/DSBL PASSWORD ENABLE Default: Enable

PASS xxxx SERVICE PASSWORD Default: 1111

ENTER

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

UNIT UNIT CONFIGURATION

SIZE XX UNIT SIZE

SZA.1 XX COMPRESSOR A1 SIZE Unit Dependent

SZA.2 XX COMPRESSOR A2 SIZE Unit Dependent

SZA.3 XX COMPRESSOR A3 SIZE Unit Dependent

SZA.4 XX COMPRESSOR A4 SIZE Unit Dependent

SZB.1 XX COMPRESSOR B1 SIZE Unit Dependent

SZB.2 XX COMPRESSOR B2 SIZE Unit Dependent

SZB.3 XX COMPRESSOR B3 SIZE Unit Dependent

SZB.4 XX COMPRESSOR B4 SIZE Unit Dependent

SH.SP XX.X FSUPERHEAT SETPOINT Default: 9 F

FAN.S NUMBER OF FANS 1 = One Fan

2 = Two Fans

3 = Three Fans

4 = Four Fans

EXV YES/NO EXV MODULE INSTALLED? Default: Yes

A1.TY YES/NO COMPRESSOR A1 DIGITAL?

Default: No

Yes = A1 Compressor is Digital

Scroll

MAX.T 0 to 12 MAXIMUM A1 UNLOAD TIME

Default: 7

Max 12 010,015

Max 10 018-060

OPT1 UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE

FLUD X COOLER FLUID

Default: Water

1 = Water

2 = Medium Temperature

Brine

MLV.S YES/NO MINIMUM LOAD VALVE SELECT Default: No

D.G.EN ENBL/DSBL DISCHARGE GAS TEMP ENABLE

CSB.E ENBL/DSBL CSB BOARDS ENABLE

CPC ON/OFF COOLER PUMP CONTROL Default: Off

PM1E YES/NO COOLER PUMP 1 ENABLE

PM2E YES/NO COOLER PUMP 2 ENABLE

PM.P.S YES/NO COOLER PMP PERIODIC STRT Default: No

PM.SL X COOLER PUMP SELECT Default: Automatic

0 = Automatic

1 = Pump 1 Starts first

2 = Pump 2 Starts first

PM.DY XX MIN COOLER PUMP SHUTDOWN DLY 0 to 10 minutes, Default: 1

min.

PM.DT XXXX HRS PUMP CHANGEOVER HOURS Default: 500 hours

ROT.P YES/NO ROTATE COOLER PUMPS NOW User Entry

EMM YES/NO EMM MODULE INSTALLED

CND.T 0,1 COND HX 0 = RTPF

1 = MCHX Default MCHX

MOPS XX EXV MOP SET POINT Range: 40 - 80 Default: 50

APPR XX CONFIG APPROACH SETPOINT Range: 5 - 40 Default: 9.0

ENTER

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

OPT2 UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS

CTRL X CONTROL METHOD Default: Switch

0 = Enable/Off/Remote Switch

2 = Occupancy

3 = CCN Control

LOAD X LOADING SEQUENCE SELECT Default: Equal

1 = Equal

2 = Staged

LLCS X LEAD/LAG CIRCUIT SELECT Default: Automatic

1 = Automatic

2 = Circuit A Leads

3 = Circuit B Leads

LCWT XX.X FHIGH LCW ALERT LIMIT Default: 60

Range: 2 to 60 F

DELY XX MINUTES OFF TIME Default: 0 Minutes

Range: 0 to 15 Minutes

ICE.M ENBL/DSBL ICE MODE ENABLE Default: Disable

LS.MD X LOW SOUND MODE SELECT Default: 0

0 = Mode Disable

1 = Fan Noise Only

2 = Fan/Compressor Noise

LS.ST 00:00 LOW SOUND START TIME Default: 00:00

LS.ND 00:00 LOW SOUND END TIME Default: 00:00

LS.LT XXX % LOW SOUND CAPACITY LIMIT Default: 100%

Range: 0 to 100%

CCN CCN NETWORK CONFIGURATION

CCNA XXX CCN ADDRESS Default: 1

Range: 1 to 239

CCNB XXX CCN BUS NUMBER Default: 0

Range: 0 to 239

BAUD X CCN BAUD RATE Default: 9600

1 = 2400

2 = 4800

3 = 9600

4 = 19,200

5 = 38,400

HP.A HEAD PRESSURE CMP DELTA

A1.DT XX SCT DELTA FOR COMP A1 Range: 0 - 50 Default: 12

A2.DT XX SCT DELTA FOR COMP A2 Range: 0 - 50 Default: 12

HP.B HEAD PRESSURE CMP DELTA

B1.DT XX SCT DELTA FOR COMP B1 Range: 0 - 50 Default: 12

B2.DT XX SCT DELTA FOR COMP B2 Range: 0 - 50 Default: 12

ENTER

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

* Sizes 010-020 and 035-045, default is 1596. Sizes 025,030, and 050-060, default is 2500.

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

EXV.A CIR A EXV CONFIGURATION

STR.A XXX EXV CIRC.A START POS Range: 0 - 100 Default: 30

MIN.A XXX EXV CIRC.A MIN POSITION Range: 0 - 100 Default: 8

RNG.A XXXXX EXVA STEPS IN RANGE Range: 0 - 65535 Default: *

SPD.A XXXXX EXVA STEPS PER SECOND Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 200

POF.A XXX EXVA FAIL POSITION IN % Range: 0 - 100 Default: 0

MIN.A XXXXX EXVA MINIMUM STEPS Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 0

MAX.A XXXXX EXVA MAXIMUM STEPS Range: 0 - 65535 Default: *

OVR.A XXX EXVA OVERRUN STEPS Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 167

TYP.A 0,1 EXVA STEPPER TYPE 0 = UNIPOLAR

1 = BIPOLAR Default: 1

H.SCT XXX HIGH SCT THRESHOLD Range: 50 - 140 Default: 115

X.PCT XX OPEN EXV X% ON 2ND COMP Range: 0 - 30 Default: 10

X.PER XX MOVE EXV X% ON DISCRSOL Range: 0 - 30 Default: 5

A.PCT XXX PRE-OPEN EXV - FAN ADDING Range: 0 - 100 Default: 10

M.PCT XXX PRE-CLOSE EXV - FAN SUB Range: 0 - 100 Default: 10

S.PCT XXX PRE-CLOSE EXV - LAG SHUT Range: 0 - 100 Default: 10

DELY XXX LAG START DELAY Range: 0 - 100 Default: 10

EXV.B CIR B EXV CONFIGURATION

STR.B XXX EXV CIRC.B START POS Range: 0 - 100 Default: 50

MIN.B XXX EXV CIRC.B MIN POSITION Range: 0 - 100 Default: 8

RNG.B XXXXX EXVB STEPS IN RANGE Range: 0 - 65535 Default: *

SPD.B XXXXX EXVB STEPS PER SECOND Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 200

POF.B XXX EXVB FAIL POSITION IN % Range: 0 - 100 Default: 0

MIN.B XXXXX EXVB MINIMUM STEPS Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 0

MAX.B XXXXX EXVB MAXIMUM STEPS Range: 0 - 65535 Default: *

OVR.B XXX EXVB OVERRUN STEPS Range: 0 - 65535 Default: 167

TYP.B 0,1 EXVB STEPPER TYPE 0 = UNIPOLAR

1 = BIPOLAR Default: 1

MM MOTORMASTER CONFIGURATION

MMR.S YES/NO MOTORMASTER SELECT

P.GAN XX HEAD PRESSURE P GAIN Range: -20 - 20 Default: 1.0

I.GAN XX HEAD PRESSURE I GAIN Range: -20 - 20 Default: 0.1

D.GAN XX HEAD PRESSURE D GAIN Range: -20 - 20 Default: 0.0

MIN.S XXX MINIMUM FAN SPEED Range: 0 - 100 Default: 5.0

ENTER

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

RSET RESET COOL TEMP

CRST X COOLING RESET TYPE Default: No Reset

0 = No Reset

1 = 4 to 20 mA Input

2 = Outdoor Air Temperature

3 = Return Fluid

4 = Space Temperature

MA.DG XX.X F4-20 - DEGREES RESET Default: 0.0F

Range: –30 to 30F

RM.NO XXX.X FREMOTE - NO RESET TEMP Default: 125F (51.7C)

Range: 0° to 125F

RM.F XXX.X FREMOTE - FULL RESET TEMP Default: 0.0F (-17.8C)

Range: 0 to 125F

RM.DG XX.X FREMOTE - DEGREES RESET Default: 0.0F

Range: –30 to 30F

RT.NO XXX.X FRETURN - NO RESET TEMP Default: 10.0F (5.6C)

Range: 0 to 125F COOLER T

RT.F XXX.X FRETURN - FULL RESET TEMP Default: 0.0F (0.0C)

Range: 0 to 125F COOLER T

RT.DG XX.X FRETURN - DEGREES RESET Default: 0.0F

Range: –30 to 30F (–34.4 to -1.1 C)

DMDC X DEMAND LIMIT SELECT Default: None

0 = None

1 = Switch

2 = 4 to 20 mA Input

3 = CCN Loadshed

DM20 XXX % DEMAND LIMIT AT 20 MA Default: 100%

Range: 0 to 100%

SHNM XXX LOADSHED GROUP NUMBER Default: 0

Range: 0 to 99

SHDL XXX % LOADSHED DEMAND DELTA Default: 0%

Range: 0 to 60%

SHTM XXX MAXIMUM LOADSHED TIME Default: 60 minutes

Range: 0 to 120 minutes

DLS1 XXX % DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1 Default: 80%

Range: 0 to 100%

DLS2 XXX % DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2 Default: 50%

Range: 0 to 100%

LLEN ENBL/DSBL LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE Default: Disable

MSSL SLVE/MAST MASTER/SLAVE SELECT Default: Master

SLVA XXX SLAVE ADDRESS Default: 0

Range: 0 to 239

LLBL X LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT

Default: Master Leads

0 = Master Leads

1 = Slave Leads

2 = Automatic

LLBD XXX LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA Default: 168 hours

Range: 40 to 400 hours

LLDY XXX LAG START DELAY Default: 5 minutes

Range: 0 to 30 minutes

PARA YES PARALLEL CONFIGURATION Default: YES (CANNOT BE CHANGED)

SLCT SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD

CLSP X COOLING SETPOINT SELECT Default: Single

0 = Single

1 = Dual Switch

2 = Dual CCN Occupied

3 = 4 to 20 mA Input (requires

EMM)

RL.S ENBL/DSBL RAMP LOAD SELECT Default: Enable

CRMP X.X COOLING RAMP LOADING Default: 1.0

Range: 0.2 to 2.0

SCHD XX SCHEDULE NUMBER Default: 1

Range: 1 to 99

Z.GN X.X DEADBAND MULTIPLIER Default: 1.0

Range: 1.0 to 4.0

SERV SERVICE CONFIGURATION

EN.A1 ENBL/DSBL ENABLE COMPRESSOR A1 Unit dependent

EN.A2 ENBL/DSBL ENABLE COMPRESSOR A2 Unit dependent

EN.B1 ENBL/DSBL ENABLE COMPRESSOR B1 Unit dependent

EN.B2 ENBL/DSBL ENABLE COMPRESSOR B2 Unit dependent

ENTER

Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

Table 11 — Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

* Repeats for Occupancy Periods 2 through 8.

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

BCST BROADCAST CONFIGURATION

T.D.BC ON/OFF CCN TIME/DATE BROADCAST

OAT.B ON/OFF CCN OAT BROADCAST

G.S.BC ON/OFF GLOBAL SCHEDULE BROADCAST

BC.AK ON/OFF CCN BROADCAST ACK’ER

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

TIME TIME OF DAY

HH.MM XX.XX HOUR AND MINUTE Military (00:00 – 23:59)

DATE MONTH,DATE,DAY AND YEAR

MNTH XX MONTH OF YEAR 1-12 (1 = January, 2 = February, etc)

DOM XX DAY OF MONTH Range: 01-31

DAY X DAY OF WEEK 1-7 (1 = Sunday, 2 = Monday, etc)

YEAR XXXX YEAR OF CENTURY

DST DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME

STR.M XX MONTH Default: 4, Range 1 – 12

STR.W X WEEK Default: 1, Range 1 – 5

STR.D X DAY Default: 7, Range 1 – 7

MIN.A XX MINUTES TO ADD Default: 60, Range 0 – 99

STP.M XX MONTH Default: 10, Range 1 – 12

STP.W XX WEEK Default: 5, Range 1 – 5

STP.D XX DAY Default: 7, Range 1 – 7

MIN.S XX MINUTES TO SUBTRACT Default: 60, Range 0 – 99

HOL.L LOCAL HOLIDAY SCHEDULES HD.01 through HD.30

MON XX HOLIDAY START MONTH Range 0 – 12

DAY XX START DAY Range 0 – 31

LEN XX DURATION (DAYS) Range 0 - 99

SCH.N XX SCHEDULE NUMBER Default: 1, Range 1 – 99

SCH.L LOCAL OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE

PER.1 OCCUPANCY PERIOD 1*

OCC.1 XX:XX PERIOD OCCUPIED TIME Military (00:00 – 23:59)

UNC.1 XX.XX PERIOD UNOCCUPIED TIME Military (00:00 – 23:59)

MON.1 YES/NO MONDAY IN PERIOD

TUE.1 YES/NO TUESDAY IN PERIOD

WED.1 YES/NO WEDNESDAY IN PERIOD

THU.1 YES/NO THURSDAY IN PERIOD

FRI.1 YES/NO FRIDAY IN PERIOD

SAT.1 YES/NO SATURDAY IN PERIOD

SUN.1 YES/NO SUNDAY IN PERIOD

HOL.1 YES/NO HOLIDAY IN PERIOD

ENTER

Table 11 — Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

Table 12 — Operating Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

LEGEND

Table 13 — Alarms Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

OVR SCHEDULE OVERRIDE

OVR.T X TIMED OVERRIDE HOURS Default: 0, Range 0-4 hours

OVR.L X OVERRIDE TIME LIMIT Default: 0, Range 0-4 hours

T.OVR YES/NO TIMED OVERRIDE User Entry

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

MODE MODES CONTROLLING UNIT

MD01 ON/OFF CSM CONTROLLING CHILLER

MD02 ON/OFF WSM CONTROLLING CHILLER

MD03 ON/OFF MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL

MD05 ON/OFF RAMP LOAD LIMITED

MD06 ON/OFF TIMED OVERRIDE IN EFFECT

MD07 ON/OFF LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPA

MD08 ON/OFF LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPB

MD09 ON/OFF SLOW CHANGE OVERRIDE

MD10 ON/OFF MINIMUM OFF TIME ACTIVE

MD13 ON/OFF DUAL SETPOINT

MD14 ON/OFF TEMPERATURE RESET

MD15 ON/OFF DEMAND/SOUND LIMITED

MD16 ON/OFF COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION

MD17 ON/OFF LOW TEMPERATURE COOLING

MD18 ON/OFF HIGH TEMPERATURE COOLING

MD19 ON/OFF MAKING ICE

MD20 ON/OFF STORING ICE

MD21 ON/OFF HIGH SCT CIRCUIT A

MD22 ON/OFF HIGH SCT CIRCUIT B

MD23 ON/OFF MINIMUM COMP ON TIME

MD24 ON/OFF PUMP OFF DELAY TIME

MD25 ON/OFF LOW SOUND MODE

CSM — Chillervisor System Manager

SCT — Saturated Condensing Temperature

WSM — Water System Manager

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

CRNT AXXX OR TXXX CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARMS Alarms are shown as AXXX.

Alerts are shown as TXXX.

RCRN YES/NO RESET ALL CURRENT ALARMS

HIST AXXX OR TXXX ALARM HISTORY Alarms are shown as AXXX.

Alerts are shown as TXXX.

ENTER

Table 14 — Operating Modes

MODE

NO. ITEM EXPANSION DESCRIPTION

01 CSM CONTROLLING CHILLER Chillervisor System Manager (CSM) is controlling the chiller.

02 WSM CONTROLLING CHILLER Water System Manager (WSM) is controlling the chiller.

03 MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL Dual Chiller control is enabled.

RAMP LOAD LIMITED Ramp load (pull-down) limiting in effect. In this mode, the rate at which leaving fluid temperature

is dropped is limited to a predetermined value to prevent compressor overloading. See Cooling

Ramp Loading (Configuration



SLCT



CRMP). The pull-down limit can be modified, if

desired, to any rate from 0.2° F to 2° F (0.1° to 1° C)/minute.

TIMED OVERRIDE IN EFFECT Timed override is in effect. This is a 1 to 4 hour temporary override of the programmed

schedule, forcing unit to Occupied mode. Override can be implemented with unit under

Local (Enable) or CCN (Carrier Comfort Network®) control. Override expires after each use.

LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPA Circuit A cooler Freeze Protection mode. At least one compressor must be on, and the Sat-

urated Suction Temperature is not increasing greater than 1.1° F (0.6° C) in 10 seconds. If

the saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point (Set Points



FRZ



BR.FZ) minus 6° F (3.4° C) and less than the leaving fluid temperature minus 14° F

(7.8° C) for 2 minutes, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. Or, If the satu-

rated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point minus 14° F (7.8° C), for

90 seconds, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. The control will continue to

decrease capacity as long as either condition exists.

LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPB Circuit B cooler Freeze Protection mode. At least one compressor must be on, and the Sat-

urated Suction Temperature is not increasing greater than 1.1° F (0.6° C) in 10 seconds. If

the saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point (Set Points



FRZ



BR.FZ) minus 6° F (3.4° C) and less than the leaving fluid temperature minus 14° F

(7.8° C) for 2 minutes, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. Or, If the satu-

rated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point minus 14° F (7.8° C), for

90 seconds, a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. The control will continue to

decrease capacity as long as either condition exists.

09 SLOW CHANGE OVERRIDE Slow change override is in effect. The leaving fluid temperature is close to and moving

towards the control point.

10 MINIMUM OFF TIME ACTIVE Chiller is being held off by Minutes Off Time (Configuration



OPT2



DELY).

DUAL SETPOINT Dual Set Point mode is in effect. Chiller controls to Cooling Set Point 1 (Set Points



COOL



CSP.1) during occupied periods and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set Points



COOL



CSP.2)

during unoccupied periods.

TEMPERATURE RESET Temperature reset is in effect. In this mode, chiller is using temperature reset to adjust leav-

ing fluid set point upward and is currently controlling to the modified set point. The set point

can be modified based on return fluid, outdoor-air-temperature, space temperature, or 4 to

20 mA signal.

DEMAND/SOUND LIMITED Demand limit is in effect. This indicates that the capacity of the chiller is being limited by

demand limit control option. Because of this limitation, the chiller may not be able to pro-

duce the desired leaving fluid temperature. Demand limit can be controlled by switch inputs

or a 4 to 20 mA signal.

COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION Cooler fluid temperatures are approaching the Freeze point (see Alarms and Alerts section

for definition). The chiller will be shut down when either fluid temperature falls below the

Freeze point.

LOW TEMPERATURE COOLING Chiller is in Cooling mode and the rate of change of the leaving fluid is negative and

decreasing faster than -0.5° F per minute. Error between leaving fluid and control point

exceeds fixed amount. Control will automatically unload the chiller if necessary.

HIGH TEMPERATURE COOLING Chiller is in Cooling mode and the rate of change of the leaving fluid is positive and increasing.

Error between leaving fluid and control point exceeds fixed amount. Control will automatically

load the chiller if necessary to better match the increasing load.

19 MAKING ICE Chiller is in an unoccupied mode and is using Cooling Set Point 3 (Set Points



COOL





CSP.3) to make ice. The ice done input to the Energy Management Module (EMM) is open.

20 STORING ICE Chiller is in an unoccupied mode and is controlling to Cooling Set Point 2 (Set Points



COOL



CSP.2). The ice done input to the Energy Management Module (EMM) is closed.

HIGH SCT CIRCUIT A Chiller is in a Cooling mode and the Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT) is greater than

the calculated maximum limit. No additional stages of capacity will be added. Chiller capacity

may be reduced if SCT continues to rise to avoid high-pressure switch trips by reducing con-

densing temperature.

HIGH SCT CIRCUIT B Chiller is in a Cooling mode and the Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT) is greater than

the calculated maximum limit. No additional stages of capacity will be added. Chiller capacity

may be reduced if SCT continues to rise to avoid high-pressure switch trips by reducing con-

densing temperature.

MINIMUM COMP ON TIME Cooling load may be satisfied, however control continues to operate compressor to ensure

proper oil return. May be an indication of oversized application, low fluid flow rate or low loop

volume.

PUMP OFF DELAY TIME Cooling load is satisfied, however cooler pump continues to run for the number of minutes set

by the configuration variable Cooler Pump Shutdown Delay (Configuration



OPT1





PM.DY).

25 LOW SOUND MODE Chiller operates at higher condensing temperature and/or reduced capacity to minimize

overall unit noise during evening/night hours (Configuration



OPT2



LS.MD).

CONTROLS

General — The 30RAP air-cooled scroll chillers contain

the ComfortLink™ electronic control system that controls and

monitors all operations of the chiller.

The control system is composed of several components as

listed in the sections below. See Fig. 3-5 for typical control box

drawings. See Fig. 6 and 7 for control schematics.

Main Base Board (MBB) — See Fig. 8. The MBB is

the heart of the ComfortLink control system. It contains the

major portion of operating software and controls the operation

of the machine. The MBB continuously monitors input/output

channel information received from its inputs and from all other

modules. The MBB receives inputs from the discharge and

suction pressure transducers and thermistors. See Table 15. The

MBB also receives the feedback inputs from each compressor

current sensor board and other status switches. See Table 16.

The MBB also controls several outputs. Relay outputs con-

trolled by the MBB are shown in Table 17. Information is

transmitted between modules via a 3-wire communication bus

or LEN (Local Equipment Network). The CCN (Carrier Com-

fort Network) bus is also supported. Connections to both LEN

and CCN buses are made at the LVT (low voltage terminal).

See Fig. 8.

Energy Management Module (EMM) — The EMM

module is available as a factory-installed option or as a field-

installed accessory. The EMM module receives 4 to 20 mA

inputs for the leaving fluid temperature reset, cooling set point

and demand limit functions. The EMM module also receives

the switch inputs for the field-installed 2-stage demand limit

and ice done functions. The EMM module communicates the

status of all inputs with the MBB, and the MBB adjusts the

control point, capacity limit, and other functions according to

the inputs received.

Current Sensor Board (CSB) — The CSB is used to

monitor the status of the compressors by measuring current and

providing an analog input to the main base board (MBB) or

compressor expansion module (CXB).

AUX Board (AUX) — The AUX is used with the digital

scroll option and the low ambient head pressure option. It pro-

vides additional inputs and outputs for digital scroll control

along with analog outputs to control head pressure control fan

speeds.

Expansion Valve Board (EXV) — The EXV board

communicates with the MBB and directly controls the expan-

sion valves to maintain the correct compressor superheat.

Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch — The Enable/

Off/Remote Contact switch is a 3-position switch used to

control the chiller. When switched to the Enable position the

chiller is under its own control. Move the switch to the Off

position to shut the chiller down. Move the switch to the

Remote Contact position and a field-installed dry contact can

be used to start the chiller. The contacts must be capable of

handling a 24 vac, 50-mA load. In the Enable and Remote

Contact (dry contacts closed) positions, the chiller is allowed to

operate and respond to the scheduling configuration, CCN

configuration and set point data. See Fig. 9.

Emergency On/Off Switch — The Emergency On/Off

switch should only be used when it is required to shut the

chiller off immediately. Power to the MBB, EMM, and

marquee display is interrupted when this switch is off and all

outputs from these modules will be turned off.

Board Addresses — The main base board (MBB) has a

3-position instance jumper that must be set to ‘1.’ The elec-

tronic expansion valve board (EXV) and energy management

board (EMM) have 4-position DIP switches. All switches are

set to ‘On’ for these boards. The auxiliary board (AUX) has an

8-position DIP switch. Switches 2, 5, and 7 are set to ‘On.’

Control Module Communication

RED LED — Proper operation of the control boards can be

visually checked by looking at the red status LEDs

(light-emitting diodes). When operating correctly, the red status

LEDs should be blinking in unison at a rate of once every

2 seconds. If the red LEDs are not blinking in unison, verify

that correct power is being supplied to all modules. Be sure that

the main base board (MBB) is supplied with the current soft-

ware. If necessary, reload current software. If the problem still

persists, replace the MBB. A red LED that is lit continuously or

blinking at a rate of once per second or faster indicates that the

board should be replaced.

GREEN LED — The MBB has one green LED. The Local

Equipment Network (LEN) LED should always be blinking

whenever power is on. All other boards have a LEN LED

which should be blinking whenever power is on. Check LEN

connections for potential communication errors at the board J3

and/or J4 connectors. Communication between modules is

accomplished by a 3-wire sensor bus. These 3 wires run in

parallel from module to module. The J4 connector on the MBB

provides both power and communication directly to the

marquee display only.

YELLOW LED — The MBB has one yellow LED. The

Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) LED will blink during times

of network communication.

Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) Interface —

The 30RAP chiller units can be connected to the CCN if

desired. The communication bus wiring is a shielded,

3-conductor cable with drain wire and is supplied and installed

in the field. See Table 18. The system elements are connected

to the communication bus in a daisy chain arrangement. The

positive pin of each system element communication connector

must be wired to the positive pins of the system elements on

either side of it. This is also required for the negative and

signal ground pins of each system element. Wiring connections

for CCN should be made at LVT. Consult the CCN Contrac-

tor’s Manual for further information.

NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (Ameri-

can Wire Gage) minimum stranded, tinned copper. Individual

conductors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon, vinyl,

Teflon, or polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil

shield and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl,

or Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of

–20 C to 60 C is required. Wire manufactured by Alpha (2413

or 5463), American (A22503), Belden (8772), or Columbia

(02525) meets the above mentioned requirements.

It is important when connecting to a CCN communication

bus that a color coding scheme be used for the entire network

to simplify the installation. It is recommended that red be used

for the signal positive, black for the signal negative, and white

for the signal ground. Use a similar scheme for cables contain-

ing different colored wires.

At each system element, the shields of its communication

bus cables must be tied together. If the communication bus is

entirely within one building, the resulting continuous shield

must be connected to a ground at one point only. If the commu-

nication bus cable exits from one building and enters another,

the shields must be connected to grounds at the lightning

suppressor in each building where the cable enters or exits the

building (one point per building only). To connect the unit to

the network:

1. Turn off power to the control box.

2. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends of the red (+), white

(ground), and black (–) conductors. (Substitute appropri-

ate colors for different colored cables.)

3. Connect the red wire to (+) terminal on LVT of the plug,

the white wire to COM terminal, and the black wire to the

(–) terminal.

4. The RJ14 CCN connector on LVT can also be used, but is

only intended for temporary connection (for example, a

laptop computer running Service Tool).

Table 15 — Thermistor Designations

LEGEND

Table 16 — Status Inputs

Table 17 — Output Relays

Table 18 — CCN Communication Bus Wiring

Sensors — The electronic control uses 4 to 7 thermistors to

sense temperatures for controlling chiller operation. See

Table 15. These sensors are outlined below. Thermistors RG-

TA, RGTB, EWT, LWT, and OAT are identical in temperature

versus resistance and voltage drop performance. The dual chill-

er thermistor is 5 kat 77 F (25 C)thermistor. Space tempera-

ture thermistor is a 10 kat 77 F (25 C). The DTT thermistor

is an 86 kat 77 F (25 C)thermistor. See Thermistors section

for temperature-resistance-voltage drop characteristics.

COOLER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR — The thermistor is

installed in a well in the factory-installed leaving fluid piping

coming from the bottom of the brazed-plate heat exchanger.

COOLER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR — The thermistor is

installed in a well in the factory-installed entering fluid piping

coming from the top of the brazed-plate heat exchanger.

COMPRESSOR RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE SEN-

SOR — These thermistors are installed in a well located in the

suction line of each circuit.

OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (OAT) —

This sensor is factory installed on a bracket which is inserted

through the base pan of the unit.

DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR

(DTT) — This sensor is only used on units with a digital

compressor. The sensor is mounted on the discharge line close

to the discharge of the digital compressor. It attaches to the dis-

charge line using a spring clip and protects the system from

high discharge gas temperature when the digital compressor is

used. This sensor is a connected to the AUX board.

REMOTE SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR OR DUAL

LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR — One of

two inputs can be connected to the LVT. See appropriate sen-

sor below.

Remote Space Temperature Sensor — Sensor (part no.

33ZCT55SPT) is an accessory sensor that is remotely mounted

in the controlled space and used for space temperature reset.

The sensor should be installed as a wall-mounted thermostat

would be (in the conditioned space where it will not be sub-

jected to either a cooling or heating source or direct exposure

to sunlight, and 4 to 5 ft above the floor).

Space temperature sensor wires are to be connected to

terminals in the unit main control box. The space temperature

sensor includes a terminal block (SEN) and a RJ11 female

connector. The RJ11 connector is used access into the Carrier

Comfort Network® (CCN) at the sensor.

To connect the space temperature sensor (Fig. 10):

1. Using a 20 AWG twisted pair conductor cable rated for

the application, connect 1 wire of the twisted pair to one

SEN terminal and connect the other wire to the other

SEN terminal located under the cover of the space

temperature sensor.

2. Connect the other ends of the wires to terminals 5 and 6

on TB5 located in the unit control box.

IMPORTANT: A shorted CCN bus cable will prevent some

routines from running and may prevent the unit from start-

ing. If abnormal conditions occur, unplug the connector. If

conditions return to normal, check the CCN connector and

cable. Run new cable if necessary. A short in one section of

the bus can cause problems with all system elements on the

bus.

THERMISTOR

CONNECTION

POINT

THERMISTOR INPUT

LWT J8-13,14 (MBB) Cooler Leaving Fluid

EWT J8-11,12 (MBB) Cooler Entering Fluid

RGTA J8-1,2 (MBB) Circuit A Return Gas

Temperature

RGTB J8-3,4 (MBB) Circuit B (035-060 only)

Return Gas Temperature

OAT J8-7,8 (MBB) Outdoor-Air Temperature

Sensor

SPT

J8-5,6 (MBB)

TB5-5,6

Accessory Remote Space

Temperature Sensor or

Dual LWT Sensor

DTT J6-1,2 (AUX) Discharge Temperature

Thermistor

LWT — Leaving Water Temperature

MBB — Main Base Board

STATUS SWITCH PIN CONNECTION POINT

Chilled Water Pump 1 J7-1,2

Chilled Water Pump 2 J7-3,4

Remote On/Off LVT-13,14

Cooler Flow Switch J7-9,10

Compressor Fault Signal, A1 J9-11,12

Compressor Fault Signal, A2 J9-5,6

Compressor Fault Signal, B1 J9-8,9

Compressor Fault Signal, B2 J9-2,3

RELAY

NO. DESCRIPTION

Energize Compressor A1 (010-030)

Energize Compressor A1 and Condenser Fan Contac-

tor 3 (055,060)

K2 Energize Compressor A2 (all but 010, 015 60 Hz)

K3 Energize Chilled Water Pump 1 Output

K4 Energize Chilled Water Pump 2 Output

Energize Compressor B1 (035-050)

Energize Compressor B1 and Condenser Fan Contac-

tor 3 (055,060)

K6 Energize Compressor B2 (035-060)

K7 Alarm Relay

K8 Cooler/Pump Heater

K9 Energize Condenser Fan Contactor 1 (018-060)

K10 Energize Condenser Fan Contactor 2 (018-060)

K11 Minimum Load Valve

MANUFACTURER PART NO.

Regular Wiring Plenum Wiring

Alpha 1895 —

American A21451 A48301

Belden 8205 884421

Columbia D6451 —

Manhattan M13402 M64430

Quabik 6130 —

Units on the CCN can be monitored from the space at the

sensor through the RJ11 connector, if desired. To wire the RJ11

connector into the CCN (Fig. 11):

1. Cut the CCN wire and strip ends of the red (+), white

(ground), and black (–) conductors. (If another wire color

scheme is used, strip ends of appropriate wires.)

2. Insert and secure the red (+) wire to terminal 5 of the

space temperature sensor terminal block.

3. Insert and secure the white (ground) wire to terminal 4 of

the space temperature sensor.

4. Insert and secure the black (–) wire to terminal 2 of the

space temperature sensor.

5. Connect the other end of the communication bus cable to

the remainder of the CCN communication bus.

Dual Leaving Water Temperature Sensor — For dual chiller

applications (parallel only are supported), connect the dual

chiller leaving fluid temperature sensor (refer to Configuring

and Operating Dual Chiller Control section on page 36) to the

space temperature input of the Master chiller. If space tempera-

ture is required for reset applications, connect the sensor to the

Slave chiller and configure the slave chiller to broadcast the

value to the Master chiller.

LEGEND FOR FIG. 3-7

IMPORTANT: The cable selected for the RJ11 connector

wiring MUST be identical to the CCN communication bus

wire used for the entire network. Refer to Table 18 for

acceptable wiring.

ALMR — Alarm Relay

AUX — Auxilliary

BR — Boiler Relay

C—Contactor, Compressor

CB — Circuit Breaker

CCB — Compressor Circuit Breaker

CH — Crankcase Heater

CHC — Cooler/Pump Heater Contactor

COMP — Compressor

CSB — Current Sensor Board

CWFS — Chilled Water Flow Switch

CWP — Chilled Water Pump

DGS — Digital Scroll Compressor

DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer

DTT — Discharge Temperature Thermistor

DUS — Digital Unloader Solenoid

EMM — Energy Management

EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve

FB — Fuse Block

FC — Fan Contactor

FCB — Fan Circuit Breaker

FIOP — factory Installed Option

FR — Fan Relay

GND — Ground

HPS — High-Pressure Switch

LON — Local Operating Network

LVT — Low Voltage Terminal Block

MBB — Main Base Board

MLV — Minimum Load Valve

MM — Motormaster

MP — Motor Protector

MS — Manual Starter

NEC — National Electrical Code

OAT — Outdoor-Air Thermistor

OFM — Outdoor Fan Motor

RGT — Return Gas Thermistor

SCCR — Short Circuit Current Rating

SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer

SW — Switch

TB — Terminal Block

TNKR — Storage Tank Heater Relay

TRAN — Transformer

UPC — Unitary Protocol Converter

Terminal Block

Terminal (Unmarked)

Terminal (Marked)

Splice

Factory Wiring

Field Wiring

Accessory or Option Wiring

To indicate common potential only; not to represent wiring.

CONTROL BOX

FAN

COMPRESSOR

LOCATED OVER EMM AND EXV

EMM EXV

LON

AUX

UPC

TB1 TB4

CSB-A1

MBB

CHC

CCB

FB-1

TRAN

DISCONNECT

OPTION/TB

C-A1 MM

MS-

CWP1

MS-

CWP2

EMM EXV

CCB-1

TB1

TB4

CHC

AUX

LON UPC

FC1/MM

CSB-A1

MBB

C-A1

FB-3

TRAN CCB-2

CSB-A2

DISCONNECT

OPTION/TB

FC2 C-A2

FB-1

CWP1 CWP2

MS-

CWP1

MS-

CWP2

Fig. 3 — Typical Control Box for 30RAP010,015

Fig. 4 — Typical Control Box for 30RAP018-030

a30-4962

a30-4963

LOCATED OVER EMM AND EXV

CONTROL BOX END

A1 A2 B1 B2

COMPRESSORS

FAN

055,060 UNIT ONLY

TRAN-1

CB-1 CB-2 FCB-1/2/3

TRAN-2

CSB-A1 CSB-A2

C-A1

FR-1 FR-2

C-A2

FC-1

FC-2 FC-3

AUX LON

EMM EXV

UPC

TB1

TB4

MBB

MS-

CWP1

MS-

CWP2

FR-3

C-B1

CSB-B1

CB-3

CHC

CWP1 CWP2

FR-4

CSB-B2

C-B2

CB-4

DISCONNECT

OPTION/TB

Fig. 5 — Typical Control Box for 30RAP035-060

a30-4964

COMP A2

TRAN1

H2 H3 H4

SECONDARY 24V

RED

FC2

FU3

SW2

CONNECT FOR

APPROPRIATE

PRIMARY VOLTAGE

SEE TABLE 1

CB1A

TO FUSED

DISCONNECT

PER NEC

OPTIONAL

DISCONNECT

3.2 AMPS

CB3

3T3

LOW AMBIENT OPERATION (MOTORMASTER V) FIOP/ACCESSORY

GRN/YEL

VIO

11 21

12 22

13 23

11 21

12 22

13 23

CA1

BLK

YEL

BLU

11 21

12 22

13 23

CA2

CCB-1

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

YEL

BLU BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

CCB-2

BLK

YEL

BLK

380V,460V,575V

ONLY

BLU

YEL

BLU

GRN/YEL

OFM2

BLU

YEL

BLK

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

YEL

BLUBLK

FU1 BLK

FU2 YEL

GRN/YEL

RED

TB4

VIO

CTB1

BRN

PRIMARY

* MM SIGNAL CONNECTION

VOLTAGE ZHBT

208/230/460/575 061

380 06A31

NOTES:

1. FACTORY WIRING IS IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL 1995 STANDARDS.

ANY FIELD MODIFICATIONS OR ADDITIONS MUST BE IN

COMPLIANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES.

C MIN WIRE FOR FIELD POWER SUPPLY.

3. ALL FIELD INTERLOCK CONTACTS MUST HAVE A MIN RATING OF

2 AMPS @ 24VAC SEALED. SEE FIELD INTERLOCK WIRING.

4. COMPRESSOR AND FAN MOTORS ARE THERMALLY PROTECTED--

THREE PHASE MOTORS PROTECTED AGAINST PRIMARY SINGLE

PHASE CONDITIONS.

5. TERMINALS 13 & 14 OF LVT ARE FOR FIELD CONNECTION

OF REMOTE ON-OFF. THE CONTACT MUST BE RATED FOR DRY

CIRCUIT APPLICATION CAPABLE OF HANDLING A 5VDC

1 MA TO 20 MA LOAD.

6. FOR 500 SERIES UNIT OPERATION AT 208-3-60V LINE VOLTAGE,

TRAN1 PRIMARY CONNECTIONS MUST BE MOVED TO TERMINALS H3 & H4.

9. MP-A1 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:

018,020: ALL UNITS

10. MP-A2 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:

018-020: ALL UNITS

11. JUMPER PLUG REQUIRED WHEN MP NOT USED

VOLTAGE SERIES

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS

FOR PRIMARY SIDE

575-3-60 100 H1 & H2

380-3-60 200 H1 & H2

230-3-60 500 H2 & H4

208-3-60 500 H3 & H4

460-3-60 600 H1 & H4

TABLE 1

UNIT VOLTAGE REPLACE

WITH

FNQ-R-3.5

FU1 & FU2

FUSE

NUMBER

380-3-60

TRAN

SIZE

200VA FNQ-R-2.5

208/230-3-60

FNM-10

FU3 (24V) 380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60 200VA

208/230-3-60

460-3-60

575-3-60

FNQ-R-2

FNQ-R-1.5

7. FOR UNITS WITH LOW AMBIENT MOTOR MASTER V FIOP/ACCESSORY,

FAN CONTACTOR FC1 IS REPLACED WITH MOTORMASTER RELAY MMR.

CH-A2

BLU

BLK

CH-A1

BLU

BLK

GRN/YEL

FC1 1

11 21

12 22

13 23

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

CWP1

CWP2

MS-CWP2

MS-CWP1

BLK

CWP1

WATER

PUMP

CWP2

WATER

PUMP

L1 T1

L2 T2

L3 T3

L1 T1

L2 T2

L3 T3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU GRN/YEL

GRN/YEL

VOLTAGE SERIES

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS

FOR PRIMARY SIDE

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS FOR

SECONDARY SIDE

575-3-60 100 H1-H2 XF-X2

230-3-60 400,500 H2-H4 XF-X2

208-3-60 500 H3-H4 XF-X2

460-3-60 600 H1-H4 XF-X2

TRAN3

SECONDARY

115V

WHT

RESET

TEST

GRN-YEL

GFI-CO

FIOP/ACCESSORY

BRASS SCREW

SILVER SCREW

WHT FU4

X3 X1

LOAD

LINE

BRASS SCREW

SILVER SCREW

BLK

FU6

RED

FU5

AV0056UF & 5UF

FNM-6

FU4 (115V) 380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60 500VA

208/230-3-60

460-3-60,575-3-60

208/230-3-60,230-3-60

FNQ-R-2.5

FNQ-R-3.5

8. IF CHILLED WATER PUMP INTERLOCK IS USED,

REMOVE JUMPER FROM TERMINAL 11 TO 17 AND

CHILLED WATER PUMP FIOP

WIRE INTERLOCK CONTACT ACROSS TERMINALS 11 & 17.

025,030: 460V UNITS WITHOUT DIGITAL SCROLL

025,030: 460V UNITS

GRN/YEL

OFM1

GRN/YEL

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

L1 T1

L2 T2

L3 T3

MMR

11 14

2YEL

VIO

MM-A

FC2

11 21

12 22

13 23 GRN/YEL

OFM2

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

BLK

YEL

BLU

208/230V ONLY

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

RED FROM

AUX-J4

LP-CC-20

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60 NONE

208/230-3-60

KTK-R-15

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60 NONE KTK-R-20208/230-3-60

FB1

(NO MM)

FB1

(WITH MM)

LP-CC-20

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60 NONE

208/230-3-60

FB2

OFM1

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

FB1

BLK

YEL

BLU

FB3

BLK

YEL

BLU

HIGH SCCR

ONLY

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

FB3

HIGH SCCR

ONLY

FB1

BLK

YEL

COOLER/PUMP

HEATERS

(208/230,230V)

BLK

WHT

COOLER/PUMP

HEATERS

(380,460,575V)

BLK

WHT

FB2

YEL

BLUBLK

LP-CC-20

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60 NONE

208/230-3-60

FB3

BLK

YEL

COOLER/PUMP

HEATERS

(208/230,230V)

BLK

WHT

COOLER/PUMP

HEATERS

(380,460,575V)

BLK

WHT

TB4

TB1

RED BRN

BRN

VIO

BRN

RED

EXV

CWFS

BRN

VIO

MBB

BRN

RED

FIOP/ACCESSORY

EMM

BRN

RED

DGS FIOP

AUX

UPC FIOP

UPC

GND

HOT

24VAC

BRN

VIO

240 1/4W

CHC

VIO BRN BRN

BLU

STANDARD

TERMINAL

BLOCK

PER NEC

TO FUSED DISCONNECT

TB1A

EQUIP GND

COMP A1

CSB-A1

CSB-A2

Fig. 6A — Typical Wiring Schematic, 30RAP018-030 Units — Power Wiring

a30-4965

RLY 9

RLY 11

A2A1

ORN

MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED

10VA INRUSH

CTB1

SW2

5.2 AMPS

CB2

A2A1

PNK

A2A1

RLY 10

J10A

J10B

RLY 5

RLY 6

RLY 7

RLY 8

RLY 1

RLY 2

RLY 3

RLY 4

BLK

WHT

RED

BRN

RED

WHT

BLK

RED

WHT

BLK

MARQUEE

DISPLAY

MAIN

BASE

BOARD

FIOP/

M1 M2

ORN

GRA

A2A1

ORN FC2

FC1

CHC

CA1

CA2

ORN ORN

TB4

RED

SEE NOTE 11

RED

PNK

ORN

RED

ORN

GRA

VIO

GRA

RED

BRN

BLK

WHT

RED

BRN

RED

CSB

RED

ORN

BRN

CSB

RED

ORN

BRN

CSB

RED

ORN

BRN

CSB

RED

ORN

BRN

EXV

RED

WHT

BLK

RED

WHT

BLK

OFF

12345678

DARK = SWITCH LOCATION

DUS

J9 2

DTT

RED

WHT

BLK

DGS OR

FIOP

MBB

BLK

RED

LVT

23 T-55

ACCSY

SEN

EMM

RED

WHT

BLK

RED

WHT

BLK

13 14

ACCESSORY

10 +

COOLING

SETPOINT

4-20mA

LVT

(+)

(-)

(COM) SHIELD

LEN CCN

NET +

NET 2

SHIELD

NET +

NET -

N/C

SIGNAL

PORT 1A

UPC

PORT 2

LON

OPTION

GND

NET

UPC OPT

BLK

WHT

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

WHT

BLK

RED

BRN

RED

WHT

BLK

OAT

BLU

PNK

ORN

BRN

VIO

TEMP

RESET

4-20mA

DEMAND

LIMIT

4-20mA

LVT

ALM

LVT

118

TB1

BRN MBB J1-2

T2 T1

MP-A1

T2 T1

MP-A2

SEE NOTE 9

SEE NOTE 10

3.2 AMPS

CB1

TB4

RED

BRN UPC GND

BRN CWFS 3

BRN LVT J12-5

BRN CHC

BRN CA1

BRN

TRAN1

SECONDARY 24V

RED FU3 X1

XF BRN

GRN/YEL

TB4

RED

VIO RED

PL50-1

BRN BLK

PL50-2

RED RED

PL50-3

BLK BLK

PL50-4

BLK

RED RGTA

RED

BLK

CH1

CH11

CH9

J5 CH10

TO MM-A

SEE NOTE 7

BLK

EXV-A

WHT

BLK

RED

GRN

PL-EXVA

RED

BLK

YEL

GRY

FIOP OR

FIELD INSTALLED

OPTION

VIO

RED

FIELD INSTALLED

MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED

10VA INRUSH

A2A1 CWP

2BRN CWP1

MLV-A

GRA BRN

MLV ACCSY

RED

RED 4

TB4

ORN RED

ACCESSORY

STORAGE TANK

HEATER RELAY TNK

BLK

ORN

BRN CTB1

BRN CWP2

BRN CTB1

BRN CA1

BRN CA2

BRN CTB1

BRN CWP1

BRN FC2

BRN CA2

BRN FC3

BRN FC1

RED

BLU

DLS STEP 2

DLS STEP 1

LVT

GRA

ICE DONE

SPTA

DPTA

GRN

RED

BLK

GRN

RED

BLK

RED

EVAPORATOR ENTERING

FLUID TEMP

BLK

RED EVAPORATOR LEAVING

FLUID TEMP

SPACE TEMPERATURE

ACCESSORY OR

DUAL CHILLER LWT

BLK

WHT

RED

14 13 RED

CWP2

RED

14 13 VIO

CWP1

VIO

BRN

VIO

ALMR

HEAT/BOILER FIELD

INSTALLED WIRING

RED

OFF

REMOTE

ON-OFF

SWITCH

(SEE NOTE

ENABLE

SW1

LVT

ORN

CWFS

DUAL

SETPOINT

LVT

GRA

RED

GRA

SEE

NOTE 8

LVT

21 BRN

BRN EXV J1-2

MP-A1

VIO

PL1-2PL1-1

VIO

MP-A2

VIO

PL1-6PL1-5

VIO

J12 T55

J13

J12

J11

PL1-3

RED RED

PL1-4

BRN

PL1-7

RED RED

PL1-8

BRN

GRA

BLK

HPS-A

J10

J11

BLK

WHT

J12

CWPI

HEAT

J12

AUX

Fig. 6B — Typical Wiring Schematic, 30RAP018-030 Units — Control Wiring a30-4966

SEE NOTES ON

PAGE 24.

COMP A2

GRN/YEL

TRAN1

H2 H3 H4

SECONDARY 24V

RED

FC2

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

FU3

SW2

CONNECT FOR

APPROPRIATE

PRIMARY VOLTAGE

SEE TABLE 1

CB1A

TO FUSED

DISCONNECT

PER NEC

OPTIONAL

DISCONNECT

3.2 AMPS

CB3

3T3

LOW AMBIENT OPERATION (MOTORMASTER V) FIOP/ACCESSORY

GRN/YEL

VIO

11 21

12 22

13 23

11 21

12 22

13 23

CA1

BLK

YEL

BLU

11 21

12 22

13 23

CA2

CCB-1

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

YEL

BLU BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

CCB-2

BLK

YEL

BLK

380V,460V,575V

ONLY

BLU

YEL

BLU

GRN/YEL

OFM1

FC3

11 21

12 22

13 23

COMP B2

3T3

GRN/YEL

11 21

12 22

13 23

CB1

BLK

YEL

BLU

11 21

12 22

13 23

CB2

CCB-3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

YEL

BLU BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

CCB-4

BLK

YEL

380V,460V,575V

ONLY

208/230V ONLY

BLU

YEL

BLK

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

YEL

BLUBLK

BRN

FU1 BLK

FU2 YEL

GRN/YEL

TRAN2

COM

RED

TB4

VIO

TB4

VIO

TB1

BLK

YEL

BRN

PRIMARY

CONNECT FOR

APPROPRIATE

PRIMARY VOLTAGE

SEE TABLE 2

* MM SIGNAL CONNECTION

VOLTAGE

TB HZ

208/230/460/575

160

380

13A 60

FCB2/FB2

NOTES:

1. FACTORY WIRING IS IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL 1995 STANDARDS.

ANY FIELD MODIFICATIONS OR ADDITIONS MUST BE IN

COMPLIANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES.

2. USE 75 C MIN WIRE FOR FIELD POWER SUPPLY.

3. ALL FIELD INTERLOCK CONTACTS MUST HAVE A MIN RATING OF

2 AMPS @ 24VAC SEALED. SEE FIELD INTERLOCK WIRING.

4. COMPRESSOR AND FAN MOTORS ARE THERMALLY PROTECTED--

THREE PHASE MOTORS PROTECTED AGAINST PRIMARY SINGLE

PHASE CONDITIONS.

5. TERMINALS 13 & 14 OF LVT ARE FOR FIELD CONNECTION

OF REMOTE ON-OFF. THE CONTACT MUST BE RATED FOR DRY

CIRCUIT APPLICATION CAPABLE OF HANDLING A 5VDC

1 MA TO 20 MA LOAD.

6. FOR 500 SERIES UNIT OPERATION AT 208-3-60V LINE VOLTAGE,

TRAN1 PRIMARY CONNECTIONS MUST BE MOVED TO TERMINALS H3 & H4.

10. MP-A1 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:

035-045: ALL UNITS

11. MP-A2 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:

035-045: ALL UNITS

12. MP-B1 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:

035,040: ALL UNITS

045-060: 460V UNITS

13. MP-B2 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS:

035,040: ALL UNITS

045-060: 460V UNITS

14. JUMPER PLUG REQUIRED WHEN MP NOT USED

7. FOR 575-3-60V UNITS, FAN CIRCUIT BREAKER FCB2

IS REPLACED WITH FUSE BLOCK FB2.

SEE NOTE 7

BLK

BLU

YEL

VOLTAGE SERIES

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS

FOR PRIMARY SIDE

575-3-60 100 H1 & H2

380-3-60 200 H1 & H2

230-3-60 500 H2 & H4

208-3-60 500 H3 & H4

460-3-60 600 H1 & H4

TABLE 1

UNIT VOLTAGE REPLACE

WITH

FNQ-R-3.5

FU1 & FU2

FUSE

NUMBER

380-3-60

TRAN

SIZE

200VA FNQ-R-2.5

208/230-3-60

FNM-10

FU3 (24V)

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

200VA

208/230-3-60

VOLTAGE SERIES

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS

FOR PRIMARY SIDE

575-3-60 100 COM & 575

380-3-60 200

230-3-60 500

208-3-60 500

460-3-60 600

TABLE 2

460-3-60

575-3-60

FNQ-R-2

FNQ-R-1.5

COM & 380

COM & 230

COM & 208

COM & 460

208 230

380

400

575

460

8. FOR UNITS WITH LOW AMBIENT MOTOR MASTER V FIOP/ACCESSORY,

030-050: FAN CONTACTOR FC1 IS REPLACED WITH MOTORMASTER RELAY MMR.

SECONDARY 24V

3.2 AMPS

CB4

RED

BRN

RED

EXV

BRN

RED

CWFS

CH-A2

BLU

BLK

CH-B1

BLU

BLK

CH-A1

BLU

BLK

CH-B2

BLU

BLK

GRN/YEL

OFM2

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

GRN/YEL

FC1 1

11 21

12 22

13 23

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

BLU

YEL

BLK

CWP1

CWP2

MS-CWP2

MS-CWP1

BLK

CWP1

WATER

PUMP

CWP2

WATER

PUMP

L1 T1

L2 T2

L3 T3

L1 T1

L2 T2

L3 T3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU GRN/YEL

GRN/YEL

VOLTAGE SERIES

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS

FOR PRIMARY SIDE

TERMINAL

CONNECTIONS FOR

SECONDARY SIDE

575-3-60 100 H1-H2 XF-X2

230-3-60 400,500 H2-H4 XF-X2

208-3-60 500 H3-H4 XF-X2

460-3-60 600 H1-H4 XF-X2

TRAN3

SECONDARY

115V

WHT

RESET

TEST

GRN-YEL

GFI-CO

FIOP/ACCESSORY

BRASS SCREW

SILVER SCREW

WHT

FU4

X3 X1

LOAD

LINE

BRASS SCREW

SILVER SCREW

BLK

FU6

RED

FU5

FU5 & FU6 500VA

FNM-6

FU4 (115V)

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

500VA

208/230-3-60

460-3-60,575-3-60

208/230-3-60,230-3-60

FNQ-R-2.5

FNQ-R-3.5

9. IF CHILLED WATER PUMP INTERLOCK IS USED,

REMOVE JUMPER FROM TERMINAL 11 TO 17 AND

CHILLED WATER PUMP FIOP

WIRE INTERLOCK CONTACT ACROSS TERMINALS 11 & 17.

050-060: 460V UNITS WITHOUT DIGITAL SCROLL

050-060: 460V UNITS

GRN/YEL

OFM3

OFM4

(055,060 ONLY)

GRN/YEL

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

OFM4 (055,060)

OFM3 (035-050)

L1 T1

L2 T2

L3 T3

MMR

11 14

2YEL

VIO

MM-A

GRN/YEL

FC2

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

11 21

12 22

13 23

GRN/YEL

OFM1

FC1

11 21

12 22

13 23

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

FCB2/FB2

SEE NOTE 7

GRN/YEL

OFM2

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

OFM3

(055,060 ONLY)

GRN/YEL

BLK

YEL

055,060: FAN CONTACTOR FC3 IS REPLACED WITH MOTORMASTER RELAY MMR..

208/230V ONLY

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

FB1

BLK

YEL

BLU

FB3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

HIGH SCCR

ONLY

FB1

BLK

YEL

BLU

FB3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

HIGH SCCR

ONLY

BLK

RED FROM

AUX-J4

YEL

BLUBLK

FB2 NONE LP-CC-20575-3-60

LP-CC-20

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

NONE

208/230-3-60

KTK-R-15

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

NONE KTK-R-20208/230-3-60

FB1

(NO MM)

FB1

(WITH MM)

LP-CC-20

380-3-60,460-3-60,575-3-60

NONE

208/230-3-60

FB3

BRN

VIO

MBB

BRN

RED

FIOP/ACCESSORY

EMM

BRN

RED

DGS FIOP

AUX

UPC FIOP

UPC

GND

HOT

24VAC

BRN

VIO

BLK

YEL

COOLER/PUMP

HEATERS

(208/230,230V)

BLK

WHT

COOLER/PUMP

HEATERS

(380,460,575V)

BLK

WHT

BLK

YEL

COOLER/PUMP

HEATERS

(208/230,230V)

BLK

WHT

COOLER/PUMP

HEATERS

(380,460,575V)

BLK

WHT

VIO BRN BRN

BLU

240 1/4W

CHC

STANDARD

TERMINAL

BLOCK

PER NEC

TO FUSED DISCONNECT

TB1A

EQUIP GND

COMP A1

COMP B1

CSB-A1

CSB-A2

CSB-B1

CSB-B2

Fig. 7A — Typical Wiring Schematic, 30RAP035-060 Units — Power Wiring

a30-

5283

LEGEND

TERMINAL BLOCK

XTERMINAL (UNMARKED)

TERMINAL (MARKED)

SPLICE

FACTORY WIRING

FIELD WIRING

ACCESSORY OR OPTION WIRING

TO INDICATE COMMON POTENTIAL

ONLY,NOT TO REPRESENT WIRING

RLY 9

RLY 11

A2A1

ORN

MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED

10VA INRUSH

CTB1

SW2

5.2 AMPS

CB2

A2A1

PNK

A2A1

ACCSY ACCESSORY

ALMR ALARM RELAY

AUX AUXILIARY

BR BOILER RELAY

C CONTACTOR, COMPRESSOR

CB CIRCUIT BREAKER

CCB COMPRESSOR CIRCUIT BREAKER

CH CRANKCASE HEATER

CHC COOLER/PUMP HEATER CONTACTOR

CO CONVENIENCE OUTLET

COMP COMPRESSOR

CSB CURRENT SENSOR BOARD

CWFS CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH

CWP CHILLED WATER PUMP

CWPI CHILLED WATER PUMP INTERLOCK

DGS DIGITAL SCROLL

DLS DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH

DPT DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

DTT DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR

DUS DIGITAL UNLOADER SOLENOID

EMM ENERGY MANAGEMENT

EWT ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE

EXV EXPANSION VALVE CONTROL BOARD

FB FUSE BLOCK

FC FAN CONTACTOR

FCB FAN CIRCUIT BREAKER

FIOP FACTORY INSTALLED OPTION

FR FAN RELAY

FU FUSE

GND GROUND

HPS HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH

HR HEAT RELAY

LVT LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL

LWT LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE

MBB MAIN BASE BOARD

MLV MINIMUM LOAD VALVE

MM MOTORMASTER

MMR MOTORMASTER RELAY

MP MODULAR MOTOR PROTECTOR

MS MANUAL STARTER

OAT OUTDOOR AIR THERMISTOR

OFM OUTDOOR FAN MOTOR

PL PLUG

R RELAY

RGT RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE

RLY RELAY

SAT SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE

SCCR SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING

SPT SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

SW SWITCH

TB TERMINAL BLOCK

TNKR STORAGE TANK HEATER RELAY

TRAN TRANSFORMER

UPC UNITARY PROTOCOL CONVERTER

RLY 10

J10A

J10B

RLY 5

RLY 6

RLY 7

RLY 8

RLY 1

RLY 2

RLY 3

RLY 4

BLK

WHT

RED

BRN

RED

WHT

BLK

RED

WHT

BLK

MARQUEE

DISPLAY

MAIN

BASE

BOARD

FIOP/

M1 M2

SEE NOTE 14

M1 M2

ORN

GRA

A2A1

ORN

A2A1

VIO

A2A1

PNK

FC2

FC1

CB1

CB2

CHC

CA1

CA2

ORN ORN

TB4

RED

SEE NOTE 14

RED

BLU

PNK

ORN

VIO

PNK

RED

ORN

GRA

VIO

GRA

RED

BRN

BLK

WHT

RED

BRN

RED

CSB

RED

ORN

BRN

CSB

RED

ORN

BRN

CSB

RED

ORN

BRN

CSB

RED

ORN

BRN

EXV

RED

WHT

BLK

RED

WHT

BLK

OFF

12345678

DARK = SWITCH LOCATION

DUS

J9 2

DTT

RED

WHT

BLK

DGS OR

FIOP

MBB

BLK

RED

LVT

23 T-55

ACCSY

SEN

EMM

RED

WHT

BLK

RED

WHT

BLK

13 14

ACCESSORY

10 +

COOLING

SETPOINT

4-20mA

LVT

(+)

(-)

(COM) SHIELD

LEN CCN

NET +

NET 2

SHIELD

NET +

NET -

N/C

SIGNAL

PORT 1A

UPC

PORT 2

LON

OPTION

GND

NET

UPC OPT

BLK

WHT

RED

BLK

WHT

RED

WHT

BLK

RED

BRN

RED

WHT

BLK

OAT

BLU

PNK

ORN

BRN

VIO

TEMP

RESET

4-20mA

DEMAND

LIMIT

4-20mA

LVT

ALM

LVT

118

TB1

BRN MBB J1-2

T2 T1

MP-A1

T2 T1

MP-A2

T2 T1

MP-B1

T2 T1

MP-B2

SEE NOTE 10

SEE NOTE 11

SEE NOTE 12

SEE NOTE 13

3.2 AMPS

CB1

TB4

RED

BRN UPC GND

BRN CWFS 3

BRN CB1

BRN LVT J12-5

BRN CHC

BRN CA1

BRN

TRAN1

SECONDARY 24V

RED FU3 X1

XF BRN

GRN/YEL

TB4

RED

VIO RED

PL50-1

BRN BLK

PL50-2

RED RED

PL50-3

BLK BLK

PL50-4

BLK

RED RGTB

BLK

RED RGTA

RED

BLK

CH1

CH11

CH9

CH10

TO MM-A

SEE NOTE 8

BLK

BLU

EXV-B

WHT

BLK

RED

GRN

PL-EXVB

EXV-A

WHT

BLK

RED

GRN

PL-EXVA

RED

BLK

GRY

YEL

BLK

YEL

GRY

FIOP OR

FIELD INSTALLED

OPTION

VIO

RED

FIELD INSTALLED

MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED

10VA INRUSH

A2A1 CWP

2BRN CWP1

MLV-A

GRA BRN

MLV ACCSY

FR4

FR3

FR2

TAN

PNK

FR1

TAN PNK

PNK

A2A1 BRN

PNK FC2

FC3

(055,060 ONLY)

RED

RED 4

TB4

ORN RED

ACCESSORY

STORAGE TANK

HEATER RELAY TNK

BLK

ORN

BRN CTB1

BRN CWP2

BRN CTB1

BRN CA1

BRN CA2

BRN CTB1

BRN CB1

BRN CB2

BRN CTB1

BRN CWP1

BRN FC2

BRN CA2

BRN FC1

BRN FC3

RED

BLU

DLS STEP 2

DLS STEP 1

LVT

GRA

ICE DONE

SPTB

DPTB

GRN

RED

BLK

GRN

RED

BLK

SPTA

DPTA

GRN

RED

BLK

GRN

RED

BLK

RED

EVAPORATOR ENTERING

FLUID TEMP

BLK

RED EVAPORATOR LEAVING

FLUID TEMP

SPACE TEMPERATURE

ACCESSORY OR

DUAL CHILLER LWT

BLK

WHT

RED

14 13 RED

CWP2

RED

14 13 VIO

CWP1

VIO

BRN

VIO

ALMR

HEAT/BOILER FIELD

INSTALLED WIRING

RED

OFF

REMOTE

ON-OFF

SWITCH

(SEE NOTE

ENABLE

SW1

LVT

ORN

CWFS

DUAL

SETPOINT

LVT

GRA

TAN

RED

GRA

SEE

NOTE 9

(055,060 ONLY)

SEE NOTE 8

LVT

21 BRN

FR110

ORN BRN

(055,060 ONLY)

FR210

GRA BRN

(055,060 ONLY)

FR310

VIO BRN

(055,060 ONLY)

FR410

PNK BRN

(055,060 ONLY)

MP-B1

VIO

PL2-2PL2-1

VIO

MP-A1

VIO

PL1-2PL1-1

VIO

MP-B2

VIO

PL2-6PL2-5

VIO

MP-A2

VIO

PL1-6PL1-5

VIO

BLU

BLK

HPS-B

J12 T55

J13

J12

J11

PL1-3

RED RED

PL1-4

BRN

PL1-7

RED RED

PL2-3

RED RED

PL2-7

RED RED

PL1-8

BRN

PL2-4

BRN

PL2-8

BRN

GRA

BLK

HPS-A

J10

J11

BLK

WHT

J12

CWPI

HEAT

J12

AUX

Fig. 7B — Typical Wiring Schematic, 30RAP035-060 Units — Control Wiring

a30-5284

CEPL130346-01

STATUS

LEN

J1 J2

J4 J3

J7 J8 J9

J10

CCN

RED LED - STATUS GREEN LED -

LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK)

YELLOW LED -

CCN (CARRIER COMFORT NETWORK)

INSTANCE JUMPER

K11 K10 K9

K8 K7 K6 K5

K4 K3 K2 K1

Fig. 8 — Main Base Board

Fig. 9 — Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch, and Emergency On/Off Switch Locations

SPT (T10) PART NO. 33ZCT55SPT

SENSOR

SEN SEN LVT

Fig. 10 — Typical Space Temperature

Sensor Wiring

T-55 SPACE

SENSOR

CCN+

CCN GND

CCN-

TO CCN

COMM 1

BUS (PLUG)

AT UNIT

Fig. 11 — CCN Communications Bus Wiring

to Optional Space Sensor RJ11 Connector

a30-4967

a30-4968

Energy Management Module (Fig. 12) — This

factory-installed option (FIOP) or field-installed accessory is

used for the following types of temperature reset, demand

limit, and/or ice features:

• 4 to 20 mA leaving fluid temperature reset (requires

field-supplied 4 to 20 mA generator)

• 4 to 20 mA cooling set point reset (requires field-

supplied 4 to 20 mA generator)

• Discrete inputs for 2-step demand limit (requires field-

supplied dry contacts capable of handling a 24 vac,

50 mA load)

• 4 to 20 mA demand limit (requires field-supplied 4 to

20 mA generator)

• Discrete input for Ice Done switch (requires field-

supplied dry contacts capable of handling a 24 vac,

50 mA load)

See Demand Limit and Temperature Reset sections on

pages 41 and 37 for further details.

Loss-of-Cooler Flow Protection — A proof-of-

cooler flow device is factory installed in all chillers. It is recom-

mended that proper operation of the switch be verified on a reg-

ular basis.

Electronic Expansion Valves (EXV) — All units are

equipped from the factory with EXVs. Each refrigeration cir-

cuit is also supplied with a factory-installed liquid line filter

drier and sight glass.

The EXV is set at the factory to maintain 9° F (5.0° C) suc-

tion superheat leaving the cooler by metering the proper

amount of refrigerant into the cooler. The superheat set point is

adjustable, but should not be adjusted unless absolutely

necessary.

The EXV is designed to limit the cooler saturated suction

temperature to 50 F (12.8 C). This makes it possible for unit to

start at high cooler fluid temperatures without overloading the

compressor.

Capacity Control — The control system cycles com-

pressors, digital scroll modulting solenoid (if equipped), and

minimum load valve solenoids (if equipped) to maintain the

user-configured leaving chilled fluid temperature set point. En-

tering fluid temperature is used by the main base board (MBB)

to determine the temperature drop across the cooler and is used

in determining the optimum time to add or subtract capacity

stages. The chilled fluid temperature set point can be automati-

cally reset by the return fluid temperature, space, or outdoor-air

temperature reset features. It can also be reset from an external

4 to 20-mA signal (requires energy management module FIOP

or accessory).

The standard control has an automatic lead-lag feature built

in which determines the wear factor (combination of starts and

run hours) for each compressor. If all compressors are off and

less than 30 minutes has elapsed since the last compressor was

turned off, the wear factor is used to determine which

compressor to start next. If no compressors have been running

for more than 30 minutes and the leaving fluid temperature is

greater than the saturated condensing temperature, the wear

factor is still used to determine which compressor to start next.

If the leaving fluid temperature is less than the saturated con-

densing temperature, then the control will start either compres-

sor A1 or compressor B1 first, depending on the user-configu-

rable circuit lead-lag value. For units with the minimum load

control valve, the A circuit with the minimum load valve is al-

ways the lead circuit. The A circuit is also always the lead for

units with the digital compressor option. On units with the dig-

ital scroll option, the A1 compressor operates continuously,

providing close leaving chilled water control. For this reason,

on/off cycling of the unit’s compressors is dramatically re-

duced, which in turn reduces wear associated with compressor

start/stop cycles.

The EXVs will provide a controlled start-up. During start-

up, the low pressure logic will be bypassed for 21/2 minutes to

allow for the transient changes during start-up. As additional

stages of compression are required, the processor control will

add them. See Table 19.

If a circuit is to be stopped, the compressor with the lowest

wear factor will be shut off first except when a digital compres-

sor is used. The digital compressor is always the last compres-

sor to shut off.

The capacity control algorithm runs every 30 seconds. The

algorithm attempts to maintain the Control Point at the desired

set point. Each time it runs, the control reads the entering and

leaving fluid temperatures. The control determines the rate at

which conditions are changing and calculates 2 variables based

on these conditions. Next, a capacity ratio is calculated using

the 2 variables to determine whether or not to make any

changes to the current stages of capacity. This ratio value

ranges from –100 to +100%. If the next stage of capacity is a

compressor, the control starts (stops) a compressor when the

ratio reaches +100% (–100%). If installed, the minimum load

valve solenoid will be energized with the first stage of capacity.

Minimum load valve value is a fixed 30% in the total capacity

calculation. The control will also use the minimum load valve

solenoid as the last stage of capacity before turning off the last

compressor. A delay of 90 seconds occurs after each capacity

step change. Refer to Table 19.

MINUTES LEFT FOR START — This value is displayed

only in the network display tables (using Service Tool,

ComfortVIEW™ or ComfortWORKS® software) and

represents the amount of time to elapse before the unit will start

its initialization routine. This value can be zero without the

machine running in many situations. This can include being

unoccupied, ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch in

the OFF position, CCN not allowing unit to start, Demand

Limit in effect, no call for cooling due to no load, and alarm or

alert conditions present. If the machine should be running and

none of the above are true, a minimum off time (DELY, see

below) may be in effect. The machine should start normally

once the time limit has expired.

MINUTES OFF TIME (Configuration



OPT2



DELY) — This user-configurable time period is used by the

control to determine how long unit operation is delayed after

power is applied/restored to the unit. Typically, this time period

is configured when multiple machines are located on a single

site. For example, this gives the user the ability to prevent all

the units from restarting at once after a power failure. A value

of zero for this variable does not mean that the unit should be

running.

CAUTION

Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufac-

turer’s control systems due to possible power supply

differences, full wave bridge versus half wave rectification.

The two different power supplies cannot be mixed.

ComfortLink™ controls use half wave rectification. A

signal isolation device should be utilized if a full wave

bridge signal generating device is used.

LEAD/LAG DETERMINATION — This is a configurable

choice and is factory set to be automatic for all units unless the

unit is equipped with a digital scroll compressor or minimum

load, then circuit A is lead (Configuration



OPT2



LLCS).

The value can be changed to Circuit A or Circuit B leading as

desired. Set at automatic, the control will sum the current num-

ber of logged circuit starts and one-quarter of the current oper-

ating hours for each circuit. The circuit with the lowest sum is

started first. Changes to which circuit is the lead circuit and

which is the lag are also made when total machine capacity is

at 100% or when there is a change in the direction of capacity

(increase or decrease) and each circuit’s capacity is equal.

CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES — The following over-

rides will modify the normal operation of the routine.

Deadband Multiplier — The user configurable Deadband

Multiplier (Configuration



SLCT



Z.GN) has a default val-

ue of 1.0. The range is from 1.0 to 4.0. When set to other than

1.0, this factor is applied to the capacity Load/Unload Factor.

The larger this value is set, the longer the control will delay be-

tween adding or removing stages of capacity. Figure 13 shows

how compressor starts can be reduced over time if the leaving

water temperature is allowed to drift a larger amount above and

below the set point. This value should be set in the range of 3.0

to 4.0 for systems with small loop volumes.

First Stage Override — If the current capacity stage is zero,

the control will modify the routine with a 1.2 factor on adding

the first stage to reduce cycling. This factor is also applied

when the control is attempting to remove the last stage of

capacity.

Slow Change Override — The control prevents the capacity

stages from being changed when the leaving fluid temperature

is close to the set point (within an adjustable deadband) and

moving towards the set point.

Ramp Loading — Ramp loading (Configura-

tion



SLCT



CRMP) limits the rate of change of leaving

fluid temperature. If the unit is in a Cooling mode and config-

ured for Ramp Loading, the control makes 2 comparisons be-

fore deciding to change stages of capacity. The control calcu-

lates a temperature difference between the control point and

leaving fluid temperature. If the difference is greater than 4° F

(2.2° C) and the rate of change (°F or °C per minute) is more

than the configured Cooling Ramp Loading value (CRMP),

the control does not allow any changes to the current stage of

capacity.

Low Entering Fluid Temperature Unloading — When the

entering fluid temperature is below the control point, the

control will attempt to remove 25% of the current stages being

used. If exactly 25% cannot be removed, the control removes

an amount greater than 25% but no more than necessary. The

lowest stage will not be removed.

Minimum Load Control — If equipped, the minimum load

control valve is energized only when one compressor is run-

ning on circuit A. If the close control feature is enabled the

minimum load control valve may be used as needed to obtain

leaving fluid temperature close to set point.

CEBD430351-0396-01C

TEST 1

CEPL130351-01

PWR

TEST 2

J1 J2

J4 J3

LEN

STATUS

RED LED - STATUS GREEN LED -

LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK) ADDRESS

DIP SWITCH

Fig. 12 — Energy Management Module

Table 19 — Part Load Data Percent Displacement, Standard Units with Minimum Load Valve

*Minimum Load Valve energized. NOTE: These capacity steps may vary due to different capacity

staging sequences.

30RAP UNIT SIZE CONTROL

STEPS

CAPACITY STEPS CAPACITY %

% Displacement Circuit A Circuit B

010 1 100100—

015 1 100100—

018

100

20*

100 —

020

100

24*

100 —

025

100

29*

100 —

030

100

32*

100 —

035

100

54 46

040

100

11*

47 53

045

100

12*

47 53

050

100

14*

50 50

055

100

13*

46 54

060

100

16*

50 50

0 200 400 600 800 1000

TIME (SECONDS)

2 STARTS

3 STARTS

DEADBAND EXAMPLE

LWT (F)

MODIFIED

DEADBAND

STANDARD

DEADBAND

LWT (C)

LEGEND

LWT — Leaving Water Temperature

Fig. 13 — Deadband Multiplier

Cooler Freeze Protection — The control will try to prevent

shutting the chiller down on a Cooler Freeze Protection alarm

by removing stages of capacity. If the cooler fluid selected

is Water, the freeze point is 34 F (1.1 C). If the cooler fluid

selected is Brine, the freeze point is the Brine Freeze Point (Set

Points



FRZ



BR.FZ). This alarm condition (A207) only

references leaving fluid temperature and NOT Brine Freeze

point. If the cooler leaving fluid temperature is less than the

freeze point plus 2.0° F (1.1° C), the control will immediately

remove one stage of capacity. This can be repeated once every

30 seconds.

Low Saturated Suction Protection — The control will try to

prevent shutting a circuit down due to low saturated suction

conditions by removing stages of capacity. These circuit alert

conditions (T116, T117) compare saturated suction tempera-

ture to the configured Brine Freeze Point (Set

Points



FRZ



BR.FZ). The Brine Freeze point is a user-

configurable value that must be left at 34 F (1.1 C) for 100%

water systems. A lower value may be entered for systems with

brine solutions, but this value should be set according to the

freeze protection level of the brine mixture. Failure to properly

set this brine freeze point value may permanently damage the

brazed plate heat exchanger. The control will initiate Mode 7

(Circuit A) or Mode 8 (Circuit B) to indicate a circuit’s capaci-

ty is limited and that eventually the circuit may shut down.

Head Pressure Control — The main base board

(MBB) controls the condenser fans to maintain the lowest

condensing temperature possible, and thus the highest unit

efficiency. The MBB uses the saturated condensing tempera-

ture input from the discharge pressure transducer and outside

air temperature sensor to control the fans. If OAT is greater

than 70 F before a circuit is starting, then all condenser fan

stages will be energized. A fan stage is increased based on

SCT (saturated condensing temperature). When the highest

SCT is greater than the Fan On Set Point (Set

Points



HEAD



F. O N ), then an additional stage of fan will

be added to the current fan stage. Fan On Set Point (F. O N )

equals Head Set Point (Set Points



HEAD



H.DP) except

after a fan stage increase when the Head Set Point is increased

by Fan Stage Delta (Set Points



HEAD



F. D L T ). A fan

stage is decreased when the SCTs of both circuits are less than

the Fan Off Set Point (Set Points



HEAD



F. O F F ) for

two minutes. Table 20 shows the number of fan stages, contac-

tors energized and the fans that are on during the fan stage.

Unit sizes 035 to 060 have common fan control. Figure 14

shows the location of each fan and compressor within the unit.

MOTORMASTER® V OPTION — Motormaster V is stan-

dard on 30RAP010 and 015 size units. For all other units that

need low-ambient operation, the lead fan on a circuit can be

equipped with the Motormaster V head pressure controller op-

tion or accessory. The controller is energized with the first fan

stage and adjusts fan speed to maintain a SCT of 72 F (22.2 C).

The first stage of fan operation is controlled by the Motormas-

ter V controller. Refer to Fig. 15 for condenser fan layout infor-

mation. The Motormaster is configured in the Motormaster Se-

lect (Configuration



MMR.S)

Operation of Machine Based on Control

Method and Cooling Set Point Selection Set-

tings — Machine On/Off control is determined by the

configuration of the Control Method (Configura-

tion



OPT2



CTRL) and Cooling Set Point Select (Config-

uration



SLCT



CLSP) variables. All units are factory

configured with Cooling Set Point Select set to 0 (single set

point). With the control method set to 0, simply switching the

Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Enable or Remote

Contact position (external contacts closed) will put the chiller

in an occupied state. The control mode (Operating

Modes



MODE) will be 1 (OFF LOCAL) when the switch is

Off and will be 5 (ON LOCAL) when in the Enable position or

Remote Contact position with external contacts closed.

170

130

140

150

160

110

120

130

100

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 304050607080

SCT (F)

SST (F)

LEGEND

Fig. 14 — Operating Envelope for R-410A Compressor

SCT — Saturated Condensing Temperature

SST — Saturated Suction Temperature

a30-4969

Table 20 — Fan Stages

Two other control methods are available for Machine On/

Off control:

OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE (Configuration



OPT2



CTRL = 2) — The main base board will use the operating

schedules as defined under the Time Clock mode in the scroll-

ing marquee display. These schedules are identical. The sched-

ule number must be set to 1 for local schedule.

The schedule number can be set anywhere from 65 to 99

for operation under a CCN global schedule. The Enable/Off/

Remote Contact must be in the Enable or Remote Contact posi-

tion. The control mode (Operating Modes



MODE) will be

1 when the switch is Off. The control mode will be 3 when the

Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch input is On and the time of

day is during an unoccupied period. Similarly, the control

mode will be 7 when the time of day is during an occupied

period.

CCN CONTROL (Configuration



OPT2



CTRL = 3) —

An external CCN device such as Chillervisor System Manager

controls the On/Off state of the machine. This CCN device

forces the variable ‘CHIL_S_S’ between Start/Stop to control

the chiller. The control mode (Operating Modes



MODE)

will be 1 when the switch is Off. The control mode will be 2

when the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch input is On and

the CHIL_S_S variable is ‘Stop.’ Similarly, the control mode

will be 6 when the CHIL_S_S variable is ‘Start.’

Table 20 illustrates how the control method and cooling set

point select variables direct the operation of the chiller and the

set point to which it controls. The illustration also shows the

ON/OFF state of the machine for the given combinations.

Cooling Set Point Select

SINGLE — Unit operation is based on Cooling Set Point 1

(Set Points



COOL



CSP.1).

DUAL SWITCH — Unit operation is based on Cooling Set

Point 1 (Set Points



COOL



CSP.1) when the Dual Set

Point switch contacts are open and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set

Points



COOL



CSP.2) when they are closed.

DUAL CCN OCCUPIED — Unit operation is based on

Cooling Set Point 1 (Set Points



COOL



CSP.1) during the

Occupied mode and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set

Points



COOL



CSP.2) during the Unoccupied mode as

configured under the local occupancy schedule accessible only

from CCN. Schedule Number in Table SCHEDOVR (See Ap-

pendix B) must be configured to 1. If the Schedule Number is

set to 0, the unit will operate in a continuous 24-hr Occupied

mode. Control method must be configured to 0 (switch). See

Table 21.

30RAP UNIT SIZE FAN STAGES

Fan Stage Contactor Energized Fans Operating

010,015 Stage 1 — OFM1

018-030 Stage 1

Stage 2

FC1

FC1,2

OFM1

OFM1,2

035-050

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

FC1

FC2

FC1,2

OFM3

OFM1,2

OFM1,2,3

055,060

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Stage 4

FC3

FC1,3

FC3,2

FC1,2,3

OFM4

OFM4,3

OFM4,1,2

OFM1,2,3,4

Top View

Top View Top View

Sizes 010,015

Sizes 035-050 Sizes 055,060

CONTROL BOX

OFM1

OFM2

OFM3

OFM4

OFM2

OFM1 OFM1

Top View

Sizes 018-030

CONTROL BOX

OFM1

OFM2

Fig. 15 — 30RAP Condenser Fan Layout

a30-4970

Table 21 — Control Methods and Cooling Set Points

*Dual set point switch input used. CSP1 used when switch input is open. CSP2 used when switch input is closed.

†Cooling set point determined from 4 to 20 mA input to energy management module (EMM) to terminals TB6-3,5.

4 TO 20 mA INPUT — Unit operation is based on an external

4 to 20 mA signal input to the Energy Management Module

(EMM).

Low Sound Mode Operation — All models are fac-

tory configured with the Low Sound Mode disabled. In the

Configuration mode under sub-mode OPT2, items for Low

Sound Mode Select (Configuration



OPT2



LS.MD), Low

Sound Start Time (Configuration



OPT2



LS.ST), Low

Sound End Time (Configuration



OPT2



LS.ND) and Low

Sound Capacity Limit (Configuration



OPT2



LS.LT) are

factory configured so that the chiller always runs as quietly as

possible. This results in operation at increased saturated con-

densing temperature. As a result, some models may not be able

to achieve rated efficiency. For chiller operation at rated effi-

ciency, disable the low sound mode or adjust the low sound

mode start and stop times accordingly or set both times to

00:00 for rated efficiency operation 24 hours per day. In addi-

tion, the low sound capacity limit can be used to reduce overall

chiller capacity, if required, by limiting the maximum to a user-

configured percentage.

Heating Operation — The chiller can be used for pump

outputs or optional factory-installed hydronic system operation

can be utilized for heating applications. The heating mode is

activated when the control sees a field-supplied closed switch

input to terminal block LVT-19,20. The control locks out cool-

ing when the heat relay input is seen. A field-supplied boiler re-

lay connection is made using heat relay and alarm relay con-

tacts. Factory-installed ‘BOILER’ connections exist in the con-

trol panel near LVT for these applications. Alarms and alerts

A189 through A202 are active during heating operation.

Service Test (See Table 4) — Both main power and

control circuit power must be on.

The Service Test function should be used to verify proper

operation of condenser fan(s), compressors, minimum load

valve solenoid (if installed), cooler pump(s), EXVs, and re-

mote alarm relay. To use the Service Test mode, the Enable/

Off/Remote Contact switch must be in the OFF position. Use

the display keys and Table 4 to enter the mode and display

TEST. Press twice so that OFF flashes. Enter the

password if required. Use either arrow key to change the TEST

value to the ON position and press . Press

and the button to enter the OUTS or COMP sub-mode.

Test the condenser fans, cooler pump(s) and alarm relay by

changing the item values from OFF to ON. These discrete

outputs are then turned off if there is no keypad activity for

10 minutes. Use the arrow keys to select the desired percentage

when testing expansion valves and Motormaster® V controller.

When testing compressors, lead compressor must be started

first. All compressor outputs can be turned on, but the control

will limit the rate by staging one compressor per minute. Com-

pressor unloaders and hot gas bypass relays/solenoids (if in-

stalled) can be tested with the compressors on or off. The relays

under the COMP mode will stay on for 10 minutes if there is

no keypad activity. Compressors will stay on until they are

turned off by the operator. The Service Test mode will remain

enabled for as long as there is one or more compressors run-

ning. All safeties are monitored during this test and will turn a

compressor, circuit or the machine off if required. Any other

mode or sub-mode can be accessed, viewed, or changed during

the TEST mode. The MODE item (Run Status



VIEW) will

display “0” as long as the Service mode is enabled. The TEST

sub-mode value must be changed back to OFF before the chill-

er can be switched to Enable or Remote contact for normal

operation.

Optional Factory-Installed Hydronic Pack-

age — If the chiller has factory-installed chilled fluid pumps,

specific steps should be followed for proper operation.

The pump(s) in the hydronic package come factory

pre-wired into the main unit power supply/starter. In order to

check proper pump rotation, use the Service Test function to

test the condenser fans and observe them for proper rotation. If

fans turn correctly, the pumps will rotate correctly. Clockwise

rotation of the pump motor cooling fans can also be used to de-

termine that pumps are rotating correctly.

Use Service Test function to test operation of pumps. Verify

that the flow switch input is made when the pump is running.

For dual pump hydronic systems, the control only uses one

pump at a time. Consult the Installation Instructions supplied

with this chiller and use the circuit setter balancing valve

installed in hydronic package to adjust fluid flow rate.

Cooler Pump Control — The AquaSnap® 30RAP ma-

chines equipped with a factory-installed pump package are

configured with the Cooler Pump Control (Configura-

tion



OPT1



CPC) = ON.

Machines not equipped with a pump package are config-

ured with the cooler pump control OFF. It is recommended that

the machine control the chilled water pump. If not, a 5-minute

time delay is required after the command to shut the machine

down is sent before the chilled water pump is turned off. This is

required to maintain water flow during the shutdown period of

the machine.

With or without this option enabled, the cooler pump relay

will be energized when the machine enters an ON status (i.e.,

On Local, On CCN, On Time). An A207 - Cooler Freeze

Protection Alarm, will energize the cooler pump relay also, as

an override. The cooler pump relay will remain energized if the

machine is in MODE 10 – Minimum Off Time.

CONTROL

TYPE

(CTRL)

OCCUPANCY

STATE

COOLING SET POINT SELECT (CLSP)

(single)

(dual, switch)

(dual, occ)

(4 to 20 mA)

0 (switch) Occupied ON,CSP1 ON* ON,CSP1 ON†

Unoccupied ON,CSP1 ON* ON,CSP2 ON

2 (Occupancy) Occupied ON,CSP1 ON* Illegal ON†

Unoccupied OFF OFF Illegal OFF

3 (CCN) Occupied ON,CSP1 ON* ON,CSP1 ON†

Unoccupied ON,CSP1 ON* ON,CSP2 ON†

ENTER

ESCAPE

CAUTION

Operation of pump in wrong direction, even for a few

seconds, can cause irreversible damage to pump impeller

and housing. Always verify correct wiring/pump rotation

before operation.

Cooler Pump Sequence of Operation — At any-

time the unit is in an ON status, as defined by the one of the

following conditions, the cooler pump relay will be enabled.

1. The Enable-Off-Remote Switch in ENABLE,

(CTRL=0).

2. Enable-Off-Remote Switch in REMOTE with a

Start-Stop remote contact closure (CTRL=0).

3. An Occupied Time Period from an Occupancy Schedule

in combination with items 1 or 2 (CTRL=2).

4. A CCN Start-Stop Command to Start in combination

with items 1 or 2 (CTRL=3).

As stated before, there are certain alarm conditions and

Operating Modes that will turn the cooler pump relay ON. This

sequence will describe the normal operation of the pump

control algorithm.

When the unit cycles from an “On” state to an “Off” state,

the cooler pump output will remain energized for the Cooler

Pump Shutdown Delay (Configuration



OPT1



PM.DY).

This is configurable from 0 to 10 minutes. The factory default

is 1 minute.

NO INTEGRAL PUMP — SINGLE EXTERNAL PUMP

CONTROL — With a single external pump, the following

options must be configured:

• Cooler Pump Control (Configuration



OPT1



CPC) =

OFF.

• Cooler Pump 1 Enable (Configuration



OPT1



PM1E) = NO.

• Cooler Pump 2 Enable (Configuration



OPT1



PM2E) = NO.

The maximum load allowed for the Chilled Water Pump

Starter is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA inrush at 24 volts. The starter coil

is powered from the chiller control system. The starter should

be wired between LVT-25 and LVT-21. If equipped, the field-

installed chilled water pump starter auxiliary contacts should

be connected in series with the chilled water flow switch.

The Cooler Pump Relay will be energized when the

machine is “On.” The chilled water pump interlock circuit

consists of a chilled water flow switch and a field-installed

chilled water pump interlock. If the chilled water pump inter-

lock circuit does not close within five (5) minutes of starting,

an A200 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Failed to Close at Start-Up

Alarm will be generated and chiller will not be allowed to start.

If the chilled water pump interlock or chilled water flow

switch opens for at least three (3) seconds after initially being

closed, an A201 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts Opened

During Normal Operation Alarm will be generated and the ma-

chine will stop.

NO INTEGRAL PUMP — DUAL EXTERNAL PUMP

CONTROL — With two external pumps, the following

options must be configured:

• Cooler Pump Control (Configuration



OPT1



CPC) =

ON.

• Cooler Pump 1 Enable (Configuration



OPT1



PM1E) = YES.

• Cooler Pump 2 Enable (Configuration



OPT1



PM2E) = YES.

The maximum load allowed for the Chilled Water Pump

Starters is 5 VA sealed, 10 VA inrush at 24 volts. The starter

coil is powered from the chiller control system. The starter for

Chilled Water Pump 1 should be wired between LVT-25 and

LVT-21. The starter for Chilled Water Pump 2 should be wired

between LVT-24 and LVT-21. A field-installed chilled water

pump interlock for each pump must be connected to each

pump’s interlock points on the main base board. The chilled

water pump 1 interlock, CWP1, must be connected to MBB-

J7-1 and –2. The chilled water pump 2 interlock, CWP2, must

be connected to MBB-J7-3 and –4. The chilled water pump

interlock contacts should be rated for dry circuit application

capable of handling 5 vdc at 2 mA.

SINGLE INTEGRAL PUMP CONTROL — With a single

pump, the following options must be configured:

• Cooler Pump Control (Configuration



OPT1



CPC) =

ON.

• Cooler Pump 1 Enable (Configuration



OPT1



PM1E) = YES.

• Cooler Pump 2 Enable (Configuration



OPT1



PM2E) = NO.

With a single integral pump, the Cooler Pump Starter will

be energized when the machine is occupied. As part of the

factory-installed package, an auxiliary set of contacts is wired

to the MBB to serve as Chilled Water Pump Interlock. When

the mechanical cooling is called for, the pump interlock and

flow switch is checked. If the circuits are closed, the machine

starts its capacity routine. If the auxiliary contact interlock does

not close within 25 seconds of the ON command, a T190 —

Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert

will be generated and the pump shut down. The unit will not

be allowed to start. If the chilled water flow switch does not

close within one (1) minute, two alarms will be generated. A

T192 — Cooler Pump 1 Failed to Provide Flow at Start-Up

Alert and an A200 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Failed to Close at

Start-Up Alarm will be generated and chiller will not be al-

lowed to start.

If the chilled water flow switch opens for at least 3 seconds

after initially being closed, a T196 — Flow Lost While Pump 1

Running Alert and an A201 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts

Opened During Normal Operation Alarm will be generated

and the machine will stop.

If the control detects the chilled water pump interlock open

for 25 seconds after initially being closed, a T194 — Cooler

Pump 1 Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alert is

generated and the unit is shut down.

If the control detects the chilled water flow switch circuit

closed for at least 5 minutes with the pump output OFF, an

A202 — Cooler Pump Interlock Closed When Pump is Off

Alarm will be generated and the unit will not be allowed to

start.

If the control detects that the chilled water pump auxiliary

contacts are closed for at least 25 seconds while the pump is

OFF, a T198 — Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts Closed While

Pump Off Alert is generated. The chiller will not be allowed to

start.

If the control starts a pump and the wrong interlock circuit

closes for at least 20 seconds, an A189 — Cooler Pump and

Aux Contact Input Miswire Alarm will be generated. The unit

will be prevented from starting.

As part of a pump maintenance routine, the pump can be

started to maintain lubrication of the pump seal. To utilize this

function, Cooler Pmp Periodic Start (Configuration



OPT1



PM.P.S) must be set to YES. This option is set to NO as the

factory default. With this feature enabled, if the pump is not op-

erating, it will be started and operated for 2 seconds starting at

14:00 hours. If the pump is operating, this routine is skipped. If

the pump has failed and an Alarm/Alert condition is active, the

pump will not start that day.

DUAL INTEGRAL PUMP CONTROL — With a dual inte-

gral pump package, the following options must be configured:

• Cooler Pump Control (Configuration



OPT1



CPC) =

ON.

• Cooler Pump 1 Enable (Configuration



OPT1



PM1E) = YES.

• Cooler Pump 2 Enable (Configuration



OPT1



PM2E) = YES.

Pump Start Selection is a field-configurable choice. Cooler

Pump Select (Configuration



OPT1



PM.SL) is factory

defaulted to 0 (Automatic). This value can be changed to 1

a30-4979

(Pump 1 Starts First) or 2 (Pump 2 Starts First). If PM.SL is 0

(Automatic), the pump selection is based on two criteria: the

alert status of a pump and the operational hours on the pump. If

a pump has an active Alert condition, it will not be considered

for the lead pump. The pump with the lowest operational hours

will be the lead pump. A pump is selected by the control to start

and continues to be the lead pump until the Pump Changeover

Hours (Configuration



OPT1



PM.DT) is reached. The

Lead Pump (Run Status



VIEW



LD.PM) indicates the

pump that has been selected as the lead pump: 1 (Pump 1), 2

(Pump 2), 3 (No Pump). The Pump Changeover Hours is facto-

ry defaulted to 500 hours. Regardless of the Cooler Pump Se-

lection, any pump that has an active alert will not be allowed to

start.

With the dual integral pump package, the Cooler Pump

Starter will be energized when the machine is in an occupied

period. As part of the factory-installed package, an auxiliary set

of contacts is wired to the MBB to serve as Chilled Water Pump

Interlock, one set for each pump to individual channels on the

MBB. With a call for mechanical cooling, the specific pump

interlock and flow switch are checked. If the circuits are closed,

the machine starts its capacity routine. If Pump 1 starts and the

auxiliary contact interlock does not close within 25 seconds of

the ON command, a T190 — Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts

Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert will be generated and the

pump shut down. The unit will not be allowed to start. If the

chilled water flow switch does not close within 1 minute, two

alarms will be generated. A T192 — Cooler Pump 1 Failed to

Provide Flow at Start-Up Alert and an A200 — Cooler Flow/

Interlock Failed to Close at Start-Up Alarm will be generated

and chiller will not be allowed to start. In either fault case listed

above, Pump 2 will be commanded to start once Pump 1 has

failed.

If Pump 2 starts and the auxiliary contact interlock does

not close within 25 seconds of the ON command, a T191 —

Cooler Pump 2 Aux Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert

will be generated and the pump shut down. The unit will not be

allowed to start. If the chilled water flow switch does not close

within one (1) minute, two alarms will be generated. A T193

— Cooler Pump 2 Failed to Provide Flow at Start-Up Alert and

an A200 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Failed to Close at Start-Up

Alarm will be generated and chiller will not be allowed to start.

In either fault case listed above, Pump 1 will be commanded to

start once Pump 2 has failed.

If the chilled water flow switch opens for at least 3 seconds

after initially being closed, a T196 — Flow Lost While Pump 1

Running Alert or T197 — Flow Lost While Pump 2 Running

Alert for the appropriate pump and an A201 — Cooler Flow/

Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alarm

will be generated and the machine will stop. If available, the

other pump will be started. If flow is proven, the machine will

be allowed to restart.

If the chilled water pump interlock opens for 25 seconds

after initially being closed is detected by the control, the appro-

priate T194 — Cooler Pump 1 Contacts Opened During Nor-

mal Operation Alert or T195 — Cooler Pump 2 Contacts

Opened During Normal Operation Alert is generated and the

unit is shut down. If available, the other pump will be started. If

flow is proven, the machine will be allowed to restart.

If the control detects that the chilled water flow switch

circuit is closed for at least 5 minutes with the pump output

OFF, an A202 — Cooler Pump Interlock Closed When Pump

is Off Alarm will be generated and the unit will not be allowed

to start.

If the control detects that the chilled water pump auxiliary

contacts are closed for at least 25 seconds while the pump is

OFF, the appropriate T198 — Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts

Closed While Pump Off or Alert T199 — Cooler Pump 2 Aux

Contacts Closed While Pump Off Alert is generated. The

chiller will not be allowed to start.

If the control starts a pump and the wrong interlock circuit

closes for at least 20 seconds, an A189 – Cooler Pump and Aux

Contact Input Miswire Alarm will be generated. The unit will

be prevented from starting.

The control will allow for pump changeover. Two methods

will change the pump sequence. Before the changeover can

occur, the unit must be at Capacity Stage 0. During changeover

the chilled water flow switch input is ignored for 10 seconds to

avoid a nuisance alarm.

With Cooler Pump Select (Configuration



OPT1



PM.SL) set to 0 (Automatic) and when the differential time

limit Pump Changeover Hours (Configuration



OPT1



PM.DT) is reached, the lead pump will be turned OFF. Ap-

proximately one (1) second later, the lag pump will start. Manu-

al changeover can be accomplished by changing Rotate Cooler

Pump Now (Configuration



OPT1



ROT.P) to YES only if

the machine is at Capacity Stage 0 and the differential time limit

Pump Changeover Hours (PM.DT) is reached. If the PM.DT is

not satisfied, the changeover will not occur. With the machine at

Capacity Stage 0, the pumps would rotate automatically as part

of the normal routine.

With Cooler Pump Select (PM.SL) set to 1 (Pump 1 Starts

First) or 2 (Pump 2 Starts First), a manual changeover can be ac-

complished by changing PM.SL only. The machine Remote-

Off-Enable Switch must be in the OFF position to change this

variable. The Rotate Cooler Pump Now (ROT.P) feature does

not work for these configuration options.

As part of a pump maintenance routine, the pumps can be

started to maintain lubrication to the pump seal. To utilize this

function, Cooler Pmp Periodic Start (Configuration



OPT1



PM.PS) must be set to YES. This option is set to NO as the

factory default. If feature is enabled and the pump(s) are not

operating, then the pumps will be operated every other day for

2 seconds starting at 14:00 hours. If a pump has failed and has

an active Alert condition, it will not be started that day.

Configuring and Operating Dual Chiller Con-

trol — The dual chiller routine is available for the control of

two units supplying chilled fluid on a common loop. This

control algorithm is designed for parallel fluid flow arrangement

only. One chiller must be configured as the master chiller, the

other as the slave. An additional leaving fluid temperature

thermistor (Dual Chiller LWT) must be installed as shown in

Fig. 16 and 17 and connected to the master chiller. Refer to Sen-

sors section, page 20, for wiring. The CCN communication bus

must be connected between the two chillers. Connections can be

made to the CCN screw terminals on LVT. Refer to Carrier

Comfort Network® Interface section, page 19, for wiring infor-

mation. Configuration examples are shown in Tables 22 and 23.

Refer to Table 22 for dual chiller configuration. In this

example the master chiller will be configured at address 1 and

the slave chiller at address 2. The master and slave chillers

must reside on the same CCN bus (Configuration



CCN



CCNB) but cannot have the same CCN address (Configu-

ration



CCN



CCNA). Both master and slave chillers must

have Lead/Lag Chiller Enable (Configuration



RSET



LLEN) configured to ENBL. Master/Slave Select (Config-

uration



RSET



MSSL) must be configured to MAST for

the master chiller and SLVE for the slave. Also in this example,

the master chiller will be configured to use Lead/Lag Balance

Select (Configuration



RSET



LLBL) and Lead/Lag Bal-

ance Delta (Configuration



RSET



LLBD) to even out the

chiller run-times weekly. The Lag Start Delay (Configura-

tion



RSET



LLDY) feature will be set to 10 minutes. This

will prevent the lag chiller from starting until the lead chiller

has been at 100% capacity for the length of the delay time. Par-

allel configuration (Configuration



RSET



PARA) can

only be configured to YES. The variables LLBL, LLBD and

LLDY are not used by the slave chiller.

Table 22 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Master Chiller Example)

SUB-MODE ITEM KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS

DISP

UNIT

OPT1

OPT2

CTRL CONTROL METHOD

CTRL 0 SWITCH DEFAULT 0

OPT2

CCN

CCNA 1 CCN ADDRESS DEFAULT 1

CCNB

CCNB 0 CCN BUS NUMBER DEFAULT 0

CCN

RSET PROCEED TO

SUBMODE RESET

RSET

CRST COOLING RESET TYPE

LLEN LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE 15 ITEMS

LLEN DSBL SCROLLING STOPS

DSBL VALUE FLASHES

ENBL SELECT ENBL

LLEN ENBL LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE CHANGE ACCEPTED

LLEN

MSSL MASTER /SLAVE SELECT

MSSL MAST MASTER /SLAVE SELECT DEFAULT MAST

MSSL

SLVA SLAVE ADDRESS

SLVA 0 SCROLLING STOPS

0 VALUE FLASHES

2 SELECT 2

SLVA 2 SLAVE ADDRESS CHANGE ACCEPTED

SLVA

LLBL LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT

LLBL 0 SCROLLING STOPS

0 VALUE FLASHES

2 SELECT 2 - Automatic

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

Table 22 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Master Chiller Example) (cont)

NOTES:

1. Master Control Method (CTRL) can be configured as 0-Switch, 2-Occupancy or 3-CCN.

2. Parallel Configuration (PARA) cannot be changed.

Dual chiller start/stop control is determined by configura-

tion of Control Method (Configuration



OPT1



CTRL) of

the Master chiller. The Slave chiller should always be config-

ured for CTRL=0 (Switch). If the chillers are to be controlled

by Remote Contacts, both Master and Slave chillers should be

enabled together. Two separate relays or one relay with

two sets of contacts may control the chillers. The Enable/Off/

Remote Contact switch should be in the Remote Contact

position on both the Master and Slave chillers. The Enable/Off/

Remote Contact switch should be in the Enable position for

CTRL=2 (Occupancy) or CTRL=3 (CCN Control).

Both chillers will stop if the Master chiller Enable/Off/

Remote Contact switch is in the Off position. If the Emergency

Stop switch is turned off or an alarm is generated on the Master

chiller the Slave chiller will operate in a Stand-Alone mode.

If the Emergency Stop switch is turned off or an alarm is

generated on the Slave chiller the Master chiller will operate in

a Stand-Alone mode.

The master chiller controls the slave chiller by changing its

Control Mode (Run Status



VIEW



STAT) and its operat-

ing setpoint or Control Point (Run Status



VIEW



CT.PT).

Temperature Reset — The control system is capable of

handling leaving-fluid temperature reset based on return cooler

fluid temperature. Because the change in temperature through

the cooler is a measure of the building load, the return tempera-

ture reset is in effect an average building load reset method.

The control system is also capable of temperature reset based

on outdoor-air temperature (OAT), space temperature (SPT), or

from an externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal. Accessory sen-

sors must be used for SPT reset (33ZCT55SPT). The energy

management module (EMM) must be used for temperature

reset using a 4 to 20 mA signal. See Tables 24 and 25.

SUB-MODE ITEM KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS

RSET

LLBL 2 LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT CHANGE ACCEPTED

LLBL

LLBD LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA

LLBD 168 LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA DEFAULT 168

LLBD

LLDY LAG START DELAY

LLDY 5 SCROLLING STOPS

5 VALUE FLASHES

10 SELECT 10

LLDY 10 LAG START DELAY CHANGE ACCEPTED

LLDY

RSET

PARA YES MASTER COMPLETE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

MASTER

CHILLER

SLAVE

CHILLER

LEAVING

FLUID

RETURN

FLUID

THERMISTOR

WIRING*

INSTALL DUAL CHILLER LWT

LEAVING FLUID TEMPERATURE

THERMISTOR (T10) HERE

*Depending on piping sizes, use either:

• HH79NZ014 sensor/10HB50106801 well (3-in. sensor/well)

• HH79NZ029 sensor/10HB50106802 well (4-in. sensor/well)

Fig. 16 — Dual Chiller Thermistor Location

1/4 N.P.T.

0.505/0.495

0.61

DIA

6” MINIMUM

CLEARANCE FOR

THERMISTOR

REMOVAL

Fig. 17 — Dual Leaving Water Thermistor Well

PART

NUMBER

DIMENSIONS in. (mm)

A B

10HB50106801 3.10 (78.7) 1.55 (39.4)

10HB50106802 4.10 (104.1) 1.28 (32.5)

Table 23 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Slave Chiller Example)

NOTES:

1. Slave Control Method (CTRL) must be configured for 0.

2. Slave CCN Address (CCNA) must be different than Master.

3. Slave CCN Bus Number (CCNB) must be the same as Master

4. Slave does not require SLVA, LLBL, LLBD, or LLDY to be configured.

SUB-MODE ITEM KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS

DISP

UNIT

OPT1

OPT2

CTRL CONTROL METHOD

CTRL 0 SWITCH DEFAULT 0

OPT2

CCN

CCNA

CCNA 1 CCN ADDRESS SCROLLING STOPS

1 VALUE FLASHES

2SELECT 2

(SEE NOTE 1)

CCNA 2 CCN ADDRESS CHANGE ACCEPTED

CCN

CCNB 0 CCN BUS NUMBER DEFAULT 0

(SEE NOTE 2)

CCN

RSET PROCEED TO

SUBMODE RSET

RSET

CRST COOLING RESET TYPE

LLEN LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE 15 ITEMS

LLEN DSBL SCROLLING STOPS

DSBL VALUE FLASHES

ENBL SELECT ENBL

LLEN ENBL LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE CHANGE ACCEPTED

LLEN

MSSL MASTER /SLAVE SELECT

MSSL MAST SCROLLING STOPS

MAST VALUE FLASHES

SLVE SELECT SLVE

MSSL SLVE MASTER /SLAVE SELECT CHANGE ACCEPTED

MSSL

RSET SLAVE COMPLETE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

Table 24 — 4 to 20 mA Reset

NOTE: The example above shows how to configure the chiller for 4 to 20 mA reset. No reset will

occur at 4.0 mA input, and a 5.0 F reset will occur at 20.0 mA. An EMM is required.

Table 25 — Menu Configuration of 4 to 20 mA Cooling Set Point Control

To use outdoor air or space temperature reset, four variables

must be configured. In the Configuration mode under the sub-

mode RSET, items (Configuration



OPT1



CRST), (Con-

figuration



OPT1



RM.NO), (Configuration



OPT1



RM.F), and (Configuration



OPT1



RT.DG) must be

properly set. See Table 26A — Configuring Outdoor Air and

Space Temperature Reset. The outdoor air reset example pro-

vides 0° F (0° C) chilled water set point reset at 85.0 F (29.4 C)

outdoor-air temperature and 15.0 F (8.3 C) reset at 55.0 F

(12.8 C) outdoor-air temperature. The space temperature reset

example provides 0° F (0° C) chilled water set point reset at

72.0 F (22.2 C) space temperature and 6.0 F (3.3 C) reset at

68.0 F (20.0 C) space temperature. The variable CRST should

be configured for the type of reset desired. The variable

RM.NO should be set to the temperature that no reset should

occur. The variable RM.F should be set to the temperature that

maximum reset is to occur. The variable RM.DG should be set

to the maximum amount of reset desired. Figures 18 and 19 are

examples of outdoor air and space temperature resets.

To use return reset, four variables must be configured. In the

Configuration mode under the sub-mode RSET, items CRST,

RT.NO, RT.F and RT.DG must be properly set. See Table 26B

— Configuring Return Temperature Reset. This example pro-

vides 5.0 F (2.8 C) chilled water set point reset at 2.0 F (1.1 C)

cooler T and 0° F (0° C) reset at 10.0 F (5.6 C) cooler T. The

variable RT.NO should be set to the cooler temperature differ-

ence (T) where no chilled water temperature reset should oc-

cur. The variable RT.F should be set to the cooler temperature

difference where the maximum chilled water temperature reset

should occur. The variable RM.DG should be set to the maxi-

mum amount of reset desired.

To verify that reset is functioning correctly proceed to Run

Status mode, sub-mode VIEW, and subtract the active set point

(Run Status



VIEW



SETP) from the control point (Run

Status



VIEW



CTPT) to determine the degrees reset.

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

RSET

CRST 1 COOLING RESET

TYPE

0 = no reset

1 = 4 to 20 mA input

2 = Outdoor air temp

3 = Return Fluid

4 = Space Temperature

MA.DG 5.0 F

(2.8 C)

DEGREES COOL

RESET

Default: 0° F (0° C) Reset at 20 mA

Range: –30 to 30 F (–16.7 to 16.7 C)

MODE

(RED LED)

KEYPAD

ENTRY SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

CONFIGURATION

DISP

UNIT

OPT1

OPT2

HP.A

HP.B

EXV.A

EXV.B

M.MST

RSET

DMDC

SLCT CLSP 0 COOLING SETPOINT SELECT

0 Scrolling Stops

0 Flashing ‘0’

4Select ‘4’

4 Change Accepted

ENTER

IMPORTANT: Care should be taken when interfacing with

other control systems due to possible power supply differ-

ences: full wave bridge versus half wave rectification. Con-

nection of control devices with different power supplies

may result in permanent damage. ComfortLink™ controls

incorporate power supplies with half wave rectification. A

signal isolation device should be utilized if the signal gen-

erator incorporates a full wave bridge rectifier.

Table 26A — Configuring Outdoor Air and Space Temperature Reset

*4 items skipped in this example.

Table 26B — Configuring Return Temperature Reset

*4 items skipped in this example.

MODE

(RED LED)

KEYPAD

ENTRY

SUB-

MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM

DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

Outdoor

Air Space

CONFIGURATION

DISP

UNIT

OPT1

OPT2

HP.A

HP.B

EXV.A

EXV.B

M.MST

RSET CRST 2 4 COOLING RESET

TYPE

2 = Outdoor-Air Temperature

4 = Space Temperature

(Connect to TB5-5,6)

RM.NO* 85 °F 72 °F REMOTE - NO

RESET TEMP

Default: 125.0 F (51.7 C)

Range: 0° to125 F

RM.F 55 °F 68 °F REMOTE - FULL

RESET TEMP

Default: 0.0° F (-17.7 C)

Range: 0° to 125 F

RM.DG 15 °F 6 °F REMOTE - DEGREES

RESET

Default: 0° F (0° C)

Range: –30 to 30 F

(–34.4 to -1.1 °C)

MODE

(RED LED)

KEYPAD

ENTRY SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT

CONFIGURATION

DISP TEST ON/OFF TEST DISPLAY LEDs

UNIT TYPE X UNIT TYPE

OPT1 FLUD X COOLER FLUID

OPT2 CTRL X CONTROL METHOD

HP.A

HP.B

EXV.A

EXV.B

M.MST

RSET CRST 3 COOLING RESET TYPE

0 = No Reset

1 = 4 to 20 mA Input (EMM required)

(Connect to EMM TB6-2,3)

2 = Outdoor-Air Temperature

3 = Return Fluid

4 = Space Temperature

(Connect to TB5-5,6)

RT.NO* 10.0 FRETURN FLUID - NO

RESET TEMP

Default: 10.0 F (5.6 C)

Range: 0° to10 F COOLER T

RT.F 0.0 FRETURN FLUID - FULL

RESET TEMP

Default: 0 F (–17.8 C)

Range: 0° to 30 F COOLER T

RT.DG 10.0 FRETURN - DEGREES

RESET

Default: 0 F (0 C)

Range: –30 to 30°F (–16.7 to 16.7 C)

ENTER

Under normal operation, the chiller will maintain a constant

leaving fluid temperature approximately equal to the chilled

fluid set point. As the cooler load varies, the entering cooler

fluid will change in proportion to the load as shown in Fig. 20.

Usually the chiller size and leaving-fluid temperature set point

are selected based on a full-load condition. At part load, the flu-

id temperature set point may be colder than required. If the

leaving fluid temperature was allowed to increase at part load,

the efficiency of the machine would increase.

Return temperature reset allows for the leaving temperature

set point to be reset upward as a function of the return fluid

temperature or, in effect, the building load.

Demand Limit — Demand limit is a feature that allows

the unit capacity to be limited during periods of peak energy us-

age. There are 3 types of demand limiting that can be config-

ured. The first type is through 2-stage switch control, which will

reduce the maximum capacity to 2 user-configurable percentag-

es. The second type is by 4 to 20 mA signal input which will re-

duce the maximum capacity linearly between 100% at a 4 mA

input signal (no reduction) down to the user-configurable level

at a 20 mA input signal. The third type uses the CCN Loadshed

module and has the ability to limit the current operating capaci-

ty to maximum and further reduce the capacity if required.

NOTE: The 2-stage switch control and 4 to 20-mA input sig-

nal types of demand limiting require the energy management

module (EMM).

To use demand limit, select the type of demand limiting to

use. Then configure the demand limit set points based on the

type selected.

DEMAND LIMIT (2-Stage Switch Controlled) — To con-

figure demand limit for 2-stage switch control set the Demand

Limit Select (Configuration



RSET



DMDC) to 1. Then

configure the 2 Demand Limit Switch points (Configura-

tion



RSET



DLS1) and (Configuration



RSET



DLS2)

to the desired capacity limit. See Table 27. Capacity steps are

controlled by 2 relay switch inputs field wired to TB6 as shown

in Fig. 6 and 7.

For demand limit by 2-stage switch control, closing the first

stage demand limit contact will put the unit on the first demand

limit level. The unit will not exceed the percentage of capacity

entered as Demand Limit Switch 1 set point (DLS1). Closing

contacts on the second demand limit switch prevents the unit

from exceeding the capacity entered as Demand Limit Switch

2 set point. The demand limit stage that is set to the lowest de-

mand takes priority if both demand limit inputs are closed. If

the demand limit percentage does not match unit staging, the

unit will limit capacity to the closest capacity stage.

To disable demand limit configure DMDC to 0. See

Table 27.

EXTERNALLY POWERED DEMAND LIMIT (4 to

20 mA Controlled) — To configure demand limit for 4 to 20

mA control set the Demand Limit Select (Configura-

tion



RSET



DMDC) to 2. Then configure the Demand

Limit at 20 mA (Configuration



RSET



DM20) to the

maximum loadshed value desired. Connect the output from an

externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal to terminal block TB6,

terminals 1 and 5. Refer to the unit wiring diagram for these

connections to the optional/accessory energy management

module and terminal block. The control will reduce allowable

capacity to this level for the 20 mA signal. See Table 27 and

Fig. 21.

LEGEND

LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature

Fig. 18 — Outdoor-Air Temperature Reset

LEGEND

LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature

Fig. 19 — Space Temperature Reset

CAUTION

Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufac-

turer’s control systems, due to possible power supply

differences, full wave bridge versus half wave rectification.

The two different power supplies cannot be mixed.

ComfortLink™ controls use half wave rectification. A sig-

nal isolation device should be utilized if a full wave bridge

signal generating device is used.

LEGEND

Fig. 20 — Standard Chilled Fluid

Temperature Control — No Reset

EWT — Entering Water (Fluid) Temperature

LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature

DEMAND LIMIT (CCN Loadshed Controlled) — To con-

figure Demand Limit for CCN Loadshed control set the De-

mand Limit Select (Configuration



RSET



DMDC) to 3.

Then configure the Loadshed Group Number (Configura-

tion



RSET



SHNM), Loadshed Demand Delta (Configu-

ration



RSET



SHDL), and Maximum Loadshed Time

(Configuration



RSET



SHTM). See Table 27.

The Loadshed Group number is established by the CCN

system designer. The ComfortLink controls will respond to a

Redline command from the Loadshed control. When the

Redline command is received, the current stage of capacity is

set to the maximum stages available. Should the loadshed con-

trol send a Loadshed command, the ComfortLink controls will

reduce the current stages by the value entered for Loadshed

Demand delta. The Maximum Loadshed Time is the maximum

length of time that a loadshed condition is allowed to exist. The

control will disable the Redline/Loadshed command if no

Cancel command has been received within the configured

maximum loadshed time limit.

Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA) — A field supplied

and generated, externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal can be

used to provide the leaving fluid temperature set point. Connect

the signal to LVT7,8 (+,–). See Table 27 for instructions to

enable the function. Figure 22 shows how the 4 to 20 mA sig-

nal is linearly calculated on an overall 10 F to 80 F range for

fluid types (Configuration



OPT1



FLUD) 1 or 2. The set

point will be limited by the fluid (FLUD) type. Be sure that the

chilled water loop is protected at the lowest temperature.

50% CAPACITY AT 20 mA

75% CAPACITY AT 12 mA

100% CAPACITY AT 4 mA

0 2 4 6810 12 14 16 18 20

DEMAND LIMIT SIGNAL – 4 - 20 mA INPUT

100

MAX. ALLOWABLE LOAD (%)

Fig. 21 — 4 to 20-mA Demand Limiting

100

(38)

(27)

(15)

(4.4)

(-7)

(-17)

4 6.3 8.6 10.9 13.1 15.4 17.7 20

4 TO 20 mA SIGNAL TO EMM

SET POINT, F (C)

(32)

(21)

(10)

(-1)

(-12)

(FLUD = 2) MINIMUM

SET POINT 14 F (-10 C)

(FLUD = 1) MINIMUM

SET POINT 38 F (3.3 C)

MAXIMUM

SET POINT

70 F (21.1 C)

Fig. 22 — Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA)

EMM — Energy Management Module

Table 27 — Configuring Demand Limit

*Seven items skipped in this example.

Digital Scroll Option — The 30RAP units have a

factory-installed option for a digital scroll compressor which

provides additional stages of unloading for the unit. The digital

compressor is always installed in the A1 compressor location.

When a digital compressor is installed, a digital unloader sole-

noid (DUS) is used on the digital compressor.

DIGITAL SCROLL OPERATION — A digital scroll oper-

ates in two stages - the "loaded state" when the solenoid valve

is normally closed and the "unloaded state" when the solenoid

valve is open. During the loaded state, the compressor operates

like a standard scroll and delivers full capacity and mass flow.

However, during the unloaded state, there is no capacity

and no mass flow through the compressor. The capacity of the

system is varied by varying the time the compressor operates

in an unloaded and loaded state during a 15-second period. If

the DUS is energized for 7 seconds, the compressor will be

operating at 47% capacity. If the DUS is energized for 10 sec-

onds, the compressor will be operating at approximately 33%

of its capacity. Capacity is the time averaged summation of

loaded and unloaded states, and its range is continuous from

the minimum configured capacity to 100%. Regardless of

capacity, the compressor always rotates with constant speed.

As the compressor transitions from a loaded to unloaded state,

the discharge and suction pressures will fluctuate and the com-

pressor sound will change.

The ComfortLink controller controls and integrates the op-

eration of the DUS into the compressor staging routine to

maintain temperature control. When a digital compressor is in-

stalled, an additional discharge gas temperature thermistor

(DTT) is installed along with the AUX board for control of the

DUS.

DIGITAL COMPRESSOR CONFIGURATION — When a

digital compressor is installed, the configuration parameter

(Configuration



UNIT



A1TY) is configured to YES.

There is also a maximum unload time configuration, (Config-

uration



UNIT



MAX.T) that is set to 7 seconds, which in-

dicates the maximum unloading for the digital compressor is

47%. This is done to optimize efficiency of the system.

PRE-START-UP

Do not attempt to start the chiller until following checks

have been completed.

System Check

1. Check all auxiliary components, such as chilled fluid

pumps, air-handling equipment, or other equipment to

which the chiller supplies liquid. Consult manufacturer's

instructions. Verify that any pump interlock contacts have

been properly installed. If the unit If the unit has

field-installed accessories, be sure all are properly in-

stalled and wired correctly. Refer to unit wiring diagrams.

MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT

CONFIGURATION DISP TEST ON/OFF Test Display LEDs

UNIT TYPE X Unit Type

OPT1 FLUD X Cooler Fluid

OPT2 CTRL X Control Method

HP.A

HP.B

EXV.A

EXV.B

M.MST

RSET CRST X Cooling Reset Type

DMDC* X Demand Limit Select

Default: 0

0 = None

1 = Switch

2 = 4 to 20 mA Input

3 = CCN Loadshed

DM20 XXX % Demand Limit at 20 mA Default: 100%

Range: 0 to 100

SHNM XXX Loadshed Group

Number

Default: 0

Range: 0 to 99

SHDL XXX% Loadshed Demand

Delta

Default: 0%

Range: 0 to 60%

SHTM XXX MIN Maximum Loadshed

Time

Default: 60 min.

Range: 0 to 120 min.

DLS1 XXX % Demand Limit

Switch 1

Default: 80%

Range: 0 to 100%

DLS2 XXX % Demand Limit

Switch 2

Default: 50%

Range: 0 to 100%

ENTER

IMPORTANT: Before beginning Pre-Start-Up or Start-Up,

complete Start-Up Checklist for 30RAP Liquid Chiller at

end of this publication (pages CL-1 to CL-10). The check-

list assures proper start-up of a unit, and provides a record

of unit condition, application requirements, system infor-

mation, and operation at initial start-up.

2. Use the scrolling marquee display to adjust the Cooling

Set Point.

3. Fill chilled fluid circuit with clean water (with recom-

mended inhibitor added) or other non-corrosive fluid to

be cooled. Bleed all air out of the high points of the sys-

tem. If chilled water is to be maintained at a temperature

below 40 F (4.4 C) or outdoor temperatures are expected

to be below 32 F (0° C), a brine of sufficient concentra-

tion must be used to prevent freeze-up at anticipated

suction temperatures. See Table 28.

4. Check tightness of all electrical connections.

5. Oil should be visible in the compressor sightglass(es).

See Fig. 23. An acceptable oil level in the compressors is

from 1/8 to 3/8 of sight glass. Adjust the oil level as re-

quired. See Oil Charge section on page 50 for Carrier ap-

proved oils.

6. Electrical power source must agree with unit nameplate.

7. All condenser fan and factory installed hydronic package

pump motors are three phase. Check for proper rotation

of condenser fans first BEFORE attempting to start

pumps or compressors. To reverse rotation, interchange

any two of the main incoming power leads.

8. Be sure system is fully charged with refrigerant (see

Check Refrigerant Charge section on this page).

9. If unit is a brine unit, check to ensure proper brine con-

centration is used to prevent freezing.

10. Verify proper operation of cooler and hydronic package

heaters (if installed). Heaters operate at the same voltage

as the main incoming power supply and are single phase.

Heater current is approximately 0.4 amps for 460 and

575 v units. Heater current is approximately 0.8 amps for

230 v units.

START-UP AND OPERATION

NOTE: Refer to Start-Up Checklist on pages CL-1 to CL-10.

Actual Start-Up — Actual start-up should be done only

under supervision of a qualified refrigeration mechanic.

1. Be sure all service valves are open.

2. Using the scrolling marquee display, set leaving-fluid set

point (Set Points



COOL



CSP.1). No cooling range

adjustment is necessary.

3. Start chilled fluid pump (if not configured for cooler

pump control).

4. Turn ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch to

ENABLE position.

5. Allow unit to operate and confirm that everything is func-

tioning properly. Check to see that leaving fluid tempera-

ture agrees with leaving set point (Set Points



COOL



CSP.1) or (Set Points



COOL



CSP.2), or if reset is

used, with the control point (Run Status



VIEW



CTPT).

6. Check the cooler leaving chilled water temperature to see

that it remains well above 32 F (0° C), or the brine freez-

ing point if the unit is a medium temperature brine unit.

7. Recheck compressor oil level (see Oil Charge section).

Check Refrigerant Charge — All 30RAP units are

shipped with a complete operating charge of R-410A and

should be under sufficient pressure to conduct a leak test after

installation. If there is no system pressure, admit nitrogen until

a pressure is observed and then proceed to test for leaks. After

leaks are repaired, the system must be dehydrated.

All refrigerant charging should be done through the ¼-in.

Schraeder connection on the liquid line. Do NOT add refriger-

ant charge through the low-pressure side of the system. If com-

plete charging is required, weigh in the appropriate charge for

the circuit as shown on the unit nameplate. If partial charging is

required, operate circuit at full load and use an accurate tem-

perature sensor on the liquid line as it enters the EXV. Use the

Temperatures mode on the scrolling marquee display to show

the circuit saturated condensing temperature (Tempera-

tures



CIR.A



SCT.A) or (Temperatu res



CIR.B



SCT.B). Charging is most accurate at saturated discharge

temperatures of 120 to 125 F (49 to 52 C). Block condenser air-

flow as required to reach this temperature range. Add refriger-

ant until the system subcooling (SCT.A or SCT.B minus liquid

line temperature entering EXV) is approximately 15 to 17 F

(–9.4 to –8.3 C). Refrigerant VAPOR only may be added to a

circuit through the 1/4-in. suction Schraeder connection on the

suction line.

Table 28 — Minimum Cooler Flow Rates and Minimum Loop Volume

OIL SIGHTGLASS

Fig. 23 — Sight Glass Location

a30-4978

30RAP

SIZE

MINIMUM COOLER FLOW

RATE (gpm)

MAXIMUM COOLER FLOW

RATE (gpm)

MINIMUM COOLER FLOW

RATE (l/s)

MAXIMUM COOLER FLOW

RATE (l/s)

010 13 50 0.8 3.2

015 17 66 1.1 4.2

018 20 78 1.3 4.9

020 23 91 1.5 5.7

025 28 112 1.8 7.1

030 33 133 2.1 8.4

035 41 164 2.6 10.3

040 47 186 3.0 11.7

045 53 209 3.3 13.2

050 57 228 3.6 14.4

055 63 251 4.0 15.8

060 68 270 4.3 17.0

Operating Limitations

TEMPERATURES (See Table 29 for 30RAP standard tem-

perature limits).

High Cooler Leaving Chilled Water (Fluid) Temperatures

(LCWT) — During start-up with cooler LCWT above approx-

imately 60 F (16 C), the unit expansion valve will limit suction

pressure to approximately 90 psig (620 kPa) to avoid overload-

ing the compressor.

Low Cooler LCWT — For standard units, the LCWT must be

no lower than 40 F (4.4 C). If the unit is the factory-installed

optional medium temperature brine unit, the cooler LCWT can

go down to 15 F (–9.4 C).

Table 29 — Temperature Limits for

Standard 30RAP Units

LEGEND

*For sustained operation, EWT should not exceed 85 F (29.4 C).

†Unit requires modification below this temperature.

LOW-AMBIENT OPERATION — If operating temperatures

below 45 F (7 C) on size 018-030 units, and 32 F (0° C) on size

035-060 units are expected, accessory Motormaster® V con-

trol must be installed. Operating temperatures can go as low as

–20 F (–29 C) on size 010 and 015 units, as standard. Installa-

tion of wind baffles is also required. Refer to separate installa-

tion instructions for operation using this accessory. Contact

your Carrier representative for details.

VOLTAGE — ALL UNITS

Main Power Supply — Minimum and maximum acceptable

supply voltages are listed in the Installation Instructions.

Unbalanced 3-Phase Supply Voltage — Never operate a motor

where a phase imbalance between phases is greater than 2%.

To determine percent voltage imbalance:

The maximum voltage deviation is the largest difference

between a voltage measurement across 2 legs and the average

across all 3 legs.

Example: Supply voltage is 240-3-60.

AB = 243 v

BC = 236 v

AC = 238 v

1. Determine average voltage:

2. Determine maximum deviation from average voltage:

(AB) 243 – 239 = 4 v

(BC) 239 – 236 = 3 v

(AC) 239 – 238 = 1 v

Maximum deviation is 4 v.

3. Determine percent voltage imbalance:

This voltage imbalance is satisfactory as it is below the

maximum allowable of 2%.

Control Circuit Power — Power for the control circuit is

supplied from the main incoming power through a factory-

installed control power transformer (TRAN1) for all models.

Field wiring connections are made to the LVT.

OPERATION SEQUENCE

During unit off cycle, the control monitors the outdoor air

temperature. If the ambient temperature drops below 40 F

(4.4 C), cooler and hydronic system heaters (if either are facto-

ry installed) are energized. If power is maintained to the chiller

and the EMERGENCY ON/OFF switch is left in the OFF po-

sition, these heaters are also energized.

The unit is started by putting the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE

CONTACT switch in the ENABLE or REMOTE CONTACT

position. When the unit receives a call for cooling (either from

the internal control or CCN network command or remote con-

tact closure), the unit stages up in capacity to maintain the leav-

ing fluid set point. The first compressor starts 11/2 to 3 minutes

after the call for cooling.

The lead circuit can be specifically designated on all models

or selected based on compressor run hours and starts depend-

ing on field configuration. The unit control will override this

selection under certain starting conditions to properly maintain

oil return to the compressors. In general, on dual compressor

CAUTION

Never charge liquid into low-pressure side of system. Do

not overcharge. Overcharging results in higher discharge

pressure, possible compressor damage, and higher power

consumption. During charging or removal of refrigerant, be

sure water is continuously circulating through the cooler to

prevent freezing.

CAUTION

Do not operate with cooler leaving chiller water (fluid)

temperature (LCWT) below 40 F (4.4 C) for the standard

units, or below 15 F (–9.4 C) for units factory built for

medium temperature brine.

UNIT SIZE 30RA 010-030 035-060

Temperature F C F C

Maximum Ambient

Temperature 120 49 120 49

Minimum Ambient

Temperature 457 320

Maximum Cooler EWT* 95 35 95 35

Maximum Cooler LWT 70 21 70 21

Minimum Cooler LWT† 40 4.4 40 4.4

EWT — Entering Fluid (Water) Temperature

LWT — Leaving Fluid (Water) Temperature

CAUTION

Brine duty application (below 40 F [4.4 C] LCWT) for

chiller normally requires factory modification. Contact

your Carrier representative for applicable LCWT range for

standard water-cooled chiller in a specific application.

% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x

max voltage deviation

from avg voltage

average voltage

Average voltage = 243 + 236 + 238

=717

= 239

% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x 4

239

= 1.7%

IMPORTANT: If the supply voltage phase imbalance is

more than 2%, contact your local electric utility company

immediately. Do not operate unit until imbalance condition

is corrected.

circuits, the control will most often start the A1 or B1 compres-

sor first, especially after long off periods. The MBB controls

fan stages to maintain the head pressure set point and will auto-

matically adjust unit capacity as required to keep compressors

from operating outside of the specified envelope. There are no

pumpout or pumpdown sequences on these chillers.

For all units, if temperature reset is being used, the unit con-

trols to a higher leaving-fluid temperature as the building load

reduces. If demand limit is used, the unit may temporarily be

unable to maintain the desired leaving-fluid temperature be-

cause of imposed power limitations.

SERVICE

Electronic Components

CONTROL COMPONENTS — Unit uses an advanced elec-

tronic control system that normally does not require service.

For details on controls refer to Operating Data section.

Access to the compressors is through latched panels from

beneath the control box on all models or from opposite the coil

side (sizes 010-030 only). The front door(s) provide access to

the compressor(s) and all components of the refrigeration sys-

tem. For size 010-030 units, access to the controls is through

the upper latched outer door above the compressor access door.

Similarly, the upper center latched door on sizes 035-060 gives

access to the controls. Inner panels are secured in place and

should not be removed unless all power to the chiller is off.

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) — See Fig. 24

for a cutaway view of the EXV. High-pressure liquid refriger-

ant enters valve through the top. As refrigerant passes through

the orifice, pressure drops and refrigerant changes to a 2-phase

condition (liquid and vapor). The electronic expansion valve

operates through an electronically controlled activation of a

stepper motor. The stepper motor stays in position, unless

power pulses initiate the two discrete sets of motor stator wind-

ings for rotation in either direction. The direction depends on

the phase relationship of the power pulses.

The motor directly operates the spindle, which has rotating

movements that are transformed into linear motion by the

transmission in the cage assembly. The valve includes a posi-

tive shut-off when closed.

There are two different EXVs. See Table 30 for number of

steps. The EXV motor moves at 200 steps per second. Com-

manding the valve to either 0% or 100% will add extra steps to

the move, to ensure the value is open or closed completely.

Table 30 — EXV Steps

The EXV board controls the valve. Each circuit has a

thermistor located in a well in the suction manifold before the

compressor. Suction pressure as measured by the suction pres-

sure transducer is converted to a saturated suction temperature.

The thermistor measures the temperature of the superheated

gas entering the compressor and the pressure transducer

determines the saturated temperature of suction gas. The differ-

ence between the temperature of the superheated gas and the

saturated suction temperature is the superheat. The EXV board

controls the position of the electronic expansion valve stepper

motor to maintain superheat set point.

The MBB controls the superheat leaving cooler to approxi-

mately 9° F (5° C). Because EXV status is communicated to

the main base board (MBB) and is controlled by the EXV

boards, it is possible to track the valve position. The unit is then

protected against loss of charge and a faulty valve. Just prior to

compressor start, the EXV will open. At low ambient tempera-

tures the EXV is closed at start up. After initialization period,

valve position is tracked by the EXV board by constantly mon-

itoring the amount of valve movement.

The EXV is also used to limit cooler saturated suction tem-

perature to 50 F (10 C). This makes it possible for the chiller to

start at higher cooler fluid temperatures without overloading

the compressor. This is commonly referred to as MOP (maxi-

mum operating pressure). At ambient temperatures above

110 F, MOP is bypassed at start-up to prevent charge backup in

the condenser.

If it appears that the EXV module is not properly control-

ling circuit operation to maintain correct superheat, there are a

number of checks that can be made using test functions and

initialization features built into the microprocessor control. See

the EXV Troubleshooting Procedure section to test EXVs.

EXV Troubleshooting Procedure — Follow steps

below to diagnose and correct EXV/economizer problems.

Check EXV motor operation first. Switch the Enable/Off/

Remote Contact (EOR) switch to the Off position. Press

on the Navigator™ display until ‘Select a menu item’ appears

on the display. Use the arrow keys to select the Service Test

mode. Press . The display will be:

> TEST OFF

OUTS

COMP

Press (password entry may be required) and use

to change ‘OFF’ to ‘ON’. Switch the EOR switch to

Enable. The Service Test mode is now enabled. Move the

pointer down to the OUTS sub-mode and press . Move the

pointer to item EXV.A or EXV.B as needed. Press and

the valve position will flash. Use to select 100% valve

position (hold for quick movement) and press .

The technician should be able to feel the actuator moving by

placing a hand on the EXV. A sight glass is located on the valve

body to verify that the sleeve is moving to expose/cover slots in

the orifice. A hard knocking should be felt from the actuator

when it reaches the top of its stroke (can be heard if surround-

ings are relatively quiet). Press again twice if necessary to

confirm this. To close the valve, press , select 0% with

and press . The actuator should knock when it reaches

the bottom of its stroke. If it is believed that the valve is not

working properly, continue with the checkout procedure

below:

Check the EXV output signals at appropriate terminals on

the EXV module (see Fig. 25). Connect positive test lead to red

wire (EXV-J6 terminal 3 for Circuit A, EXV-J7 terminal 3 for

Circuit B). Set meter to approximately 20 vdc. Using the

Service Test procedure above, move the valve output under test

to 100%. DO NOT short meter leads together or pin 3 to any

other pin as board damage will occur.

WARNING

Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut

off all power to this equipment during service. There may

be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect

locations to alert others not to restore power until work is

completed.

UNIT SIZE 30RAP EXV STEPS

010-020 1596

025,030 2500

035-045 1596

050-060 2500

ESCAPE

ENTER

During the next several seconds, carefully connect the nega-

tive test lead to pins 1,2,4 and 5 in succession (plug J6 for Cir-

cuit A, plug J7 for Circuit B). Digital voltmeters will average

this signal and display approximately 6 vdc. If it remains con-

stant at a voltage other than 6 VDC or shows 0 volts, remove

the connector to the valve and recheck.

Press and select 0% to close the valve. Check the 4 po-

sition DIP switch on the board (all switches should be set to

On). If a problem still exists, replace the EXV module. If the

reading is correct, the expansion valve and EXV wiring should

be checked. Check the EXV terminal strip and interconnecting

wiring.

1. Check color coding and wire connections. Make sure

they are connected to the correct terminals at the EXV

driver and EXV plug and that the cables are not crossed.

2. Check for continuity and tight connection at all pin

terminals.

3. Check the resistance of the EXV motor windings. Re-

move the EXV module plug (J6 for Circuit A, J7 for Cir-

cuit B) and check the resistance of the two windings be-

tween pins 1 and 2 for one winding and pins 4 and 5 for

the other winding (see Fig. 25). The resistance should be

100 ohms ± 10 ohms.

FIELD SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS — The EXV valves

on sizes 025, 030, 050-060 can be serviced. The EXV valves

on all other sizes are hermetic and cannot be disassembled for

installation or during service, however, the cable and retainer

may be replaced if necessary. Motor kits for the EXV valve are

available as replacement parts.

To remove the valve from the system, perform the follow-

ing procedure:

1. Be sure the refrigerant has been recovered from the

circuit.

2. Disconnect the line voltage to the valve controller. Dis-

connect the valve wires from the controller.

3. If the motor fails to operate properly, check the resistance

of each motor phase. Resistance between black and white

leads or between the red and green leads should be ap-

proximately 100 ohms. Differences of more than 10% be-

tween phases indicate a defective motor. Resistance be-

tween black and red, or any lead and piping, should be in-

finite or “open”. Any resistance reading will indicate a

shorted winding and the valve will need to be replaced.

4. The output of the controller to the valve can be tested

with the following procedure:

a. Disconnect supply voltage to the controller.

SPORLAN

MOTOR AND

ADAPTER

ASSEMBLY

CABLE

CABLE RETAINER

CABLE

RETAINER

MOTOR ADAPTER

ASSEMBLY

MOTOR ADAPTER

ASSEMBLY

INCLUDED IN CABLE KIT

GASKET

SIGHTGLASS

FLOW

DIRECTION

NORMAL

FLOW

DIRECTION

Fig. 24 — Electronic Expansion Valve Details

a30-4971

ENTER

b. Place a digital voltmeter, on 20-volt AC scale,

across the black and white terminals on the con-

troller. Restore power to the controller. For at least

7 seconds, the voltmeter should read approxi-

mately 12 to 14 volts. Significant differences mean

the controller is defective or not properly config-

ured for the EXV valve.

c. Repeat the procedure in Step b above using the red

and green terminals on the controller. If the con-

troller responds properly, then the wiring may be

damaged or the valve may be plugged with debris

or otherwise obstructed.

d. The EXV valves on sizes 025, 030, 050-060 may

be disassembled for cleaning, inspection or motor

assembly replacement.

VALVE REPLACEMENT — The valve may be replaced by

unsoldering or cutting the piping. A tubing cutter must be used

to prevent creating contaminants in the piping.

VALVE REASSEMBLY — Perform the following procedure

to reassemble the EXV valve:

1. Use Service Test to open the EXV to 100%. This will re-

tract the white polyester driver/piston fully into the driver

guide. Remove power from the valve or controller.

2. Lightly oil the threads, and gasket or knife-edge on the

new motor adaptor. Carefully seat the adaptor on the

valve body or engage and tighten the lock nut if used.

Lock nuts should be torqued to approximately 45 ft-lb.

One eighth turn more than hand tight is sufficient to

achieve a leak proof seal on knife-edge joints.

3. After the motor is tightened, the cable should be replaced

on the valve. Care should be taken to ensure engagement

of the alignment key. Snap on the cable retainer.

4. Pressurize the system and check for leaks.

5. Reapply power to the ComfortLink™ controller. Since,

during service, valve position as calculated by the con-

troller will be lost, the controller should be initialized at

least twice. In some instances, cycling power to the con-

troller will accomplish this.

Compressor Replacement (Refer to Fig. 26

and 27) — All models contain scroll compressors and have

from one to four compressors. The size 010-030 units are a sin-

gle refrigeration circuit while sizes 035-060 are dual circuit. A

compressor is most easily removed from the front of the unit,

depending on where clearance space was allowed during unit

installation.

Remove the junction box cover bolts and disconnect the

compressor power and ground connections. Remove the cable

from the compressor junction box. Remove the connections

from the high-pressure switch. Knock the same holes out of the

new compressor junction box and install the cable connectors

from the old compressor.

The compressors are bolted to rails, which are in turn bolted

to the unit basepan for all sizes except 010 and 015 which are

directly bolted to the basepan. Remove the 4 bolts holding the

compressor to the rail on the basepan. Save the mounting hard-

ware for use with the new compressor. Carefully cut the com-

pressor suction and discharge lines with a tubing cutter as close

to the compressor as feasible. Remove high-pressure switch

and pressure transducer(s) if required for compressor removal.

Lift one corner of the compressor at a time and remove all the

rubber mounting grommets (single compressor circuits) or

steel spacers (dual compressor circuits). Remove the old com-

pressor from the unit.

Slide the new compressor in place on the basepan. Lifting

one side of the compressor at a time, replace all of the compres-

sor mounting grommets. Using new tubing as required, recon-

nect compressor suction and discharge lines. Using hardware

saved, reinstall the mounting bolts and washers through the

compressor feet. Using proper techniques, braze suction and

discharge lines and check for leaks. Reconnect oil equalization

line on dual compressor circuit models.

Reconnect the compressor power connections and high-

pressure switch wiring as on the old compressor. Refer to

Fig. 26 and 27. Following the installation of the new compres-

sor, tighten all hardware to the following specifications. (See

Table 31.)

Table 31 — Unit Torque Specification

Cooler

BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER RE-

PLACEMENT — Brazed-plate heat exchangers cannot be

repaired if they develop a leak. If a leak (refrigerant or water)

develops, the heat exchanger must be replaced. To replace a

brazed-plate heat exchanger:

1. Check that the replacement heat exchanger is the same as

the original heat exchanger. The unit insulation covers the

manufacturer’s part number. Make sure the depths of the

replacement and original cooler heat exchangers are the

same.

BLK

WHT

GRN

RED

BLK

WHT

GRN

RED

Fig. 25 — EXV Cable Connections to EXV Module

a30-4972

CAUTION

If the existing motor has been removed for inspection or

cleaning, be sure that the piston is fully retracted into the

motor assembly before installation on the valve. Failure to

do so will permanently damage the drive and motor.

Replacement motor assemblies are shipped in the retracted

position and may be installed as received.

FASTENER RECOMMENDED TORQUE

Compressor Mounting

Bolts

7 to 10 ft-lb (9.5 to 13.5 N-m)

Compressor Power

Connections

24 to 28 in.-lb (2.7- to 3.2 N-m)

Compressor Ground

Terminal Connections

14 to 18 in.-lb (1.6 to 2.0 N-m)

2. Disconnect the liquid-in and liquid-out connections at the

heat exchanger.

3. Recover the refrigerant from the system, and unsolder the

refrigerant-in and refrigerant-out connections.

4. Remove the old heat exchanger. The replacement heat ex-

changer is supplied fully insulated. It also includes a cool-

er heater. Use of the heater is not required unless the orig-

inal cooler contained a factory installed heater.

5. Install the replacement heat exchanger in the unit and at-

tach the mounting bracket hardware to the fan uprights

(sizes 010-030) or to the bottom bracket (sizes 035-060)

using the hardware removed in Step 4. Reconnect the

cooler heater if required. For sizes 010-025, torque the

bolts to 7-10 ft-lb. For sizes 030-060, torque the bolts to

30-50 ft-lb.

6. Carefully braze the refrigerant lines to the connections on

the heat exchanger. Lines should be soldered using silver

as the soldering material with a minimum of 45% silver.

Keep the temperature below 1472 F (800 C) under nor-

mal soldering conditions (no vacuum) to prevent the cop-

per solder of the brazed plate heat exchanger from chang-

ing its structure. Failure to do so can result in internal

or external leakage at the connections which cannot be re-

paired. Braze the liquid lines with a heat sink around the

expansion valve to protect it from excess heat.

7. Reconnect the water/brine lines.

8. Dehydrate and recharge the unit. Check for leaks.

BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER

CLEANING — Brazed-plate heat exchangers must be

cleaned chemically. A professional cleaning service skilled in

chemical cleaning should be used. Use a weak acid (5% phos-

phoric acid, or if the heat exchanger is cleaned frequently, 5%

oxalic acid). Pump the cleaning solution through the

exchanger, preferably in a backflush mode. After cleaning,

rinse with large amounts of fresh water to dispose of all the

acid. Cleaning materials must be disposed of properly.

The factory-installed strainer screen in front of the water/

brine inlets of the heat exchangers should be cleaned periodi-

cally, depending on condition of the chiller water/brine.

Oil Charge

Puron refrigerant systems use a polyol ester (POE) oil. Use

only Carrier approved compressor oil. Oil should be visible in

compressor oil sight glass. An acceptable oil level is from 1/8 to

3/8 of sight glass. All compressors must be off when checking

oil level. Recommended oil level adjustment method is as

follows:

ADD OIL — Recover charge from the unit. Add oil to suction

line Schrader valve on tandem compressors sets and the com-

pressor Schrader on the trio's and single compressor circuits.

(See Fig. 26 and 27.) When oil can be seen at the bottom of the

sight glass, add oil in 5 oz increments which is approximately

1/8 in oil level. Run all compressors for 20 minutes then shut off

to check oil level. Repeat procedure until acceptable oil level is

present.

NOTE: Use only Carrier approved compressor oil. Approved

sources are:

Totaline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3MAF POE, P903-1601

Mobil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EAL Arctic 32-3MA

Uniqema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RL32-3MAF

Do not reuse oil that has been drained out, or oil that has

been exposed to atmosphere.

Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX) Con-

denser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning

Recommendations

Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain

proper operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination and

removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the

coil and extend the life of the unit. The following steps should

be taken to clean MCHX condenser coils:

1. Remove any foreign objects or debris attached to the

coreface or trapped within the mounting frame and

brackets.

2. Put on personal protective equipment including safety-

glasses and/or face shield, waterproof clothing and

gloves. It is recommended to use full coverage clothing.

3. Start high pressure water sprayer and purge any soap or

industrial cleaners from sprayer before cleaning condens-

er coils. Only clean, potable water is authorized for clean-

ing condenser coils.

4. Clean condenser face by spraying the core steady and

uniformly from top to bottom while directing the spray

straight toward the core. Do not exceed 900 psig or 30 de-

gree angle. The nozzle must be at least 12 in. from the

core face. Reduce pressure and use caution to prevent

damage to air centers.

Check Refrigerant Feed Components

FILTER DRIER — The function of the filter drier is to main-

tain a clean, dry system. The moisture indicator (described

below) indicates any need to change the filter drier. The filter

drier is a sealed-type drier. When the drier needs to be

changed, the entire filter drier must be replaced.

NOTE: Dual circuit (035-060 sizes) units have 1 filter drier per

circuit.

MOISTURE-LIQUID INDICATOR — The indicator is located

immediately ahead of the TXV to provide an indication of the

refrigerant moisture content. It also provides a sight glass for

refrigerant liquid. Clear flow of liquid refrigerant (at full unit

loading) indicates sufficient charge in the system. Bubbles in the

sight glass (at full unit loading) indicate an undercharged system

or the presence of noncondensables. Moisture in the system,

measured in parts per million (ppm), changes the color of the

indicator as follows:

Green (safe) —Moisture is below 75 ppm

Yellow-Green (caution) — 75 to 150 ppm

Yellow (wet) — above 150 ppm

The unit must be in operation at least 12 hours before the

moisture indicator gives an accurate reading, and must be in

contact with liquid refrigerant. At the first sign of moisture in

the system, change the corresponding filter drier.

NOTE: Dual circuit (035-060 sizes) units have one indicator

per circuit.

CAUTION

The compressor in a Puron® refigerant (R-410A) system

uses a polyol ester (POE) oil. This is extremely hygro-

scopic, meaning it absorbs water readily. POE oils can

absorb 15 times as much water as other oils designed for

HCFC and CFC refrigerants. Take all necessary precau-

tions to avoid exposure of the oil to the atmosphere. Failure

to do so could result in possible equipment damage.

CAUTION

Do not apply any chemical cleaners to MCHX condenser

coils. These cleaners can accelerate corrosion and damage

the coil.

CAUTION

Excessive water pressure will fracture the braze between

air centers and refrigerant tubes.

OIL

SIGHTGLASS

DISCHARGE

ACCESS

VALVE FLOW

SWITCH

LWT

DTT

DISCHARGE

ACCESS

VALVE

DPT HPS

RGT SPT

SUCTION

ACCESS

VALVE

RGT

SPT

DPT

HPS

EWT

SUCTION

ACCESS

VALVE

FLOW

SWITCH

LWT DTT

EWT

RGT

SPT

HPSDPT

COMPRESSOR A1

COMPRESSOR A2

Fig. 26 — Compressor Location — 30RAP010-030

Fig. 27 — Compressor Location — 30RAP035-060

LEGEND FOR FIG. 26 AND 27

DPT — Discharge Pressure Thermostat

DTT — Discharge Temperature Thermistor

EWT — Entering Water Thermistor

HPS — High Pressure Switch

LWT — Leaving Water Thermistor

RGT — Return Gas Thermistor

SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer

a30-4973

a30-4974

MINIMUM LOAD VALVE — On units equipped with the

factory-installed capacity reduction option, a solenoid valve

and discharge bypass valve (minimum load valve) are located

between the discharge line and the cooler entering-refrigerant

line. The MBB cycles the solenoid to perform minimum load

valve function and the discharge bypass valve modulates to the

suction pressure set point and the valve.

The amount of capacity reduction achieved by the mini-

mum load valve is not adjustable. The total unit capacity with

the minimum load valve is shown in Table 19.

PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES — All units have one pres-

sure relief device per circuit located in the liquid line which re-

lieves at 210 F (100 C).

Check Unit Safeties

HIGH-PRESSURE SWITCH — A high-pressure switch is

provided to protect each compressor and refrigeration system

from unsafe high pressure conditions. See Table 32 for high-

pressure switch settings.

The high-pressure switch is mounted in the discharge line of

each circuit. If an unsafe, high-pressure condition should exist,

the switch opens and shuts off the affected circuit. The CSB

senses the compressor feedback signal and generates an appro-

priate alarm. The MBB prevents the circuit from restarting un-

til the alert condition is reset. The switch should open at the

pressure corresponding to the appropriate switch setting as

shown in Table 32.

Table 32 — Factory Settings, High-Pressure

Switch (Fixed)

Clear the alarm using the scrolling marquee display as de-

scribed on page 63. The unit should restart after the compressor

anti-short-cycle delay, built into the unit control module,

expires.

PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS — Each refrigerant circuit is

equipped with a suction and discharge pressure transducer.

These inputs to the MBB are not only used to monitor the sta-

tus of the unit, but to also maintain operation of the chiller

within the compressor manufacturer's specified limits. The in-

put to the MBB from the suction pressure transducer is also

used to protect the compressor from operating at low pressure

conditions and low superheat conditions. In some cases, the

unit may not be able to run at full capacity. The control module

will automatically reduce the capacity of a circuit as needed to

maintain specified maximum/minimum operating pressures.

COOLER FREEZE-UP PROTECTION

The main base board (MBB) monitors leaving fluid temper-

ature at all times. The MBB will rapidly remove stages of ca-

pacity as necessary to prevent freezing conditions due to the

rapid loss of load or low cooler fluid flow.

When the cooler is exposed to lower ambient temperatures

(34 F [1° C] or below), freeze-up protection is required using

inhibited ethylene or propylene glycol.

HEATER CABLE — Optional factory-installed cooler and/or

hydronic package heaters are cycled based on the input from

the outside-air temperature sensor. These heaters, when in-

stalled, are designed to protect the cooler and/or hydronic pack-

age from freezing down to –20 F (–29 C). Power for these heat-

ers is supplied from the main unit power.

The input from the low pressure transducer provides a back-

up cooler freeze protection package. The MBB shuts down the

unit when a low pressure condition exists that could cause the

cooler to freeze up.

WINTER SHUTDOWN — At the end of the cooling season:

1. Drain the fluid from the cooler, hydronic package (if in-

stalled) and internal piping.

2. Fill the cooler and hydronic package with at least 2 gal-

lons (7.6 L) of inhibited propylene glycol or other suit-

able inhibited antifreeze solution to prevent any residual

water in the cooler and hydronic package/piping from

freezing.

3. At the beginning of the next cooling season, refill the

cooler and add the recommended inhibitor.

Thermistors — Electronic control uses up to five 5 k

thermistors to sense temperatures used to control operation of

the chiller. Thermistors EWT, LWT, RGTA, RGTB, and OAT

are identical in their temperature and voltage drop perfor-

mance. The SPT space temperature thermistor has a 10 k in-

put channel and it has a different set of temperature vs. resis-

tance and voltage drop performance. Resistance at various tem-

peratures are listed in Tables 33-37. For dual chiller operation,

a dual chiller sensor is required which is a 5 k thermistor.

When a digital compressor is used, a DTT (digital temperature

thermistor) is used. The DTT is an 86 k thermistor.

REPLACING THERMISTORS (EWT, LWT, RGT) — Add

a small amount of thermal conductive grease to the thermistor

well and end of probe. For all probes, tighten the retaining nut

¼ turn past finger tight. See Fig. 28.

THERMISTOR/TEMPERATURE SENSOR CHECK — A

high quality digital volt-ohmmeter is required to perform this

check.

1. Connect the digital voltmeter across the appropriate the-

mistor terminals at the J8 terminal strip on the Main Base

Board (see Fig. 29).

2. Using the voltage reading obtained, read the sensor tem-

perature from Tables 33-37.

3. To check thermistor accuracy, measure temperature at

probe location with an accurate thermocouple-type tem-

perature measuring instrument. Insulate thermocouple to

avoid ambient temperatures from influencing reading.

Temperature measured by thermocouple and temperature

determined from thermistor voltage reading should be

close, ± 5° F (3° C) if care was taken in applying thermo-

couple and taking readings.

If a more accurate check is required, unit must be shut down

and thermistor removed and checked at a known temperature

(freezing point or boiling point of water) using either voltage

drop measured across thermistor at the J8 terminal, by deter-

mining the resistance with chiller shut down and thermistor

UNIT CUTOUT CUT-IN

Psig kPa Psig kPa

30RA 650 4482 500 3447

WARNING

On medium temperature brine units, the anti-freeze solu-

tion must be properly mixed to prevent freezing at a tem-

perature of at least 15 F (8.3 C) below the leaving-fluid

temperature set point. Failure to provide the proper anti-

freeze solution mixture is considered abuse and may impair

or otherwise negatively impact the Carrier warranty.

CAUTION

Do not disconnect main unit power when servicing com-

pressor(s) if ambient temperature is below 40 F (4.4 C).

The compressors have either a single circuit breaker or

multiple circuit breakers which can be used to shut off

power to the compressors. If power to the unit must be off

for a prolonged period, drain the cooler, hydronic package

(if installed) and internal piping. Add glycol according to

Winter Shutdown Step 2 below.

disconnected from J8. Compare the values determined with the

value read by the control in the Temperatures mode using the

scrolling marquee display.

Pressure Transducers — The suction and discharge

transducers are different part numbers and can be distinguished

by the color of the transducer body, suction (yellow) and dis-

charge (red). No pressure transducer calibration is required.

The transducers operate on a 5 vdc supply, which is generated

by the main base board (MBB). See Fig. 29 for transducer con-

nections to the J8 connector on the MBB.

TROUBLESHOOTING — If a transducer is suspected of be-

ing faulty, first check supply voltage to the transducer. Supply

voltage should be 5 vdc ± 0.2 v. If supply voltage is correct,

compare pressure reading displayed on the scrolling marquee

display module against pressure shown on a calibrated pressure

gauge. Pressure readings should be within ± 15 psig. If the

two readings are not reasonably close, replace the pressure

transducer.

Chilled Water Flow Switch — A factory-installed

flow switch is installed in the leaving fluid piping for all units

without the factory-installed hydronic package. See Fig. 30.

Units with the optional hydronic package have the flow switch

installed in the entering fluid piping. This is a thermal-disper-

sion flow switch with no field adjustments. The switch is set

for approximately 0.5 ft/sec of flow. The sensor tip houses two

thermistors and a heater element. One thermistor is located in

the sensor tip, closest to the flowing fluid. This thermistor is

used to detect changes in the flow velocity of the liquid. The

second thermistor is bonded to the cylindrical wall and is af-

fected only by changes in the temperature of the liquid. The

thermistors are positioned to be in close contact with the wall

of the sensor probe and, at the same time, to be kept separated

from each other within the confines of the probe.

In order to sense flow, it is necessary to heat one of the

thermistors in the probe. When power is applied, the tip of the

probe is heated. As the fluid starts to flow, heat will be carried

away from the sensor tip. Cooling of the first thermistor is a

function of how fast heat is conducted away by the flowing

liquid.

The difference in temperature between the two thermistors

provides a measurement of fluid velocity past the sensor probe.

When fluid velocity is high, more heat will be carried away

from the heated thermistor and the temperature differential will

be small. As fluid velocity decreases, less heat will be taken

from the heated thermistor and there will be an increase in tem-

perature differential.

When unit flow rate is above the minimum flow rate, then

the output is switched on, sending 24 vac to the MBB to prove

flow has been established.

For recommended maintenance, check the sensor tip for

build-up every 6 months. Clean the tip with a soft cloth. If

necessary, build-up (e.g., lime) can be removed with a common

vinegar cleansing agent.

The flow sensor cable is provided with (3) LEDs that indi-

cate if 24 vac power is present and also status of the switch

contacts. The LEDs are as follows:

• Green LED ON – 24 vac present

• One Yellow LED ON – Flow sensor switch OPEN

• Two Yellow LED ON – Flow sensor switch CLOSED

If nuisance trips of the sensor are occurring, follow the

steps below to correct the situation:

1. Check to confirm that the factory installed strainer is

clean. Use the blow-down valve provided or remove the

screen and clean it. For the case of VFD controlled

pumps, ensure that the minimum speed setting has not

been changed.

2. Measure the pressure drop across the cooler or cooler/

pump system and compare this to the system requirements.

3. Verify that cable connections at the switch and at the ter-

minal block are secure.

4. For factory-installed hydronic systems, verify that:

• All air has been purged from the system.

• Circuit setter balance valve has been correctly set.

5. Pump impeller has been improperly trimmed and is not

providing sufficient flow.

6. Wrong pump motor rotation. Pump must rotate clockwise

when viewed from motor end of pump.

Strainer — Periodic factory-installed strainer cleaning is

required. Pressure drop across strainer in excess of 3 psi

(21 kPa) indicates the need for cleaning. Normal (clean) pres-

sure drop is approximately 1 psi (6.9 kPa). Open the factory-

installed blowdown valve to clean the strainer. If required, shut

the chiller down and remove the strainer screen to clean. When

strainer has been cleaned, enter ‘YES’ for Strainer Mainte-

nance Done (Run Status



S.T.MN).

Condenser Fans — Each fan is supported by a formed

wire mount bolted to a fan deck and covered with a wire guard.

METAL FANS — The exposed end of fan motor shaft is pro-

tected from weather by grease and a rubber boot. If fan motor

must be removed for service or replacement, be sure to re-

grease fan shaft and reinstall fan guard. For proper perfor-

mance with the value sound fan option, fan web should be

0.32 in. (8 mm) below top of orifice on the fan deck to top of

the fan hub. (See Fig. 31.) Tighten set screws to 15 ± 1 ft-lb

(20 ± 1.3 N-m).

IMPORTANT: Check for proper fan rotation (clockwise

when viewed from above). If necessary, switch any

2 power leads to reverse fan rotation.

5/8 in. HEX

6" MINIMUM

CLEARANCE FOR

THERMISTOR

REMOVAL

1/4-18 NPT

Fig. 28 — Thermistor Well

Table 33 — 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop

(Voltage Drop for EWT, LWT, RGT, and OAT)

TEMP

(F)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

–25 3.699 98,010

–24 3.689 94,707

–23 3.679 91,522

–22 3.668 88,449

–21 3.658 85,486

–20 3.647 82,627

–19 3.636 79,871

–18 3.624 77,212

–17 3.613 74,648

–16 3.601 72,175

–15 3.588 69,790

–14 3.576 67,490

–13 3.563 65,272

–12 3.550 63,133

–11 3.536 61,070

–10 3.523 59,081

–9 3.509 57,162

–8 3.494 55,311

–7 3.480 53,526

–6 3.465 51,804

–5 3.450 50,143

–4 3.434 48,541

–3 3.418 46,996

–2 3.402 45,505

–1 3.386 44,066

03.369 42,679

13.352 41,339

23.335 40,047

33.317 38,800

43.299 37,596

53.281 36,435

63.262 35,313

73.243 34,231

83.224 33,185

93.205 32,176

10 3.185 31,202

11 3.165 30,260

12 3.145 29,351

13 3.124 28,473

14 3.103 27,624

15 3.082 26,804

16 3.060 26,011

17 3.038 25,245

18 3.016 24,505

19 2.994 23,789

20 2.972 23,096

21 2.949 22,427

22 2.926 21,779

23 2.903 21,153

24 2.879 20,547

25 2.856 19,960

26 2.832 19,393

27 2.808 18,843

28 2.784 18,311

29 2.759 17,796

30 2.735 17,297

31 2.710 16,814

32 2.685 16,346

33 2.660 15,892

34 2.634 15,453

35 2.609 15,027

36 2.583 14,614

37 2.558 14,214

38 2.532 13,826

39 2.506 13,449

40 2.480 13,084

41 2.454 12,730

42 2.428 12,387

43 2.402 12,053

44 2.376 11,730

45 2.349 11,416

46 2.323 11,112

47 2.296 10,816

48 2.270 10,529

49 2.244 10,250

50 2.217 9,979

51 2.191 9,717

52 2.165 9,461

53 2.138 9,213

54 2.112 8,973

55 2.086 8,739

56 2.060 8,511

57 2.034 8,291

58 2.008 8,076

TEMP

(F)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

59 1.982 7,686

60 1.956 7,665

61 1.930 7,468

62 1.905 7,277

63 1.879 7,091

64 1.854 6,911

65 1.829 6,735

66 1.804 6,564

67 1.779 6,399

68 1.754 6,238

69 1.729 6,081

70 1.705 5,929

71 1.681 5,781

72 1.656 5,637

73 1.632 5,497

74 1.609 5,361

75 1.585 5,229

76 1.562 5,101

77 1.538 4,976

78 1.516 4,855

79 1.493 4,737

80 1.470 4,622

81 1.448 4,511

82 1.426 4,403

83 1.404 4,298

84 1.382 4,196

85 1.361 4,096

86 1.340 4,000

87 1.319 3,906

88 1.298 3,814

89 1.278 3,726

90 1.257 3,640

91 1.237 3,556

92 1.217 3,474

93 1.198 3,395

94 1.179 3,318

95 1.160 3,243

96 1.141 3,170

97 1.122 3,099

98 1.104 3,031

99 1.086 2,964

100 1.068 2,898

101 1.051 2,835

102 1.033 2,773

103 1.016 2,713

104 0.999 2,655

105 0.983 2,597

106 0.966 2,542

107 0.950 2,488

108 0.934 2,436

109 0.918 2,385

110 0.903 2,335

111 0.888 2,286

112 0.873 2,239

113 0.858 2,192

114 0.843 2,147

115 0.829 2,103

116 0.815 2,060

117 0.801 2,018

118 0.787 1,977

119 0.774 1,937

120 0.761 1,898

121 0.748 1,860

122 0.735 1,822

123 0.723 1,786

124 0.710 1,750

125 0.698 1,715

126 0.686 1,680

127 0.674 1,647

128 0.663 1,614

129 0.651 1,582

130 0.640 1,550

131 0.629 1,519

132 0.618 1,489

133 0.608 1,459

134 0.597 1,430

135 0.587 1,401

136 0.577 1,373

137 0.567 1,345

138 0.557 1,318

139 0.548 1,291

140 0.538 1,265

141 0.529 1,240

142 0.520 1,214

TEMP

(F)

VOLTAG E

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

143 0.511 1,190

144 0.502 1,165

145 0.494 1,141

146 0.485 1,118

147 0.477 1,095

148 0.469 1,072

149 0.461 1,050

150 0.453 1,029

151 0.445 1,007

152 0.438 986

153 0.430 965

154 0.423 945

155 0.416 925

156 0.408 906

157 0.402 887

158 0.395 868

159 0.388 850

160 0.381 832

161 0.375 815

162 0.369 798

163 0.362 782

164 0.356 765

165 0.350 750

166 0.344 734

167 0.339 719

168 0.333 705

169 0.327 690

170 0.322 677

171 0.317 663

172 0.311 650

173 0.306 638

174 0.301 626

175 0.296 614

176 0.291 602

177 0.286 591

178 0.282 581

179 0.277 570

180 0.272 561

181 0.268 551

182 0.264 542

183 0.259 533

184 0.255 524

185 0.251 516

186 0.247 508

187 0.243 501

188 0.239 494

189 0.235 487

190 0.231 480

191 0.228 473

192 0.224 467

193 0.220 461

194 0.217 456

195 0.213 450

196 0.210 445

197 0.206 439

198 0.203 434

199 0.200 429

200 0.197 424

201 0.194 419

202 0.191 415

203 0.188 410

204 0.185 405

205 0.182 401

206 0.179 396

207 0.176 391

208 0.173 386

209 0.171 382

210 0.168 377

211 0.165 372

212 0.163 367

213 0.160 361

214 0.158 356

215 0.155 350

216 0.153 344

217 0.151 338

218 0.148 332

219 0.146 325

220 0.144 318

221 0.142 311

222 0.140 304

223 0.138 297

224 0.135 289

225 0.133 282

Table 34 — 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°C) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop

(Voltage Drop for EWT, LWT, RGT, and OAT)

TEMP

(C)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

–32 3.705 100,260

–31 3.687 94,165

–30 3.668 88,480

–29 3.649 83,170

–28 3.629 78,125

–27 3.608 73,580

–26 3.586 69,250

–25 3.563 65,205

–24 3.539 61,420

–23 3.514 57,875

–22 3.489 54,555

–21 3.462 51,450

–20 3.434 48,536

–19 3.406 45,807

–18 3.376 43,247

–17 3.345 40,845

–16 3.313 38,592

–15 3.281 38,476

–14 3.247 34,489

–13 3.212 32,621

–12 3.177 30,866

–11 3.140 29,216

–10 3.103 27,633

–9 3.065 26,202

–8 3.025 24,827

–7 2.985 23,532

–6 2.945 22,313

–5 2.903 21,163

–4 2.860 20,079

–3 2.817 19,058

–2 2.774 18,094

–1 2.730 17,184

02.685 16,325

12.639 15,515

22.593 14,749

32.547 14,026

42.500 13,342

52.454 12,696

62.407 12,085

72.360 11,506

82.312 10,959

92.265 10,441

10 2.217 9,949

11 2.170 9,485

12 2.123 9,044

13 2.076 8,627

14 2.029 8,231

TEMP

(C)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

15 1.982 7,855

16 1.935 7,499

17 1.889 7,161

18 1.844 6,840

19 1.799 6,536

20 1.754 6,246

21 1.710 5,971

22 1.666 5,710

23 1.623 5,461

24 1.580 5,225

25 1.538 5,000

26 1.497 4,786

27 1.457 4,583

28 1.417 4,389

29 1.378 4,204

30 1.340 4,028

31 1.302 3,861

32 1.265 3,701

33 1.229 3,549

34 1.194 3,404

35 1.160 3,266

36 1.126 3,134

37 1.093 3,008

38 1.061 2,888

39 1.030 2,773

40 0.999 2,663

41 0.969 2,559

42 0.940 2,459

43 0.912 2,363

44 0.885 2,272

45 0.858 2,184

46 0.832 2,101

47 0.807 2,021

48 0.782 1,944

49 0.758 1,871

50 0.735 1,801

51 0.713 1,734

52 0.691 1,670

53 0.669 1,609

54 0.649 1,550

55 0.629 1,493

56 0.610 1,439

57 0.591 1,387

58 0.573 1,337

59 0.555 1,290

60 0.538 1,244

61 0.522 1,200

TEMP

(C)

VOLTAG E

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

62 0.506 1,158

63 0.490 1,118

64 0.475 1,079

65 0.461 1,041

66 0.447 1,006

67 0.433 971

68 0.420 938

69 0.407 906

70 0.395 876

71 0.383 836

72 0.371 805

73 0.360 775

74 0.349 747

75 0.339 719

76 0.329 693

77 0.319 669

78 0.309 645

79 0.300 623

80 0.291 602

81 0.283 583

82 0.274 564

83 0.266 547

84 0.258 531

85 0.251 516

86 0.244 502

87 0.237 489

88 0.230 477

89 0.223 466

90 0.217 456

91 0.211 446

92 0.204 436

93 0.199 427

94 0.193 419

95 0.188 410

96 0.182 402

97 0.177 393

98 0.172 385

99 0.168 376

100 0.163 367

101 0.158 357

102 0.154 346

103 0.150 335

104 0.146 324

105 0.142 312

106 0.138 299

107 0.134 285

Table 35 — 10K Thermistor Temperature (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop

(For SPT)

TEMP

(F)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

–25 4.758 196,453

–24 4.750 189,692

–23 4.741 183,300

–22 4.733 177,000

–21 4.724 171,079

–20 4.715 165,238

–19 4.705 159,717

–18 4.696 154,344

–17 4.686 149,194

–16 4.676 144,250

–15 4.665 139,443

–14 4.655 134,891

–13 4.644 130,402

–12 4.633 126,183

–11 4.621 122,018

–10 4.609 118,076

–9 4.597 114,236

–8 4.585 110,549

–7 4.572 107,006

–6 4.560 103,558

–5 4.546 100,287

–4 4.533 97,060

–3 4.519 94,020

–2 4.505 91,019

–1 4.490 88,171

04.476 85,396

14.461 82,729

24.445 80,162

34.429 77,662

44.413 75,286

54.397 72,940

64.380 70,727

74.363 68,542

84.346 66,465

94.328 64,439

10 4.310 62,491

11 4.292 60,612

12 4.273 58,781

13 4.254 57,039

14 4.235 55,319

15 4.215 53,693

16 4.195 52,086

17 4.174 50,557

18 4.153 49,065

19 4.132 47,627

20 4.111 46,240

21 4.089 44,888

22 4.067 43,598

23 4.044 42,324

24 4.021 41,118

25 3.998 39,926

26 3.975 38,790

27 3.951 37,681

28 3.927 36,610

29 3.903 35,577

30 3.878 34,569

31 3.853 33,606

32 3.828 32,654

33 3.802 31,752

34 3.776 30,860

35 3.750 30,009

36 3.723 29,177

37 3.697 28,373

38 3.670 27,597

39 3.654 26,838

40 3.615 26,113

41 3.587 25,396

42 3.559 24,715

43 3.531 24,042

44 3.503 23,399

45 3.474 22,770

46 3.445 22,161

47 3.416 21,573

48 3.387 20,998

49 3.357 20,447

50 3.328 19,903

51 3.298 19,386

52 3.268 18,874

53 3.238 18,384

54 3.208 17,904

55 3.178 17,441

56 3.147 16,991

57 3.117 16,552

58 3.086 16,131

59 3.056 15,714

60 3.025 15,317

TEMP

(F)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

61 2.994 14,925

62 2.963 14,549

63 2.932 14,180

64 2.901 13,824

65 2.870 13,478

66 2.839 13,139

67 2.808 12,814

68 2.777 12,493

69 2.746 12,187

70 2.715 11,884

71 2.684 11,593

72 2.653 11,308

73 2.622 11,031

74 2.592 10,764

75 2.561 10,501

76 2.530 10,249

77 2.500 10,000

78 2.470 9,762

79 2.439 9,526

80 2.409 9,300

81 2.379 9,078

82 2.349 8,862

83 2.319 8,653

84 2.290 8,448

85 2.260 8,251

86 2.231 8,056

87 2.202 7,869

88 2.173 7,685

89 2.144 7,507

90 2.115 7,333

91 2.087 7,165

92 2.059 6,999

93 2.030 6,838

94 2.003 6,683

95 1.975 6,530

96 1.948 6,383

97 1.921 6,238

98 1.894 6,098

99 1.867 5,961

100 1.841 5,827

101 1.815 5,698

102 1.789 5,571

103 1.763 5,449

104 1.738 5,327

105 1.713 5,210

106 1.688 5,095

107 1.663 4,984

108 1.639 4,876

109 1.615 4,769

110 1.591 4,666

111 1.567 4,564

112 1.544 4,467

113 1.521 4,370

114 1.498 4,277

115 1.475 4,185

116 1.453 4,096

117 1.431 4,008

118 1.409 3,923

119 1.387 3,840

120 1.366 3,759

121 1.345 3,681

122 1.324 3,603

123 1.304 3,529

124 1.284 3,455

125 1.264 3,383

126 1.244 3,313

127 1.225 3,244

128 1.206 3,178

129 1.187 3,112

130 1.168 3,049

131 1.150 2,986

132 1.132 2,926

133 1.114 2,866

134 1.096 2,809

135 1.079 2,752

136 1.062 2,697

137 1.045 2,643

138 1.028 2,590

139 1.012 2,539

140 0.996 2,488

141 0.980 2,439

142 0.965 2,391

143 0.949 2,343

144 0.934 2,297

145 0.919 2,253

146 0.905 2,209

TEMP

(F)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

147 0.890 2,166

148 0.876 2,124

149 0.862 2,083

150 0.848 2,043

151 0.835 2,003

152 0.821 1,966

153 0.808 1,928

154 0.795 1,891

155 0.782 1,855

156 0.770 1,820

157 0.758 1,786

158 0.745 1,752

159 0.733 1,719

160 0.722 1,687

161 0.710 1,656

162 0.699 1,625

163 0.687 1,594

164 0.676 1,565

165 0.666 1,536

166 0.655 1,508

167 0.645 1,480

168 0.634 1,453

169 0.624 1,426

170 0.614 1,400

171 0.604 1,375

172 0.595 1,350

173 0.585 1,326

174 0.576 1,302

175 0.567 1,278

176 0.558 1,255

177 0.549 1,233

178 0.540 1,211

179 0.532 1,190

180 0.523 1,169

181 0.515 1,148

182 0.507 1,128

183 0.499 1,108

184 0.491 1,089

185 0.483 1,070

186 0.476 1,052

187 0.468 1,033

188 0.461 1,016

189 0.454 998

190 0.447 981

191 0.440 964

192 0.433 947

193 0.426 931

194 0.419 915

195 0.413 900

196 0.407 885

197 0.400 870

198 0.394 855

199 0.388 841

200 0.382 827

201 0.376 814

202 0.370 800

203 0.365 787

204 0.359 774

205 0.354 762

206 0.349 749

207 0.343 737

208 0.338 725

209 0.333 714

210 0.328 702

211 0.323 691

212 0.318 680

213 0.314 670

214 0.309 659

215 0.305 649

216 0.300 639

217 0.296 629

218 0.292 620

219 0.288 610

220 0.284 601

221 0.279 592

222 0.275 583

223 0.272 574

224 0.268 566

225 0.264 557

Table 36 — 10K Thermistor Temperature (°C) vs. Resistance/Voltage Drop

(For SPT)

Table 37 — 86K Thermistor vs Resistance (DTT)

TEMP

(C)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

–32 4.762 200,510

–31 4.748 188,340

–30 4.733 177,000

–29 4.716 166,342

–28 4.700 156,404

–27 4.682 147,134

–26 4.663 138,482

–25 4.644 130,402

–24 4.624 122,807

–23 4.602 115,710

–22 4.580 109,075

–21 4.557 102,868

–20 4.533 97,060

–19 4.508 91,588

–18 4.482 86,463

–17 4.455 81,662

–16 4.426 77,162

–15 4.397 72,940

–14 4.367 68,957

–13 4.335 65,219

–12 4.303 61,711

–11 4.269 58,415

–10 4.235 55,319

–9 4.199 52,392

–8 4.162 49,640

–7 4.124 47,052

–6 4.085 44,617

–5 4.044 42,324

–4 4.003 40,153

–3 3.961 38,109

–2 3.917 36,182

–1 3.873 34,367

03.828 32,654

13.781 31,030

23.734 29,498

33.686 28,052

43.637 26,686

53.587 25,396

63.537 24,171

73.485 23,013

83.433 21,918

93.381 20,883

10 3.328 19,903

11 3.274 18,972

12 3.220 18,090

13 3.165 17,255

14 3.111 16,464

TEMP

(C)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

15 3.056 15,714

16 3.000 15,000

17 2.944 14,323

18 2.889 13,681

19 2.833 13,071

20 2.777 12,493

21 2.721 11,942

22 2.666 11,418

23 2.610 10,921

24 2.555 10,449

25 2.500 10,000

26 2.445 9,571

27 2.391 9,164

28 2.337 8,776

29 2.284 8,407

30 2.231 8,056

31 2.178 7,720

32 2.127 7,401

33 2.075 7,096

34 2.025 6,806

35 1.975 6,530

36 1.926 6,266

37 1.878 6,014

38 1.830 5,774

39 1.784 5,546

40 1.738 5,327

41 1.692 5,117

42 1.648 4,918

43 1.605 4,727

44 1.562 4,544

45 1.521 4,370

46 1.480 4,203

47 1.439 4,042

48 1.400 3,889

49 1.362 3,743

50 1.324 3,603

51 1.288 3,469

52 1.252 3,340

53 1.217 3,217

54 1.183 3,099

55 1.150 2,986

56 1.117 2,878

57 1.086 2,774

58 1.055 2,675

59 1.025 2,579

60 0.996 2,488

61 0.968 2,400

TEMP

(C)

VOLTAGE

DROP

(V)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

62 0.940 2,315

63 0.913 2,235

64 0.887 2,157

65 0.862 2,083

66 0.837 2,011

67 0.813 1,943

68 0.790 1,876

69 0.767 1,813

70 0.745 1,752

71 0.724 1,693

72 0.703 1,637

73 0.683 1,582

74 0.663 1,530

75 0.645 1,480

76 0.626 1,431

77 0.608 1,385

78 0.591 1,340

79 0.574 1,297

80 0.558 1,255

81 0.542 1,215

82 0.527 1,177

83 0.512 1,140

84 0.497 1,104

85 0.483 1,070

86 0.470 1,037

87 0.457 1,005

88 0.444 974

89 0.431 944

90 0.419 915

91 0.408 889

92 0.396 861

93 0.386 836

94 0.375 811

95 0.365 787

96 0.355 764

97 0.345 742

98 0.336 721

99 0.327 700

100 0.318 680

101 0.310 661

102 0.302 643

103 0.294 626

104 0.287 609

105 0.279 592

106 0.272 576

107 0.265 561

TEMP

(C)

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

-40 -40 2,889,600

-35 -31 2,087,220

-30 -22 1,522,200

-25 -13 1,121,440

-20 -4 834,720

-15 5 627,280

-10 14 475,740

-5 23 363,990

0 32 280,820

5 41 218,410

10 50 171,170

15 59 135,140

20 68 107,440

25 77 86,000

30 86 69,280

35 95 56,160

40 104 45,810

45 113 37,580

50 122 30,990

55 131 25,680

60 140 21,400

70 158 15,070

TEMP

(C)

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

75 167 12,730

80 176 10,790

85 185 9,200

90 194 7,870

95 203 6,770

100 212 5,850

105 221 5,090

110 230 4,450

115 239 3,870

120 248 3,350

125 257 2,920

130 266 2,580

135 275 2,280

140 284 2,020

145 293 1,800

150 302 1,590

155 311 1,390

160 320 1,250

165 329 1,120

170 338 1,010

175 347 920

180 356 830

LOW SOUND FAN — A shroud and a wire guard provide

protection from the rotating fan. The exposed end of the fan

motor shaft is protected from weather by grease. If fan motor

must be removed for service or replacement, be sure to re-

grease fan shaft and reinstall fan guard. The fan motor has a

step in the motor shaft. For proper performance, fan should be

positioned such that it is securely seated on this step. Tighten

the bolt to 15 ± 1 ft-lb (20 ± 1.3 N·m).

Motormaster® V Controller — The Motormaster V

controller is standard on size 010 and 015 units. For other sizes,

the optional or accessory Motormaster V controller uses an in-

put signal from the AUX board. See Fig. 32. The controller is

factory configured and requires no field programming. If a situ-

ation arises where the drive does not function properly, the in-

formation provided below and in Table 38 can be used to trou-

bleshoot the drive.

GENERAL OPERATION — The speed varies in proportion

to a 4 to 20 mA signal produced by the ComfortLink™ con-

trols. The MMV output speed is displayed in Hz.

The ComfortLink controls must be configured for MMV

operation in order for it to operate. This is configured under the

Configuration menu (Configuration



MMR.S) and

BLK

RED

LVT

T-55

ACCSY

SEN

OAT

BLU

BLK

RED RGTB

BLK

RED RGTA

SPTB

DPTB

GRN

RED

BLK

GRN

RED

BLK

SPTA

DPTA

GRN

RED

BLK

GRN

RED

BLK

RED

EVAPORATOR ENTERING

FLUID TEMP

BLK

RED EVAPORATOR LEAVING

FLUID TEMP

SPACE TEMPERATURE

ACCESSORY OR

DUAL CHILLER LWT

J12 T55

Fig. 29 — Thermistor Connections to

Main Base Board, J8 Connector

LEGEND

ACCSY — Accessory

DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer

LWT — Leaving Water Temperature Sensor

LVT — Low Voltage Terminal

OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor

RGT — Return Gas Temperature Sensor

SEN — Sensor Terminal Block

SPT — Space Temperature Sensor

a30-4975

Fig. 30 — Chilled Water Flow Switch

a30-499

Fig. 31 — Mounted Fan Position

a30-4976

IMPORTANT: Check for proper fan rotation (counter-

clockwise when viewed from above). If necessary, switch

any 2 power leads to reverse fan rotation.

WARNING

Hazard of electrical shock. Wait three minutes after discon-

necting incoming power before servicing drive. Capacitors

retain charge after power is removed. Drive assembly

includes externally mounted current limiting resistors. Use

extreme caution when servicing the drive. Failure to com-

ply could result in possible personal injury.

WARNING

When configured as shown in this literature, this equip-

ment is designed to start when it receives line power.

Ensure that all personnel are clear of fans and guards are

installed before applying power. Failure to comply could

result in possible personal injury.

CAUTION

DO NOT connect incoming AC power to output terminals

T1, T2, and T3. Severe damage to the drive will result. Do

not continuously cycle input power to the drive more than

once every two minutes. Damage to the drive will result.

CAUTION

If input power has not been applied to the drive for a period

of time exceeding three years (due to storage, etc.), the

electrolytic DC bus capacitors within the drive can change

internally, resulting in excessive leakage current. This can

result in premature failure of the capacitors if the drive is

operated after such a long period of inactivity or storage. In

order to reform the capacitors and prepare the drive for

operation after a long period of inactivity, apply input

power to the drive for 8 hours prior to actually operating

the motor. Before attempting to operate the drive, motor,

and driven equipment, be sure all procedures pertaining to

installation and wiring have been properly followed. Fail-

ure to comply could result in equipment damage.

selecting “YES”. This configuration menu also contains the

gains and minimum speed for the Motormaster control logic.

CONFIGURATION — The MMV is configured for 1 of 12

operation modes based on the inputs to the control terminal

block. The 30RAP units use operating modes 5-8. In these con-

figurations, the MMV follows a 4 to 20 mA speed reference

signal present on terminals 25 (+) and 2 (-). One additional

jumper is required to configure the drive for 50/60 Hz opera-

tion and input voltage. See Table 39 for proper inputs. Once the

drive is powered, it will change to the mode selected according

to the inputs. See Fig. 33.

DRIVE PROGRAMMING

To enter password and change program values:

1. Press Mode.

2. Upper right decimal point blinks.

3. Display reads “00”. To enter the PROGRAM mode to ac-

cess the parameters, press the Mode button. This will ac-

tivate the PASSWORD prompt (if the password has not

been disabled). The display will read “00” and the upper

right-hand decimal point will be blinking. (See Fig. 33.)

4. Use the and buttons to scroll to the password

value (the factory default password is “1111”) and press

the Mode button. Once the correct password value is

entered, the display will read “P01”, which indicates that

the PROGRAM mode has been accessed at the beginning

of the parameter menu (P01 is the first parameter).

NOTE: If the display flashes “Er”, the password was incorrect,

and the process to enter the password must be repeated.

5. Press Mode to display present parameter number.

Upper right decimal point blinks.

Use the and buttons to scroll to the desired

parameter number.

Once the desired parameter number is found, press the

Mode button to display the present parameter setting. The up-

per right-hand decimal point will begin blinking, indicating

that the present parameter setting is being displayed, and that it

can be changed by using the up and down buttons. Use

and to change setting. Press Mode to store new setting.

Pressing the Mode will store the new setting and also exit

the PROGRAM mode. To change another parameter, press the

Mode key again to re-enter the PROGRAM mode (the param-

eter menu will be accessed at the parameter that was last

viewed or changed before exiting). If the Mode key is pressed

within two minutes of exiting the PROGRAM mode, the pass-

word is not required to access the parameters. After two min-

utes, the password must be entered in order to access the pa-

rameters again.

To change password: first enter the current password then

change parameter P44 to the desired password.

To disable automatic control mode and enter manual speed

control mode:

1. Change P05 to ‘01- keypad’.

2. Push UP and DOWN arrow key to set manual speed.

3. Set P05 to ‘04 - 4-20mA control’ to restore 4 to 20 mA

control.

EPM CHIP — The drive uses a electronic programming mod-

ule (EPM) chip to store the program parameters. This is an

EEPROM memory chip and is accessible from the front of the

VFD. It should not be removed with power applied to the

VFD.

LOSS OF CCN COMMUNICATIONS — Carrier Comfort

Network® (CCN) communications with external control

systems can be affected by high frequency electrical noise gen-

erated by the Motormaster V control. Ensure unit is well

grounded to eliminate ground currents along communication

lines.

If communications are lost only while Motormaster V con-

trol is in operation, order a signal isolator (CEAS420876-2)

and power supplies (CEAS221045-01, 2 required) for the CCN

communication line.

Fault Codes — The drive is programmed to automatically re-

start after a fault and will attempt to restart three times after a

fault (the drive will not restart after CF, cF, GF, F1, F2-F9, or

Fo faults). If all three restart attempts are unsuccessful, the

drive will trip into FAULT LOCKOUT (LC), which requires a

manual reset.

Manual Reset — If fault condition has been removed, cycle

power to the chiller to reset the VFD.

Troubleshooting — Troubleshooting the Motormaster® V

control requires a combination of observing system operation

and VFD information. The drive provides 2 kinds of trouble-

shooting modes: a status matrix using the 3-digit display

(P57, P58) and real time monitoring of key inputs and outputs.

The collective group is displayed through parameters

50-60 and all values are read-only.

• P50: FAULT HISTORY — Last 8 faults

• P51: SOFTWARE version

•P52: DC BUS VOLTAGE — in percent of nominal.

Usually rated input voltage x 1.4

•P53: MOTOR VOLAGE — in percent of rated output

voltage

•P54: LOAD — in percent of drives rated output current

rating

•P55: VDC INPUT — in percent of maximum input:

100 will indicate full scale which is 5 v

•P56: 4-20 mA INPUT — in percent of maximum input.

20% = 4 mA, 100% = 20 mA

Manual Starter Trip — If the VFD manual starter (MS-FC-

HS, MS-FC-A1 or MS-FC-B1 depending on model) trips,

locate the inrush current protectors (3 round black disks per

motor) and verify their resistance. For units operating at 208 v

or 230 v, these devices should measure approximately 7 ohms.

For all other voltages, they should measure approximately

20 ohms. Check value with mating plug disconnected, power

to chiller off and at ambient temperature (not hot immediately

after stopping VFD). These are standard resistances at 77 F

(25 C). Resistance values decrease at higher temperatures and

increase at lower temperatures.

REPLACING DEFECTIVE MODULES — The Comfort-

Link™ replacement modules are shown in Table 40. If the main

base board (MBB) has been replaced, verify that all configura-

tion data is correct. Follow the Configuration mode table and

verify that all items under sub-modes UNIT, OPT1 and OPT2

are correct. Any additional field-installed accessories or op-

tions (RSET, SLCT sub-modes) should also be verified as well

as any specific time and maintenance schedules.

Refer to the Start-Up Checklist for 30RAP Liquid Chillers

(completed at time of original start-up) found in the job folder.

This information is needed later in this procedure. If the check-

list does not exist, fill out the current information in the Config-

uration mode on a new checklist. Tailor the various options and

configurations as needed for this particular installation.

CAUTION

It is strongly recommended that the user NOT change any

programming without consulting Carrier service personnel.

Unit damage may occur from improper programming.

Fig. 32 — Typical Motormaster Wiring

CONFIGURATION TABLE

*208-v can run in mode 5 or 6.

MODE NOMINAL VOLTAGE Hz CONTROL INPUT

(PINS 25, 2) START JUMPER

5208/230/460/575* 60 External control 4-20 mA TB1-TB2

6208/380 60 External control 4-20 mA TB13A-TB2

LEGEND

AUX — Auxiliary

FB — Fuse Block

MM — Motormaster

OFM — Outdoor Fan Motor

TB — Terminal Block

LOW AMBIENT OPERATION (MOTORMASTER V) FIOP/ACCESSORY

* MM SIGNAL CONNECTION

VOLTAGE ZHBT

208/230/460/575 061

380 06A31

GRN/YEL

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

L1 T1

L2 T2

L3 T3

MMR

11 14

2YEL

VIO

MM-A

FC2

11 21

12 22

13 23 GRN/YEL

OFM2

BLK-1

BLK-2

BLK-3

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

RED FROM

AUX-J4

OFM1

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLK

YEL

BLU

FB3

HIGH SCCR

ONLY

FB1

BLK

YEL

COOLER/PUMP

HEATERS

(208/230,230V)

BLK

WHT

COOLER/PUMP

HEATERS

(380,460,575V)

BLK

WHT

FB2

240 1/4W

CHC

a30-4977

L1 L2 L3

Mode

DANGER

T1 T2 T3B+

B-

DISPLAY

BUTTONS

Mode

MMV

TERMINAL

BLOCK

EPM

Fig. 33 — Motormaster® V Mode Buttons and Mode Display

Table 38 — Fault Codes

LEGEND

FAULT CODE DESCRIPTION SOLUTION

AF High Temperature Fault: Ambient temperature is too high;

Cooling fan has failed (if equipped).

Check cooling fan operation

CF Control Fault: A blank EPM, or an EPM with corrupted data

has been installed.

Perform a factory reset using Parameter 48 —

PROGRAM SELECTION.

cF Incompatibility Fault: An EPM with an incompatible parame-

ter version has been installed.

Either remove the EPM or perform a factory

reset (Parameter 48) to change the parameter

version of the EPM to match the parameter

version of the drive.

CL CURRENT LIMIT: The output current has exceeded the

CURRENT LIMIT setting (Parameter 25) and the drive is

reducing the output frequency to reduce the output current.

If the drive remains in CURRENT LIMIT too long, it can trip

into a CURRENT OVERLOAD fault (PF).

Check for loose electrical connections.

Check for faulty condenser fan motor.

Check Parameter P25 from Table 39 is set

correctly.

GF Data Fault: User data and OEM defaults in the EPM are

corrupted.

Restore factory defaults P48, see section

above. If that does not work, replace EPM.

HF High DC Bus Voltage Fault: Line voltage is too high; Decel-

eration rate is too fast; Overhauling load.

Check line voltage — set P01 appropriately

JF Serial Fault: The watchdog timer has timed out, indicating

that the serial link has been lost.

Check serial connection (computer)

Check settings for PXX.

Check settings in communication software to

match PXX.

LF Low DC Bus Voltage Fault: Line voltage is too low. Check line voltage — set P01 appropriately

OF Output Transistor Fault: Phase to phase or phase to ground

short circuit on the output; Failed output transistor; Boost

settings are too high; Acceleration rate is too fast.

Reduce boost or increase acceleration values.

If unsuccessful, replace drive.

PF Current Overload Fault: VFD is undersized for the applica-

tion; Mechanical problem with the driven equipment.

Check line voltage — set P01 appropriately

Check for dirty coils

Check for motor bearing failure

SF Single-phase Fault: Single-phase input power has been

applied to a three-phase drive.

Check input power phasing

F1 EPM Fault: The EPM is missing or damaged.

F2-F9, Fo Internal Faults: The control board has sensed a problem Consult factory

Drive display = 60.0 even though it

is cold outside and it should be run-

ning slower

Feedback signal is above set point Check for proper set point

Check liquid line pressure

Drive display = ‘---’ even though

drive should be running

Start jumper is missing Replace start jumper. See section above

Drive display = 8.0 even though fan

should be running faster

Feedback signal is below set point and fan is at minimum

speed

Check for proper set point

Check liquid line pressure

VFD flashes 57 and LCS Feedback or speed signal lost. Drive will operate at 57 Hz

until reset or loss of start command. Resetting requires

cycling start command (or power).

In stand alone mode: Check transducer wiring

and feedback voltage. Feedback voltage dis-

played on P-69. Pin 6 should be 5 v output.

Pin 5 (feedback) should be somewhere

between 0 and 5 v.

EPM — Electronic Programming Module

LCS — Lost Control Signal

OEM — Outside Equipment Manufacturer

VFD — Variable Frequency Drive

Table 39 — Motormaster® V Program Parameters for Operating Modes

LEGEND

PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION MODE

MODE

P01 Line Voltage: 01 = low line, 02 = high line 01 02 01 02

P02 Carrier Freq: 01 = 4 kHz, 02 = 6 kHz, 03 = 8 kHz 01 01 01 01

P03 Startup mode: flying restart 06 06 06 06

P04 Stop mode: coast to stop 01 01 01 01

P05 Standard Speed source: 01= keypad,

04=4-20mA (NO PI), 05= R22, 06=R134a 04 04 04 04

P06 TB-14 output: 01 = none 01 01 01 01

P08 TB-30 output: 01 = none 01 01 01 01

P09 TB-31 Output: 01 = none 01 01 01 01

P10 TB-13A function sel: 01 = none 01 01 01 01

P11 TB-13B function sel: 01 = none 01 01 01 01

P12 TB-13C function sel: 01 = none 01 01 01 01

P13 TB-15 output: 01 = none 01 01 01 01

P14 Control: 01 = Terminal strip 01 01 01 01

P15 Serial link: 02 = enabled 9600,8,N,2 with timer 02 02 02 02

P16 Units editing: 02 = whole units 02 02 02 02

P17 Rotation: 01 = forward only, 03 = reverse only 01 01 01 01

P19 Acceleration time: 10 sec 10 10 10 10

P20 Deceleration time: 10 sec 10 10 10 10

P21 DC brake time: 0 0 0 0 0

P22 DC BRAKE VOLTAGE 0% 0 0 0 0

P23 Min freq = 8 Hz ~ 100 – 160 rpm 8 8 8 8

P24 Max freq 60 60 50 50

P25 Current limit: (%) 125 110 125 110

P26 Motor overload: 100 100 100 100 100

P27 Base freq: 60 or 50 Hz 60 60 50 50

P28 Fixed boost: 0.5% at low frequencies 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

P29 Accel boost: 0% 0 0 0 0

P30 Slip compensation: 0% 0 0 0 0

P31 Preset spd #1: speed if loss of control signal 57 57 47 47

P32 Preset spd #2: 0 0 0 0 0

P33 Preset spd #3: 0 0 0 0 0

P34 Preset spd 4 default — R22 set point.

TB12-2 open 18.0 18.0 18.0 18.0

P35 Preset spd 5 default — R134a set point.

TB12-2 closed 12.6 12.6 12.6 12.6

P36 Preset spd 6 default 0 0 0 0

P37 Preset spd 7 default 0 0 0 0

P38 Skip bandwidth 0 0 0 0

P39 Speed scaling 0 0 0 0

P40 Frequency scaling 50 or 60 Hz 60 60 50 50

P41 Load scaling: default (not used so NA) 200 200 200 200

P42 Accel/decel #2: default (not used so NA) 60 60 60 60

P43 Serial address 1 1 1 1

P44 Password:111 111 111 111 111

P45 Speed at min signal: 8 Hz; used when PID

mode is disabled and 4-20mA input is at 4 mA 8888

P46 Speed at max feedback: 60 or 50 Hz. Used

when PID disabled and 4-20mA input is at 20 mA 60 60 50 50

P47 Clear history? 01 = maintain. (set to 02 to clear) 01 01 01 01

P48 Program selection: Program 1 – 12 05 06 07 08

P61 PI Mode: 05= reverse, 0-5V, 01 = no PID 01 01 01 01

P62 Min feedback = 0 (0V *10) 0 0 0 0

P63 Max feedback = 50 (5V * 10) 50 50 50 50

P64 Proportional gain = 4% 4 4 4 4

P65 Integral gain = .2 .2 .2 .2 .2

P66 PI acell/decel (set point change filter) = 5 5 5 5 5

P67 Min alarm 0 0 0 0

P68 Max alarm 0 0 0 0

NA — Not Applicable

PID — Proportional Integral Derivative

TB — Terminal Block

1. Check that all power to unit is off. Carefully disconnect

all wires from the defective module by unplugging its

connectors.

2. Remove the defective module by removing its mounting

screws with a Phillips screwdriver, and removing the

module from the control box. Save the screws later use.

3. Verify that the instance jumper (MBB) or address switch-

es (all other modules) exactly match the settings of the

defective module.

NOTE: Handle boards by mounting standoffs only to

avoid electrostatic discharge.

4. Package the defective module in the carton of the new

module for return to Carrier.

5. Mount the new module in the unit’s control box using a

Phillips screwdriver and the screws saved in Step 2.

6. Reinstall all module connectors. For accessory Navigator

replacement, make sure the plug is installed at TB3 in the

LEN connector.

7. Carefully check all wiring connections before restoring

power.

8. Verify the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch

is in the OFF position.

9. Restore control power. Verify that all module red LEDs

blink in unison. Verify that all green LEDs are blinking

and that the scrolling marquee or Navigator™ display is

communicating correctly.

10. Verify all configuration information, settings, set points

and schedules. Return the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE

CONTACT switch to its previous position.

Table 40 — Replacement Modules

Hydronic Package — If the unit is equipped with a

factory-installed hydronic package, consult the information be-

low for proper maintenance and service. In addition to this

information, each factory-installed hydronic package is sup-

plied with a packet of information supplied by the manufactur-

er, Bell & Gossett. Carrier Corporation strongly recommends

that this information be thoroughly reviewed prior to operation

of the chiller.

PUMP PERFORMANCE CHECK — The factory-installed

pumps in the 30RAP units are shipped with a single impeller

size available for that pump. The pump was selected based on

the flow and head requirements as provided to Carrier. It is not

uncommon for actual pump duty to be different than what was

anticipated at time of selection. In many cases, it may be desir-

able to make some field modifications to obtain optimum

pump performance.

Before any pump modifications are made, it is recommend-

ed that actual pump performance be verified and compared to

the applicable pump curve. See base unit installation instruc-

tions. This can be done in a variety of ways:

1. If pump impeller diameter is known:

a. Connect a differential pressure gage across the

pump at the ports provided on the pump volutes.

b. Read GPM from applicable impeller curve.

2. If pump impeller diameter is not known:

If pump impeller diameter has been trimmed and the size

is not known, it is necessary to determine which impeller

curve to read.

The easiest way to confirm pump performance is to

“dead-head” the pump and read the differential pressure

across the pressure ports on the pump. “Dead-heading”

can be done by shutting the circuit setter valve on the dis-

charge side of the pump.

NOTE: Although not all pumps can be safely “dead-

headed”, centrifugal pumps (such as on the 30RAP units)

can be “dead-headed” for short amounts of time. It is rec-

ommended to keep the time short due to excessive heat

build-up in the pump.

Since the “dead-head” condition is a no-flow condition,

the head will correspond to the intersection of an impel-

ler curve with the vertical axis of the pump chart. The

correct impeller diameter is that which corresponds to the

measured head.

3. Once the impeller diameter is known, proceed as in

Step 1.

4. Water flow rate can be determined by using a differential

pressure gage with the Bell & Gossett circuit setter bal-

ance valve calculator. (This information is also provided

in the installation instructions.) This method will not di-

rectly measure pressure differential seen by the pump, but

can be used to “double-check” the pump measurement.

5. Verify that cable connections at the switch and at the ter-

minal block are secure.

6. For factory-installed hydronic system, verify that:

• All air has been purged from the system.

• Circuit setter balance valve has been correctly set.

7. Pump impeller has been improperly trimmed and is not

providing sufficient flow.

8. Wrong pump motor rotation. Pump must rotate clockwise

when viewed from motor end of pump.

PUMP MODIFICATIONS AND IMPELLER TRIMMING

— See applicable section in the Installation instructions.

RESET OF CHILLER WATER FLOW — See applicable sec-

tion in the Installation instructions.

CHANGING OF PUMP SEALS — See Bell & Gossett ser-

vice instruction manual provided with the hydronic package.

MAINTENANCE

Recommended Maintenance Schedule — The fol-

lowing are only recommended guidelines. Jobsite conditions

may dictate that maintenance schedule is performed more often

than recommended.

Routine:

For machines with e-coat condenser coils:

• Periodic clean water rinse, especially in coastal and

industrial applications.

WARNING

Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut

off all power to this equipment during installation. There

may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all discon-

nect locations to alert others not to restore power until work

is completed.

MODULE

REPLACEMENT

PART NO. (with

Software)

REPLACEMENT PART

NO. (without Software)

Main Base

Board (MBB) 30RA502134 HK50AA029

Scrolling

Marquee

Display

HK50AA031 HK50AA030

Energy

Management

Module

(EMM)

30GT515218 HK50AA028

Navigator

Display HK50AA033 N/A

EXV 30GT515217 HK50AA026

AUX 32GB500442E N/A

• Check condenser coils for debris, clean as necessary.

Every month:

• Check moisture indicating sight glass for possible refrig-

erant loss and presence of moisture.

Every 3 months (for all machines):

• Check refrigerant charge.

• Check all refrigerant joints and valves for refrigerant

leaks, repair as necessary.

• Check chilled water flow switch operation.

• Check all condenser fans for proper operation.

• Check compressor oil level.

Every 12 months (for all machines):

• Check all electrical connections, tighten as necessary.

• Inspect all contactors and relays, replace as necessary.

• Check accuracy of thermistors, replace if greater than

± 2° F (1.2° C) variance from calibrated thermometer.

• Obtain and test an oil sample. Change oil only if

necessary.

• Check to be sure that the proper concentration of anti-

freeze is present in the chilled water loop, if applicable.

• Verify that the chilled water loop is properly treated.

• Check refrigerant filter driers for excessive pressure

drop, replace as necessary.

• Check chilled water strainers, clean as necessary.

• Check cooler heater operation, if equipped.

• Check condition of condenser fan blades and that they

are securely fastened to the motor shaft.

• Perform Service Test to confirm operation of all

components.

• Check for excessive cooler approach (Leaving Chilled

Water Temperature — Saturated Suction Temperature)

which may indicate fouling. Clean cooler vessel if

necessary.

Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX) Con-

denser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning

Recommendations

Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain

proper operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination and

removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the

coil and extend the life of the unit. The following steps should

be taken to clean MCHX condenser coils:

1. Remove any foreign objects or debris attached to the

coreface or trapped within the mounting frame and

brackets.

2. Put on personal protective equipment including safety

glasses and/or face shield, waterproof clothing and

gloves. It is recommended to use full coverage clothing.

3. Start high pressure water sprayer and purge any soap or

industrial cleaners from sprayer before cleaning condens-

er coils. Only clean, potable water is authorized for clean-

ing condenser coils.

4. Clean condenser face by spraying the core steady and

uniformly from top to bottom while directing the spray

straight toward the core. Do not exceed 900 psig or 30 de-

gree angle. The nozzle must be at least 12 in. from the

core face. Reduce pressure and use caution to prevent

damage to air centers.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Complete Unit Stoppage and Restart — Possi-

ble causes for unit stoppage and reset methods are shown be-

low and in Table 41. Refer to Fig. 3-7 for component arrange-

ment and control wiring diagrams.

GENERAL POWER FAILURE — After power is restored,

restart is automatic through normal MBB start-up.

UNIT ENABLE-OFF-REMOTE CONTACT SWITCH IS

OFF — When the switch is OFF, the unit will stop immediate-

ly. Place the switch in the ENABLE position for local switch

control or in the REMOTE CONTACT position for control

through remote contact closure.

CHILLED FLUID PROOF-OF-FLOW SWITCH OPEN —

After the problem causing the loss of flow has been corrected,

reset is manual by resetting the alarm with the scrolling mar-

quee as shown in Table 42.

OPEN 24-V CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER(S) — De-

termine the cause of the failure and correct. Reset circuit break-

er(s). Restart is automatic after MBB start-up cycle is

complete.

COOLING LOAD SATISFIED — Unit shuts down when

cooling load has been satisfied. Unit restarts when required to

satisfy leaving fluid temperature set point.

THERMISTOR FAILURE — If a thermistor fails in either an

open or shorted condition, the unit will be shut down. Replace

EWT, LWT, or OAT as required. Unit restarts automatically,

but must be reset manually by resetting the alarm with the

scrolling marquee as shown in Table 42.

LOW SATURATED SUCTION — Several conditions can

lead to low saturated suction alarms and the chiller controls

have several override modes built in which will attempt to keep

the chiller from shutting down. Low fluid flow, low refrigerant

charge and plugged filter driers are the main causes for this

condition. To avoid permanent damage and potential freezing

of the system, do NOT repeatedly reset these alert and/or alarm

conditions without identifying and correcting the cause(s).

COMPRESSOR SAFETIES — The 30RAP units with Com-

fortLink™ controls include a compressor protection board that

protects the operation of each of the compressors. Each board

senses the presence or absence of current to each compressor.

If there is a command for a compressor to run and there is

no current, then one of the following safeties or conditions

have turned the compressor off:

Compressor Overcurrent — All compressors have internal

line breaks or a motor protection device located in the com-

pressor electrical box.

Compressor Short Circuit — There will not be current if the

compressor circuit breaker that provides short circuit protection

has tripped.

Compressor Motor Over Temperature — The internal line-

break or over temperature switch has opened.

CAUTION

Do not apply any chemical cleaners to MCHX condenser

coils. These cleaners can accelerate corrosion and damage

the coil.

CAUTION

Excessive water pressure will fracture the braze between

air centers and refrigerant tubes.

CAUTION

If unit stoppage occurs more than once as a result of any of

the safety devices listed, determine and correct cause

before attempting another restart.

High-Pressure Switch Trip — The high pressure switch has

opened. Below are the factory settings for the fixed high pres-

sure switch.

ASTP Protection Trip — All non-digital Copeland compres-

sors are equipped with an advanced scroll temperature protec-

tion (ASTP). A label located above the terminal box identifies

models that contain this technology. See Fig. 34.

Advanced scroll temperature protection is a form of inter-

nal discharge temperature protection that unloads the scroll

compressor when the internal temperature reaches approxi-

mately 300 F. At this temperature, an internal bi-metal disk

valve opens and causes the scroll elements to separate, which

stops compression. Suction and discharge pressures balance

while the motor continues to run. The longer the compressor

runs unloaded, the longer it must cool before the bi-metal disk

resets. See Fig. 35 for approximate reset times.

To manually reset ASTP, the compressor should be stopped

and allowed to cool. If the compressor is not stopped, the motor

will run until the motor protector trips, which occurs up to

90 minutes later. Advanced scroll temperature protection will

reset automatically before the motor protector resets, which

may take up to 2 hours.

High Discharge Gas Temperature Protection — Units

equipped with digital compressors have an additional thermis-

tor located on the discharge line, If discharge temperature ex-

ceeds 265 F (129.4 C), the digital compressor will be shut off.

Alarms will also occur if the current sensor board malfunc-

tions or is not properly connected to its assigned digital input. If

the compressor is commanded OFF and the current sensor

reads ON, an alert is generated. This will indicate that a com-

pressor contactor has failed closed. In this case, a special mode,

Compressor Stuck on Control, will be enabled and all other

compressors will be turned off. An alarm will then be enabled

to indicate that service is required. Outdoor fans will continue

to operate. The first outdoor fan stage is turned on immediately.

The other stages of fan will be turned on as required by SCT.

Alarms and Alerts — These are warnings of abnormal

or fault conditions, and may cause either one circuit or the

whole unit to shut down. They are assigned code numbers as

described in Table 42.

Automatic alarms will reset without operator intervention if

the condition corrects itself. The following method must be

used to reset manual alarms:

Before resetting any alarm, first determine the cause of the

alarm and correct it. Enter the Alarms mode indicated by the

LED on the side of the scrolling marquee display. Press

and until the sub-menu item RCRN “RESET

ALL CURRENT ALARMS” is displayed. Press .

The control will prompt the user for a password, by displaying

PASS and WORD. Press to display the default pass-

word, 1111. Press for each character. If the password

has been changed, use the arrow keys to change each individu-

al character. Toggle the display to “YES” and press .

The alarms will be reset.

30RAP UNIT

SIZE

CUTOUT CUT-IN

psig kPa psig kPa

010-060 650 4482 500 3447

Fig. 34 — Advanced Scroll Temperature

Protection Label

ENTER

Fig. 35 — Recommended Minimum Cool Down Time After Compressor is Stopped*

100

110

120

0 102030405060708090

Compressor Unloaded Run Time (Minutes)

Recommended Cooling Time

(Minutes)

*Times are approximate.

NOTE: Various factors, including high humidity, high ambient temperature,

and the presence of a sound blanket will increase cool-down times.

Table 41 — Troubleshooting

SYMPTOMS CAUSE REMEDY

Cooler Circulating Pump Does

Not Run

Power line open Reset circuit breaker.

Control fuse or circuit breaker open Check control circuit for ground or short. Reset breaker and

replace fuse.

Tripped power breaker Check the controls. Find the cause of trip and reset breaker.

Loose terminal connection Check connections.

Improperly wired controls Check wiring and rewire if necessary.

Low line voltage Check line voltage — determine location of

voltage drop and remedy deficiency.

Pump motor defective Check motor winding for open or short.

Replace compressor if necessary.

Pump seized Replace pump.

Compressor Cycles

Off on Loss of Charge

Low refrigerant charge Repair leak and recharge.

Compressor Cycles Off on Cooler

Freeze Protection

Thermistor failure Replace thermistor.

System load was reduced faster than controller could

remove stages

Unit will restart after fluid temperature rises back into the

control band. Avoid rapidly removing system load.

Compressor Shuts Down on

High-Pressure Control

High-pressure control acting erratically Replace control.

Noncondensables in system Evacuate and recharge.

Condenser dirty Clean condenser.

Fans not operating Repair or replace if defective.

System overcharged with refrigerant Reduce charge.

Unit Operates Too Long

or Continuously

Low refrigerant charge Add refrigerant.

Control contacts fused Replace control.

Partially plugged or plugged expansion valve or filter drier Clean or replace as needed.

Defective insulation Replace or repair as needed.

Damaged compressor Check compressor and replace if necessary.

Unusual or Loud System

Noises

Piping vibration Support piping as required.

Check for loose pipe connections or damaged compressor

Compressor noisy Replace compressor (worn bearings).

Check for loose compressor holddown bolts.

Compressor Loses Oil Leak in system Repair leak.

Mechanical damage (Failed seals or broken scrolls) Replace compressor.

Oil trapped in line Check piping for oil traps.

Hot Liquid Line Shortage of refrigerant due to leak Repair leak and recharge.

Frosted Liquid Line Restricted filter drier Replace filter drier.

Frosted Suction Line Expansion valve admitting excess refrigerant (note: this is a

normal condition for brine applications)

Replace valve if defective.

Stuck EXV Replace valve if defective.

Freeze-Up Improper charging Make sure a full quantity of fluid is flowing through the cooler

while charging, and suction pressure in cooler is equal to or

greater than pressure corresponding to 32 F (0° C).

System not drained for winter shutdown Recommended that system be filled with an appropriate gly-

col mixture to prevent freezing of pumps and fluid tubing.

Loose Thermistor Verify thermistors are fully inserted in wells.

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes

ALARM/

ALERT

CODE

ALARM

ALERT

DESCRIPTION

WHY WAS THIS

ALARM

GENERATED?

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

RESET

METHOD

PROBABLE

CAUSE

T051 Alert Circuit A, Compressor 1

Failure

Compressor feedback signal

does not match relay state

Compressor A1 shut

down. Manual

High-pressure switch open,

faulty CSB, loss of condenser

air, filter drier plugged, non-

condensables, operation

beyond capability.

A051 Alarm Circuit A, Compressor 1

Failure

Respective current sensor

board (CSB) feedback signal

is ON when the compressor

should be off

Unit shut down Manual Welded compressor contac-

tor, CSB wiring error.

T052 Alert Circuit A, Compressor 2

Failure

Compressor feedback signal

does not match relay state

Compressor A2 shut

down. Manual

High-pressure switch open,

faulty CSB, loss of condenser

air, filter drier plugged, non-

condensables, operation

beyond capability.

A052 Alarm Circuit A, Compressor 2

Failure

Respective current sensor

board (CSB) feedback signal

is ON when the compressor

should be off

Unit shut down Manual Welded compressor contac-

tor, CSB wiring error.

T055 Alert Circuit B, Compressor 1

Failure

Compressor feedback signal

does not match relay state

Compressor B1 shut

down. Manual

High-pressure switch open,

faulty CSB, loss of condenser

air, filter drier plugged, non-

condensables, operation

beyond capability.

A055 Alarm Circuit B, Compressor 1

Failure

Respective current sensor

board (CSB) feedback signal

is ON when the compressor

should be off

Unit shut down Manual Welded compressor contac-

tor, CSB wiring error.

T056 Alert Circuit B, Compressor 2

Failure

Compressor feedback signal

does not match relay state

Compressor B2 shut

down. Manual

High-pressure switch open,

faulty CSB, loss of condenser

air, filter drier plugged, non-

condensables, operation

beyond capability.

A056 Alarm Circuit B, Compressor 2

Failure

Respective current sensor

board (CSB) feedback signal

is ON when the compressor

should be off

Unit shut down Manual Welded compressor contac-

tor, CSB wiring error.

A060 Alarm Cooler Leaving Fluid

Thermistor Failure

Thermistor outside range of

–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Chiller shut down

immediately Automatic Thermistor failure, damaged

cable/wire or wiring error.

A061 Alarm Cooler Entering Fluid

Thermistor Failure

Thermistor outside range of

–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Chiller shut down

immediately Automatic Thermistor failure, damaged

cable/wire or wiring error.

T068 None Circuit A Return Gas Thermistor Failure

If return gas sensors are

enabled (RG.EN) and

thermistor is outside range of

–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Circuit A shut down Automatic Thermistor failure, damaged

cable/wire or wiring error.

T069 None Circuit B Return Gas Thermistor Failure

If return gas sensors are

enabled (RG.EN) and

thermistor is outside range of

–40 to 245 F –40 to 118 C)

Circuit B shut down Automatic Thermistor failure, damaged

cable/wire or wiring error.

T073 Alert Outside Air Thermistor

Failure

Thermistor outside range of

–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Temperature reset

disabled. Chiller runs

under normal control/set

points. When capacity

reaches 0, cooler/pump

heaters are energized.

Automatic Thermistor failure, damaged

cable/wire or wiring error.

T074 Alert Space Temperature/Dual Chiller

Thermistor Failure

Thermistor outside range of

–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Temperature reset

disabled. Chiller runs

under normal control/set

points.

Automatic Thermistor failure, damaged

cable/wire or wiring error.

T077 Alert

Circuit A Saturated

Suction Temperature

exceeds Cooler Leaving

Fluid Temperature

Faulty expansion valve,

suction pressure transducer

or leaving fluid thermistor.

Circuit A shutdown after

pumpdown complete. Automatic

Faulty expansion valve or

suction pressure transducer

or leaving fluid

thermistor.

T078 Alert

Circuit B Saturated

Suction Temperature

exceeds Cooler Leaving

Fluid Temperature

Faulty expansion valve,

suction pressure transducer

or leaving fluid thermistor.

Circuit B shutdown after

pumpdown complete Automatic

Faulty expansion valve or

suction pressure transducer

or leaving fluid

thermistor.

T079 Alert Lead/Lag LWT

Thermistor Failure

Thermistor outside range of

–40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)

Chiller runs as a stand

alone machine Automatic

Dual LWT thermistor failure,

damaged cable/wire or

wiring error.

T090 Alert Circuit A Discharge

Pressure Transducer Failure

Outside of range (0 to

667 psig) Circuit A shut down Automatic

Transducer failure, poor

connection to MBB, or wiring

damage/error.

T091 Alert Circuit B Discharge

Pressure Transducer Failure

Outside of range (0 to

667 psig) Circuit B shut down Automatic

Transducer failure, poor

connection to MBB, or wiring

damage/error.

T092 Alert Circuit A Suction

Pressure Transducer Failure

Outside of range (0 to 420

psig) Circuit A shut down Automatic

Transducer failure, poor

connection to MBB, or wiring

damage/error.

T093 Alert

Circuit B Suction

Pressure Transducer

Failure

Outside of range (0 to

420 psig) Circuit B shut down Automatic

Transducer failure, poor

connection to MBB, or wiring

damage/error.

T094 Alert Discharge Gas

Thermistor Failure

Discharge thermistor (DTT) is

either open or shorted

Digital compressor shut

down. Automatic Thermistor failure, damaged

cable/wire or wiring error.

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)

ALARM/

ALERT

CODE

ALARM

ALERT

DESCRIPTION

WHY WAS THIS

ALARM

GENERATED?

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

RESET

METHOD

PROBABLE

CAUSE

T110 Alert Circuit A Loss of Charge

If the compressors are off

and discharge pressure

reading is < 26 psig for

30 sec.

Circuit not allowed to

start. Manual Refrigerant leak or

transducer failure

T111 Alert Circuit B Loss of Charge

If the compressors are off

and discharge pressure

reading is < 26 psig for

30 sec.

Circuit not allowed to

start. Manual Refrigerant leak or

transducer failure

T112 Alert Circuit A High Saturated

Suction Temperature

Circuit saturated suction

temperature pressure

transducer > 70 F (21.1 C)

for 5 minutes

Circuit shut down Manual

Faulty Expansion valve,

faulty suction pressure

transducer or high entering

fluid temperature.

T113 Alert

Circuit B High Saturated

Suction Temperature

Circuit saturated suction

temperature pressure

transducer > 70 F (21.1 C)

for 5 minutes

Circuit shut down Manual

Faulty Expansion valve,

faulty suction pressure

transducer or high entering

fluid temperature.

T114 Alert Circuit A Low Suction

Superheat

Suction superheat is

less than 5° F (2.8 C) for 5

minutes.

Circuit A shut down.

Automatic restart

after first daily

occurrence.

Manual restart

thereafter.

Faulty expansion valve,

faulty suction pressure

transducer, faulty suction gas

thermistor, circuit

overcharged

T115 Alert Circuit B Low Suction

Superheat

Suction superheat is

less than 5° F (2.8 C) for 5

minutes.

Circuit B shut down.

Automatic restart

after first daily

occurrence.

Manual restart

thereafter.

Faulty expansion valve,

faulty suction pressure

transducer, faulty suction

gas thermistor, circuit

overcharged

T116 Alert Circuit A Low Cooler

Suction Temperature

Mode 7 caused the com-

pressor to unload 6 consecu-

tive times with less than a

30-minute interval between

each circuit shutdown.

Circuit shut down Manual

Faulty expansion valve, low

refrigerant charge, plugged

filter drier, faulty suction

pressure transducer, low

cooler fluid flow

T117 Alert Circuit B Low Cooler

Suction Temperature

Mode 8 caused the com-

pressor to unload 6 consecu-

tive times with less than a

30-minute interval between

each circuit shutdown.

Circuit shut down Manual

Faulty expansion valve, low

refrigerant charge, plugged

filter drier, faulty suction

pressure transducer, low

cooler fluid flow

T118 Alert High Discharge Gas

Temperature Alert

Discharge Thermistor (DTT)

reading is greater than 250 F

Compressor A1 shut

down Automatic

Refrigerant charge, plugged

filter drier, head pressure

control.

A118 Alarm High Discharge Gas

Temperature

3 Discharge Gas Tempera-

ture alarms occur within a

day

Compressor A1 shut

down Manual

Refrigerant charge, plugged

filter drier, head pressure

control.

T126 Alert Circuit A High

Discharge Pressure

Compressor operation out-

side of operating envelope. Circuit shut down

Automatic, only

after first 3 daily

occurrences.

Manual reset

thereafter. Read-

ing from OAT sen-

sor must drop 5 F

(2.8 C) before

restart

Faulty transducer/high

pressure switch, low/

restricted condenser

airflow

T127 Alert Circuit B High

Discharge Pressure

Compressor operation out-

side of operating envelope. Circuit shut down

Automatic, only

after first 3 daily

occurrences. Man-

ual reset thereafter.

Reading from OAT

sensor must drop

5 F (2.8 C) before

restart

Faulty transducer/high

pressure switch, low/

restricted condenser

airflow

T133 Alert Circuit A Low Suction

Pressure

Suction pressure below

34 psig for 8 seconds or

below 23 psig

Circuit shut down

Automatic

restart after first

daily occurrence.

Manual restart

thereafter.

Faulty or sticking EXV, low

refrigerant charge, plugged

filter drier.

T134 Alert Circuit B Low Suction

Pressure

Suction pressure below

34 psig for 8 seconds or

below 23 psig

Circuit shut down

Automatic

restart after first

daily occurrence.

Manual restart

thereafter.

Faulty or sticking EXV, low

refrigerant charge, plugged

filter drier.

A140 Alert Reverse Rotation

Detected

Incoming chiller power leads

not phased correctly

Chiller not allowed to

start. Manual

Reverse any two incoming

power leads to correct. Check

for correct fan rotation first.

A150 Alarm Emergency Stop CCN emergency stop

command received

Chiller shutdown

without going through

pumpdown.

Automatic once

CCN command for

EMSTOP returns to

normal

CCN Network

command.

A151 Alarm Illegal Configuration One or more illegal

configurations exists.

Chiller is not allowed to

start.

Manual once

configuration errors

are corrected

Configuration error.

Check unit settings.

A152 Alarm Unit Down Due to

Failure

Both circuits are down due

to alarms/alerts.

Chiller is unable

to run.

Automatic once

alarms/alerts are

cleared that pre-

vent the chiller from

starting.

Alarm notifies user

that chiller is 100%

down.

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)

ALARM/

ALERT

CODE

ALARM

ALERT

DESCRIPTION

WHY WAS THIS

ALARM

GENERATED?

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

RESET

METHOD

PROBABLE

CAUSE

T153 Alert Real Time Clock

Hardware Failure Internal clock on MBB fails

Occupancy schedule

will not be used. Chiller

defaults to Local On

mode.

Automatic when

correct clock control

restarts.

Time/Date/Month/

Day/Year not

properly set.

A154 Alarm Serial EEPROM

Hardware Failure Hardware failure with MBB Chiller is unable

to run. Manual Main Base Board

failure.

T155 Alert Serial EEPROM

Storage Failure

Configuration/storage

failure with MBB No Action Manual

Potential failure of

MBB. Download

current operating

software. Replace

MBB if error occurs

again.

A156 Alarm Critical Serial EEPROM

Storage Failure

Configuration/storage

failure with MBB

Chiller is not allowed

to run. Manual Main Base Board

failure.

A157 Alarm A/D Hardware Failure Hardware failure with

peripheral device

Chiller is not allowed

to run. Manual Main Base Board

failure.

A172 Alarm Loss of Communication

with EXV Board

MBB loses communication

with EXV board

Chiller is not allowed

to run. Automatic

Wiring error, faulty

wiring or failed

EXV board.

T173 Alert Loss of Communication

with EMM

MBB loses communication

with EMM

4 to 20 mA

temperature reset

disabled. Demand

Limit set to 100%. 4 to

20 mA set point

disabled.

Automatic

Wiring error, faulty

wiring or failed

Energy Manage-

ment Module (EMM).

T174 Alert 4 to 20 mA Cooling Set

Point Input Failure

If configured with EMM and

input less than 2 mA or

greater than 22 mA

Set point function

disabled. Chiller

controls to CSP1.

Automatic

Faulty signal

generator, wiring

error, or faulty EMM.

T175 Alert Loss of Communication

with the AUX Board

MBB loses communication

with AUX Board. Automatic

Wiring error, faulty

wiring or failed

AUX board.

T176 Alert

4 to 20 mA

Temperature Reset

Input Failure

If configured with EMM

and input less than 2 mA or

greater than 22 mA

Reset function

disabled. Chiller

returns to normal set

point control.

Automatic

Faulty signal

generator, wiring

error, or faulty EMM.

T177 Alert 4 to 20 mA Demand

Limit Input Failure

If configured with EMM and

input less than 2 mA or

greater than 22 mA

Demand limit function

disabled. Chiller

returns to 100%

demand limit

control.

Automatic

Faulty signal

generator, wiring

error, or faulty EMM.

A189 Alarm Cooler Pump Auxiliary

Contact Inputs Miswired

Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts

are closed when Pump 2

output is energized or if

Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts

are closed when Pump 1

output is energized.

Both pump outputs

are turned off. Manual

Wiring error, faulty

pump contactor

auxiliary contacts.

T190 Alert

Cooler Pump 1 Aux

Contacts Failed to Close

at Start-Up

Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts

did not close within

26 seconds after pump

was started

Pump 1 turned off.

Pump 2 will be started

if available.

Manual

Wiring error, faulty

contacts on pump

contactor

T191 Alert

Cooler Pump 2 Aux

Contacts Failed to Close

at Start-Up

Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts

did not close within

26 seconds after pump

was started

Pump 2 turned off.

Pump 1 will be started

if available.

Manual

Wiring error, faulty

contacts on pump

contactor

T192 Alert

Cooler Pump 1 Failed

to Provide Flow at

Start-Up

Pump 1 did not provide

flow to close flow switch

within 60 seconds

Pump 1 turned off.

Pump 2 will be started

if available.

Manual

Wiring error, pump

circuit breaker

tripped, contactor

failure

T193 Alert

Cooler Pump 2 Failed

to Provide Flow at

Start-Up

Pump 2 did not provide

flow to close flow switch

within 60 seconds

Pump 1 turned off.

Pump 2 will be started

if available.

Manual

Wiring error, pump

circuit breaker

tripped, contactor

failure

T194 Alert

Cooler Pump 1 Aux

Contacts Opened

During Normal

Operation

Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts

open for 26 seconds after

initially made. All

compressors shut down.

Pump 1 turned off.

Pump 2 will be started

if available. Chiller

allowed to run if

Pump 2 successfully

starts.

Manual

Wiring error, faulty

contacts on pump

contactor

T195 Alert

Cooler Pump 2 Aux

Contacts Opened

During Normal

Operation

Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts

open for 26 seconds after

initially made. All

compressors shut down.

Pump 2 turned off.

Pump 1 will be started

if available. Chiller

allowed to run if

Pump 1 successfully

starts.

Manual

Wiring error, faulty

contacts on pump

contactor

T196 Alert Flow Lost While Pump 1

Running

Cooler flow switch contacts

open for 3 seconds after

initially made

All compressors

shut down. Pump 1

turned off. Pump 2 will

be started if available.

Chiller allowed to run if

Pump 2 successfully

starts and flow switch

is closed.

Manual

Wiring error, pump

circuit breaker

tripped, contactor

failure

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)

ALARM/

ALERT

CODE

ALARM

ALERT

DESCRIPTION

WHY WAS THIS

ALARM

GENERATED?

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

RESET

METHOD

PROBABLE

CAUSE

T197 Alert Flow Lost While Pump 2

Running

Cooler flow switch contacts

open for 3 seconds after

initially made

All compressors shut

down. Pump 2 turned

off. Pump 1 will be

started if available.

Chiller allowed to run if

Pump 1 successfully

starts and flow switch

is closed.

Manual

Wiring error, pump

circuit breaker

tripped, contactor

failure

T198 Alert

Cooler Pump 1 Aux

Contacts Closed While

Pump Off

Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts

closed for 26 seconds

when pump state is off

Chiller not allowed to

start

Automatic when

aux contacts open

Wiring error, faulty

pump contactor

(welded contacts)

T199 Alert

Cooler Pump 2 Aux

Contacts Closed While

Pump Off

Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts

closed for 26 seconds

when pump state is off

Chiller not allowed to

start

Automatic when

aux contacts open

Wiring error, faulty

pump contactor

(welded contacts)

T200 Alert

Cooler Flow/Interlock

Contacts Failed to Close

at Start-Up

Cooler flow switch contacts

failed to close within

1 minute (if cooler pump

control is enabled) or

within 5 minutes (if cooler

pump control is not

enabled) after start-up

Chiller not allowed to

start. For models with

dual pumps, the

second pump will be

started if available

Manual

Wiring error, pump

circuit breaker

tripped, contactor

failure, faulty flow

switch or interlock

A201 Alarm

Cooler Flow/Interlock

Contacts Opened

During Normal

Operation

Flow switch opens for at

least 3 seconds after

being initially closed

All compressors shut

down. For models with

dual pumps, the

second pump will be

started if available

Manual

Cooler pump failure,

faulty flow switch or

interlock, pump

circuit breaker

tripped

A202 Alarm

Cooler Pump Interlock

Closed When Pump is

Off

If configured for cooler

pump control and flow

switch input is closed for

5 minutes while pump

output(s) are off

Chiller shut down Automatic when

aux contacts open

Wiring error, faulty

pump contactor

(welded contacts)

T203 Alert Loss of Communication

with Slave Chiller

Master chiller MBB

loses communication

with slave chiller MBB

Dual chiller control

disabled. Chiller runs

as a stand-alone

machine.

Automatic

Wiring error, faulty

wiring, failed Slave

chiller MBB module,

power loss at slave

chiller, wrong slave

address.

T204 Alert Loss of Communication

with Master Chiller

Slave chiller MBB loses

communication with

master chiller MBB

Dual chiller control

disabled. Chiller runs

as a stand-alone

machine

Automatic

Wiring error, faulty

wiring, failed master

chiller MBB module,

power loss at Master

chiller.

T205 Alert Master and Slave Chiller

with Same Address

Master and slave chiller

have the same CCN

address (CCN.A)

Dual chiller routine

disabled. Master/slave

run as stand-alone

chillers.

Automatic

CCN Address for

both chillers is the

same. Must be

different. Check

CCN.A under the

OPT2 sub-mode in

Configuration at both

chillers.

T206 Alert High Leaving Chilled

Water Temperature

LWT read is greater than

LCW Alert Limit, Total

capacity is 100% and LWT

is greater than LWT

reading one minute ago

Alert only. No action

taken. Automatic

Building load greater

than unit capacity,

low water/brine flow

or compressor fault.

Check for other

alarms/alerts.

A207 Alarm Cooler Freeze

Protection

Cooler EWT or LWT is less

than Brine Freeze (BR.FZ)

Chiller shutdown

without going through

pumpdown. Cooler

pump continues to

run a minimum of

5 minutes (if control

enabled).

Both EWT and LWT

must be at least 6 F

(3.3 C) above Brine

Freeze point

(BR.FZ).

Automatic for first,

Manual reset thereaf-

ter.

Faulty thermistor,

low water flow.

A208 Alarm EWT or LWT

Thermistor failure

Cooler EWT is less than

LWT by 3° F (1.7° C) for

1 minute after a circuit is

started

Chiller shutdown.

Cooler pump shut off

(if control enabled).

Manual

Faulty cooler pump,

low water flow,

plugged fluid

strainer.

T300 Alert

Cooler Pump 1

Scheduled

Maintenance Due

Pump 1 Service

Countdown (P.1.DN)

expired. Complete pump 1

maintenance and enter

'YES' for Pump 1

Maintenance Done

(P.1.MN) item.

None Automatic

Routine pump

maintenance

required

T301 Alert

Cooler Pump 2

Scheduled

Maintenance Due

Pump 2 Service

Countdown (P.2.DN)

expired. Complete pump 2

maintenance and

enter 'YES' for Pump 1

Maintenance Done

(P.2.MN) item.

None Automatic

Routine pump

maintenance

required

Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)

LEGEND FOR TABLE 42

COMPRESSOR FAILURE ALERTS

T051, T052 (Circuit A Compresser Failures)

T055, T056 (Circuit B Compressor Failures) — Alert codes

051, 052, 055, and 056 are for compressors A1, A2, B1, and

B2 respectively. These alerts occur when the current sensor

(CS) does not detect compressor current during compressor op-

eration. When this occurs, the control turns off the compressor.

If the current sensor board reads OFF while the compressor

relay has been commanded ON, an alert is generated.

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Compressor Overload — Either the compressor internal over-

load protector is open or the external overload protector (Kri-

wan module) has activated. The external overload protector

modules are mounted in the compressor wiring junction box.

Temperature sensors embedded in the compressor motor wind-

ings are the inputs to the module. The module is powered with

24 vac from the units main control box. The module output is a

normally closed contact that is wired in series with the com-

pressor contactor coil. In a compressor motor overload condi-

tion, contact opens, deenergizing the compressor contactor.

Low Refrigerant Charge — If the compressor operates for an

extended period of time with low refrigerant charge, the com-

pressor ASTP device will open, which will cause the compres-

sor to trip on its overload protection device.

Circuit Breaker Trip — The compressors are protected from

short circuit by a breaker in the control box.

Wiring Error — A wiring error might not allow the compres-

sor to start.

To check out alerts T051-T056:

1. Turn on the compressor in question using Service Test

mode. If the compressor does not start, then most likely

the problem is one of the following: HPS open, open in-

ternal protection, circuit breaker trip, incorrect safety wir-

ing, or incorrect compressor wiring.

2. If the compressor does start, verify it is rotating in the cor-

rect direction.

ALARM/

ALERT

CODE

ALARM

ALERT

DESCRIPTION

WHY WAS THIS

ALARM

GENERATED?

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

RESET

METHOD

PROBABLE

CAUSE

T302 Alert

Strainer Blowdown

Scheduled

Maintenance Due

Strainer Service

Countdown (S.T.DN)

expired. Complete strainer

blowdown and enter 'YES'

for Strainer Maintenance

Done (S.T.MN) item.

None Automatic

Routine strainer

maintenance

required

T303 Alert Condenser Coil

Maintenance Due

Coil Service Countdown

(C.L.DN) expired.

Complete condenser coil

cleaning and enter 'YES'

for Coil Maintenance Done

(C.L.MN) item.

None Automatic

Routine condenser

coil maintenance

required

T500 Alert Current Sensor Board

A1 Failure

Alert occurs when CSB out-

put is a constant high value

Compressor A1 shut

down Automatic CSB failure.

Wiring error.

T501 Alert Current Sensor Board

A2 Failure

Alert occurs when CSB out-

put is a constant high value

Compressor A2 shut

down Automatic CSB failure.

Wiring error.

T502 Alert Current Sensor Board

A3 Failure

Alert occurs when CSB out-

put is a constant high value

Compressor A3 shut

down Automatic CSB failure.

Wiring error.

T503 Alert Current Sensor Board

B1 Failure

Alert occurs when CSB out-

put is a constant high value

Compressor B1 shut

down Automatic CSB failure.

Wiring error.

T504 Alert Current Sensor Board

B2 Failure

Alert occurs when CSB out-

put is a constant high value

Compressor B2 shut

down Automatic CSB failure.

Wiring error.

T505 Alert Current Sensor Board

B3 Failure

Alert occurs when CSB out-

put is a constant high value

Compressor B3 shut

down Automatic CSB failure.

Wiring error.

T950 Alert Loss of Communication

with Water System

Manager

No communications have

been received by the MBB

within 5 minutes of last

transmission

WSM forces removed.

Chiller runs under own

control

Automatic Failed module, wiring

error, failed

transformer, loose

connection plug,

wrong address

T951 Alert Loss of Communication

with Chillervisor System

Manager

No communications have

been received by the MBB

within 5 minutes of last

transmission

CSM forces removed.

Chiller runs under own

control

Automatic Failed module, wiring

error, failed

transformer, loose

connection plug,

wrong address

T952 Alert Loss of Communication

with Hydronic System

Manager

No communications have

been received by the MBB

within 5 minutes of last

transmission

HSM forces removed.

Chiller runs under own

control

Automatic Failed module, wiring

error, failed

transformer, loose

connection plug,

wrong address

CCN — Carrier Comfort Network

CSB — Current Sensor Board

EEPROM — Electronic Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory

EMM — Energy Management Module

EWT — Entering Fluid Temperature

EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve

HSM — Hydronic System Manager

LCW — Leaving Chilled Water

LWT — Leaving Fluid Temperature

MBB — Main Base Board

OAT — Outdoor-Air Temperature

SCT — Saturated Condensing Temperature

WSM — Water System Manager

IMPORTANT: Prolonged operation in the wrong direction

can damage the compressor. Correct rotation can be veri-

fied by a gage set and looking for a differential pressure

rise on start-up.

COMPRESSOR STUCK ON FAILURE ALARMS

Circuit A A051, A052

Circuit B A055, A056 — Alarm codes 051, 052, 055, and

056 are for compressors A1, A2, B1, and B2. These alarms oc-

cur when the CSB detects current when the compressor should

be off. When this occurs, the control turns off the compressor.

If the current sensor board reads ON while the compressor

relay has been commanded OFF for a period of 4 continuous

seconds, an alarm is generated. These alarms are only moni-

tored for a period of 10 seconds after the compressor relay has

been commanded OFF. This is done to facilitate a service tech-

nician forcing a relay to test a compressor.

In addition, if a compressor stuck failure occurs and the cur-

rent sensor board reports the compressor and the request off,

certain diagnostics will take place as follows:

1. If any of the compressors are diagnosed as stuck on and

the current sensor board is on and the request is off, the

control will command the condenser fans to maintain

normal head pressure.

2. The control will shut-off all other compressors.

The possible causes include welded contactor or frozen

compressor relay on the MBB.

To check out alarms A051-A056:

1. Place the unit in Service Test mode. All compressors

should be off.

2. Verify that there is not 24-v at the contactor coil. If there

is 24 v at the contactor, check relay on MBB and wiring.

3. Check for welded contactor.

4. Verify CSB wiring.

5. Return to Normal mode and observe compressor opera-

tion to verify that compressor current sensor is working

and condenser fans are energized.

A060 (Cooler Leaving Fluid Thermistor Failure) — The

sensor reading is outside the range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to

118 C) then the alarm will occur. The cause of the alarm is usu-

ally a faulty thermistor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by

a wiring error, or a loose connection. Failure of this thermistor

will shut down the entire unit.

A061 (Cooler Entering Thermistor Failure) — If the sensor

reading is outside the range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to116 C) then

the alarm will occur. The cause of the alarm is usually a faulty

thermistor, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring er-

ror, or a loose connection. Failure of this thermistor will shut

down the entire unit.

T068, T69 (Circuit A,B Compressor Return Gas Tempera-

ture Thermistor Failure) — This alert occurs when the com-

pressor return gas temperature sensor is outside the range of

–40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C). Failure of this thermistor will shut

down the appropriate circuit.

T073 (Outside Air Temperature Thermistor Failure) — This

alert occurs when the outside air temperature sensor is outside

the range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C). Failure of this therm-

istor will disable any elements of the control which requires its

use.

T074 (Space Temperature Thermistor Failure) — This alert

occurs when the space temperature sensor is outside the range

of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C). Failure of this thermistor will

disable any elements of the control which requires its use. The

cause of the alert is usually a faulty thermistor in the T55, or

T58 device, a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring er-

ror, or a loose connection.

T090 (Circuit A Discharge Pressure Transducer Failure)

T091 (Circuit B Discharge Pressure Transducer Failure) —

Alert codes 090 and 091 are for circuits A and B respectively.

These alerts occur when the pressure is outside the range of 0.0

to 667.0 psig. A circuit cannot run when this alert is active. Use

the scrolling marquee to reset the alert. The cause of the alert is

usually a faulty transducer, faulty 5-v power supply, or a loose

connection.

T092 (Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer Failure)

T093 (Circuit B Suction Pressure Transducer Failure) —

Alert codes 092 and 093 are for circuits A and B respectively.

These alerts occur when the pressure is outside the range of 0.0

to 420.0 psig. A circuit cannot run when this alert is active. Use

the scrolling marquee to reset the alert. The cause of the alert is

usually a faulty transducer, faulty 5-v power supply, or a loose

connection.

T094 (Discharge Gas Thermistor Failure) — This alert oc-

curs for units which have the digital compressor installed on

circuit A. If discharge gas temperature is open or shorted, the

circuit will be shutoff. The alert will reset itself when discharge

temperature is less than 250 F (121.1 C). The cause of the alert

is usually low refrigerant charge or a faulty thermistor.

T110 (Circuit A Loss of Charge)

T111 (Circuit B Loss of Charge) — Alert codes 110 and 111

are for circuits A and B respectively. These alerts occur when

the compressor is OFF and the discharge pressure is less than

26 psig.

T112 (Circuit A High Saturated Suction Temperature)

T113 (Circuit B High Saturated Suction Temperature) —

Alert codes 112 and 113 occur when compressors in a circuit

have been running for at least 5 minutes and the circuit saturat-

ed suction temperature is greater than 70 F (21.1 C). The high

saturated suction alert is generated and the circuit is shut down.

T114 (Circuit A Low Superheat)

T115 (Circuit B Low Superheat) — Alert codes 114 and 115

occur when the superheat of a circuit is less than 5 F (2.8 C) for

5 continuous minutes. The low superheat alert is generated and

the circuit is shut down.

T116 (Circuit A Low Cooler Suction Temperature)

T117 (Circuit B Low Cooler Suction Temperature) — Alert

codes 116 and 117 are for circuits A and B respectively. These

alerts are generated if the capacity stages are reduced three

times without a 30 minute interval between capacity reductions

due to operating mode 7 or mode 8.

T118 (High Discharge Gas Temperature Alert)

A118 (High Discharge Gas Temperature Alarm) — This

alert or alarm occurs for units which have the digital compres-

sor installed on circuit A. If discharge gas temperature is great-

er than 268 F (131.1 C), the circuit will be shut off. The alert

will reset itself when discharge temperature is less than 250 F

(121.1 C). If this alert occurs 3 times within a day, the A118

alarm will be generated and the alarm must be reset manually.

The cause of the alert is usually low refrigerant charge or a

faulty thermistor.

T126 (Circuit A High Head Pressure)

T127 (Circuit B High Head Pressure) — Alert codes 126 and

127 are for circuits A and B respectively. These alerts occur

when the appropriate saturated condensing temperature is

greater than the operating envelope shown in Fig 14. Prior to

the alert, the control will shut down one compressor on a circuit

if that circuit's saturated condensing temperature is greater than

the maximum SCT minus 5° F (2.7° C). If SCT continues to

IMPORTANT: If the CS is always detecting current, verify

that the compressor is on. If the compressor is on, check

the contactor and the relay on the MBB. If the compressor

is off and there is no current, verify the CSB wiring and

replace if necessary.

IMPORTANT: Return to Normal mode and observe com-

pressor operation to verify that compressor current sensor

is working and condenser fans are energized.

rise to greater than the maximum SCT, the alert will occur and

the circuit's remaining compressor will shut down. The cause

of the alarm is usually an overcharged system, high outdoor

ambient temperature coupled with dirty outdoor coil, plugged

filter drier, or a faulty high-pressure switch.

T133 (Circuit A Low Suction Pressure)

T134 (Circuit B Low Suction Pressure) — Alert codes 133

and 134 are for circuits A and B respectively. These alerts are

generated if one of the two following conditions is satisfied:

the circuit suction pressure is below 34 psig (234.4 kPa) for 8

seconds, or the suction pressure is below 23 psig (158.6 kPa).

The cause of this alert may be low refrigerant charge, plugged

liquid line filter drier, or sticking EXV. Check head pressure

operation. If not equipped, consider adding low ambient tem-

perature head pressure control.

Add wind baffles if required.

A140 (Reverse Rotation Detected) — A test is made once, on

power up, for suction pressure change on the first activated cir-

cuit. The unit control determines failure as follows:

1. The suction pressure of both circuits is sampled 5 seconds

before the compressor is brought on, right when the com-

pressor is brought on and 5 seconds afterwards.

2. The rate of suction pressure change from 5 seconds be-

fore the compressor is brought on to when the compres-

sor is brought on is calculated.

3. The rate of suction pressure change from when the

compressor is brought on to 5 seconds afterwards is

calculated.

4. With the above information, the test for reverse rotation is

made. If the suction pressure change 5 seconds after com-

pression is greater than the suction pressure change 5 sec-

onds before compression – 1.25, then there is a reverse

rotation error.

This alarm will disable mechanical cooling and will require

manual reset.

A150 (Unit is in Emergency Stop) — If the CCN emergency

stop command is received, the alarm is generated and the unit

will be immediately stopped.

If the CCN point name "EMSTOP" in the system table is set

to emergency stop, the unit will shut down immediately and

broadcast an alarm back to the CCN, indicating that the unit is

down. This alarm will clear when the variable is set back to

"enable."

A151 (Illegal Configuration) — An A151 alarm indicates an

invalid configuration has been entered. The following are ille-

gal configurations.

• Invalid unit size has been entered.

• Dual thermostat configured for single-circuit unit.

• Dual thermostat and switch demand limit configure

• AUX board incorrect revision.

• Unit configuration set to invalid type.

A152 (Unit Down Due to Failure) — Both circuits are off

due to alerts and/or alarms. Reset is automatic when all alarms

are cleared. This alarm indicates the unit is at 0% capacity.

T153 (Real Time Clock Hardware Failure) — A problem

has been detected with MBB real time clock hardware. Try re-

setting the power and check the indicator lights. If the alarm

continues, the board should be replaced.

A154 (Serial EEPROM Hardware Failure) — A problem

has been detected with the EEPROM on the MBB. Try

resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If the alarm

continues, the board should be replaced.

T155 (Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Error) — A problem

has been detected with the EEPROM storage on the MBB. Try

resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If the alert

continues, the board should be replaced.

A156 (Critical Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Error) — A

problem has been detected with the EEPROM storage on the

MBB. Try resetting the power and check the indicator lights. If

the alarm continues, the board should be replaced.

A157 (A/D Hardware Failure) — A problem has been detect-

ed with A/D conversion on the boards. Try resetting the power

and check the indicator lights. If the alarm continues, the board

should be replaced.

A172 (Loss of Communication with the EXV Board) —

This alarm indicates that there are communications problems

with the EXV board. The alarm will automatically reset.

T173 (Energy Management Module Communication Fail-

ure) — This alert indicates that there are communications

problems with the energy management. All functions per-

formed by the EMM will stop, which can include demand lim-

it, reset and capacity input. The alarm will automatically reset.

T174 (4 to 20 mA Cooling Set Point Input Failure) — This

alert indicates a problem has been detected with cooling set

point 4 to 20 mA input. The input value is either less than 2 mA

or greater than 22 mA.

T175 (Loss of Communication with the AUX Board) —

This alarm indicates that there are communications problems

with the AUX board. All functions performed by the AUX

board will stop, which can include digital scroll unloader oper-

ation and low ambient head pressure control. The alarm will

automatically reset.

T176 (4 to 20 mA Reset Input Failure) — This alert indi-

cates a problem has been detected with reset 4 to 20 mA input.

The input value is either less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA.

The reset function will be disabled when this occurs.

T177 (4 to 20 mA Demand Limit Input Failure) — This

alert indicates a problem has been detected with demand limit

4 to 20 mA input. The input value is either less than 2 mA or

greater than 22 mA. The reset function will be disabled when

this occurs.

T500, T501 (Current Sensor Board Failure — A xx Circuit

T503, T504 (Current Sensor Board Failure — B xx Circuit

B) — Alert codes 500, 501, 503, and 504 are for compressors

A1, A2, B1, and B2 respectively. These alerts occur when the

output of the CSB is a constant high value. These alerts reset

automatically. If the problem cannot be resolved, the CSB must

be replaced.

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES

Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

VIEW

AUTO VIEW OF RUN STATUS

EWT xxx.x ºF Entering Fluid Temp

LWT xxx.x ºF Leaving Fluid Temp

SETP xxx.x ºF Active Set Point

CTPT xxx.x ºF Control Point

LOD.F xxx Load/Unload Factor

STAT Control Mode

0=Service Test

1=Off Local

2=Off CCN

3=Off Time

4=Off Emrgcy

5=On Local

6=On CCN

7=On Time

LD.PM Lead Pump

OCC YES/NO Occupied

LS.AC YES/NO Low Sound Active

MODE YES/NO Override Modes in Effect

CAP xxx Percent Total Capacity

STGE x Requested Stage

ALRM xxx Current Alarms & Alerts

TIME xx.xx Time of Day 00:00-23:59

MNTH xx Month of Year 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DATE xx Day of Month 01-31

YEAR xx Year of Century

RUN

UNIT RUN HOUR AND START

HRS.U xxxx HRS Machine Operating Hours

STR.U xxxx Machine Starts

HR.P1 xxxx HRS Pump 1 Run Hours

HR.P2 xxxx HRS Pump 2 Run Hours

HOUR

CIRC AND COMP RUN HOURS

HRS.A xxxx HRS Circuit A Run Hours

HRS.B xxxx HRS Circuit B Run Hours

HR.A1 xxxx HRS Compressor A1 Run Hours

HR.A2 xxxx HRS Compressor A2 Run Hours

HR.B1 xxxx HRS Compressor B1 Run Hours

HR.B2 xxxx HRS Compressor B2 Run Hours

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

STRT

COMPRESSOR STARTS

ST.A1 xxxx Compressor A1 Starts

ST.A2 xxxx Compressor A2 Starts

ST.B1 xxxx Compressor B1 Starts

ST.B2 xxxx Compressor B2 Starts

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

PUMP PUMP MAINTENANCE

SI.PM xxxx HRS Pump Service Interval

P.1.DN xxxx HRS Pump 1 Service Countdown

P.2.DN xxxx HRS Pump 2 Service Countdown

P.1.MN YES/NO Pump 1 Maintenance Done User Entry

P.2.MN YES/NO Pump 2 Maintenance Done User Entry

PMDT PUMP MAINTENANCE DATES

P.1.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.1.M1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.1.M2 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.1.M3 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.1.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M2 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M3 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

P.2.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

STRN STRAINER MAINTENANCE

SI.ST xxxx HRS Strainer Srvc Interval

S.T.DN xxxx HRS Strainer Srvc Countdown

S.T.MN YES/NO Strainer Maint. Done User Entry

ST.DT STRAINER MAINTENANCE DATES

S.T.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

S.T.M1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

S.T.M2 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

S.T.M3 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

S.T.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

COIL COIL MAINTENANCE

SI.CL xxxx HRS Coil Cleaning Srvc Int

C.L.DN xxxx HRS Coil Service Countdown

C.L.MN YES/NO Coil Cleaning Maint.Done User Entry

CL.DT COIL MAINTENANCE DATES

C.L.M0 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

C.L.M1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

C.L.M2 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

C.L.M3 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

C.L.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

VERS

SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBERS

MBB CESR131460-XXXXX

EXV CESR131172-XXXXX

AUX1 CESR131333-XXXXX

EMM CESR131174-XXXXX

MARQ CESR131171-XXXXX

NAVI CESR130227-XXXXX

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

Temperature Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

Pressures Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

TEST Service Test Mode

To enable Service Test mode, move

Enable/Off/Remote contact switch to

OFF. Change TEST to ON.

Move switch to ENABLE

OUTS

OUTPUTS

EXV.A xxx% EXV % Open

EXV.B xxx% EXV % Open

FAN1 ON/OFF Fan 1 Relay

FAN2 ON/OFF Fan 2 Relay

FAN3 ON/OFF Fan 3 Relay

FAN4 ON/OFF Fan 4 Relay

FAN5 ON/OFF Fan 5 Relay

FAN6 ON/OFF Fan 6 Relay

V.HPA xx Var Head Press %

V.HPB xx Var Head Press %

CLP.1 ON/OFF Cooler Pump Relay 1

CLP.2 ON/OFF Cooler Pump Relay 2

UL.TM xx Comp A1 Unload Time

CL.HT ON/OFF Cooler/Pump Heater

RMT.A ON/OFF Remote Alarm Relay

CMPA

CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TEST

CC.A1 ON/OFF Compressor A1 Relay

UL.TM xx Comp A1 Unload Time

CC.A2 ON/OFF Compressor A2 Relay

MLV ON/OFF Minimum Load Valve Relay

CMPB

CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TEST

CC.B1 ON/OFF Compressor B1 Relay

CC.B2 ON/OFF Compressor B2 Relay

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

UNIT

ENTERING AND LEAVING UNIT TEMPERATURES

CEWT xxx.x °F Cooler Entering Fluid

CLWT xxx.x °F Cooler Leaving Fluid

OAT xxx.x °F Outside Air Temperature

SPT xxx.x °F Space Temperature

DLWT xxx.x °F Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid

CIR.A

TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT A

SCT.A xxx.x °F Saturated Condensing Tmp

SST.A xxx.x °F Saturated Suction Temp

RGT.A xxx.x °F Compr Return Gas Temp

D.GAS xxx.x °F Discharge Gas Temp

SH.A xxx.x ΔF Suction Superheat Temp

CIR.B

TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT B

SCT.B xxx.x °F Saturated Condensing Tmp

SST.B xxx.x °F Saturated Suction Temp

RGT.B xxx.x °F Compr Return Gas Temp

SH.B xxx.x ΔF Suction Superheat Temp

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

PRC.A

PRESSURES CIRCUIT A

DP.A xxx.x PSIG Discharge Pressure

SP.A xxx.x PSIG Suction Pressure

PRC.B

PRESSURES CIRCUIT B

DP.B xxx.x PSIG Discharge Pressure

SP.B xxx.x PSIG Suction Pressure

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Set Points Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

Inputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION RANGE COMMENT

COOL

COOLING SET POINTS

CSP.1 xxx.x °F Cooling Set Point 1 –20 to 70 Default: 44 F

CSP.2 xxx.x °F Cooling Set Point 2 –20 to 70 Default: 44 F

CSP.3 xxx.x °F ICE Set Point –20 to 32 Default: 32 F

HEAD

HEAD PRESSURE SET POINTS

H.DP xxx.x °F Head Set Point 85 to 120 Default: 95 F

F.ON xxx.x °F Fan On Set Point Default: 95 F

F.OFF xxx.x °F Fan Off Set Point Default: 72 F

B.OFF xx.x Base Fan Off Delta Temp 10 to 50 Default: 23 F

F.DLT xxx Fan Stage Delta 0 to 50 Default: 15 F

FRZ BRINE FREEZE SET POINT

BR.FZ xx.x °F Brine Freeze Point –20 to 34 Default: 34 F

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

GEN.I

GENERAL INPUTS

STST ON/OFF Start/Stop Switch

FLOW ON/OFF Cooler Flow Switch

PM.F.1 ON/OFF Cooler Pump 1 Interlock

PM.F.2 ON/OFF Cooler Pump 2 Interlock

HT.RQ ON/OFF Heat Request

DLS1 ON/OFF Demand Limit Switch 1

DLS2 ON/OFF Demand Limit Switch 2

ICED ON/OFF Ice Done

DUAL ON/OFF Dual Set Point Switch

CRCT

CIRCUIT INPUTS

FKA1 ON/OFF Compressor A1 Feedback

FKA2 ON/OFF Compressor A2 Feedback

FKA3 ON/OFF Compressor A3 Feedback

FKA4 ON/OFF Compressor A4 Feedback

FKB1 ON/OFF Compressor B1 Feedback

FKB2 ON/OFF Compressor B2 Feedback

FKB3 ON/OFF Compressor B3 Feedback

FKB4 ON/OFF Compressor B4 Feedback

4-20

4-20 MA INPUTS

DMND xx.x 4-20 ma Demand Signal

RSET xx.x 4-20 ma Reset Signal

CSP xx.x 4-20 ma Cooling Set Point

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

GEN.O

GENERAL OUTPUTS

FAN1 ON/OFF Fan 1 Relay

FAN2 ON/OFF Fan 2 Relay

FAN3 ON/OFF Fan 3 Relay

FAN4 ON/OFF Fan 4 Relay

FAN5 ON/OFF Fan 5 Relay

FAN6 ON/OFF Fan 6 Relay

V.HPA ON/OFF Fan Speed Circuit A

V.HPB ON/OFF Fan Speed Circuit B

C.WP1 ON/OFF Cooler Pump Relay 1

C.WP2 ON/OFF Cooler Pump Relay 2

CLHT ON/OFF Cooler/Pump Heater

MLV.R ON/OFF Minimum Load Valve Relay

A.EXV

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A EXV

EXV.A ON/OFF EXV % Open

APPR ON/OFF Circuit A Approach

AP.SP ON/OFF Approach Setpoint

X.SH.R SH Reset at Max Unl-Dig

S.SH.R Digload to Start SH RST

SH_R Amount of SH Reset

OVR.A ON/OFF EXVA Override

SPH.A ON/OFF Suction Superheat Temp

ASH.S ON/OFF Active Superheat Setpt

AMP.S ON/OFF Active Mop Setpt

PLM.A ON/OFF Cir A EXV Position Limit

SPR.1 ON/OFF Spare 1 Temperature

B.EXV

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A EXV

EXV.B ON/OFF EXV % Open

APPR ON/OFF Circuit B Approach

AP.SP ON/OFF Approach Setpoint

OVR.B ON/OFF EXVB Override

SPH.B ON/OFF Suction Superheat Temp

ASH.S ON/OFF Active Superheat Setpt

AMP.S ON/OFF Active Mop Setpt

PLM.B ON/OFF Cir B EXV Position Limit

SPR.2 ON/OFF Spare 2 Temperature

CIR.A

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A

CC.A1 ON/OFF Compressor A1 Relay

DPE.R ON/OFF Comp A1 Load Percent

CC.A2 ON/OFF Compressor A2 Relay

CC.A3 ON/OFF Compressor A3 Relay

CC.A4 ON/OFF Compressor A4 Relay

CIR.B

OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B

CC.B1 ON/OFF Compressor B1 Relay

CC.B2 ON/OFF Compressor B2 Relay

CC.B3 ON/OFF Compressor B3 Relay

CC.B4 ON/OFF Compressor B4 Relay

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

DISP

DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

TEST ON/OFF Test Display LEDs

METR ON/OFF Metric Display Off = English On = Metric

LANG X Language Selection

Default: 0

0 = English

1 = Espanol

2 = Francais

3 = Portuguese

PAS.E ENBL/DSBL Password Enable

PASS XXXX Service Password

UNIT

UNIT CONFIGURATION

SIZE Unit Size

SZA.1 XX Compressor A1 Size

SZA.2 XX Compressor A2 Size

SZA.3 XX Compressor A3 Size

SZA.4 XX Compressor A4 Size

SZB.1 XX Compressor B1 Size

SZB.2 XX Compressor B2 Size

SZB.3 XX Compressor B3 Size

SZB.4 XX Compressor B4 Size

SH.SP XX Suction Superheat Setpt

FAN.S X Number of Fans Default: 5

EXV YES/NO EXV Module Installed

A1.TY YES/NO Compressor A1 Digital Default: No

MAX.T XX Maximum A1 Unload Time

Default: 7

Max = 12 (010,015)

Max = 10 (018-060)

OPT1

UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE

FLUD X Cooler Fluid Default: Water

1 = Water

2 = Medium Temperature Brine

MLV.S YES/NO Minimum Load Valve Select

CSB.E ENBL/DSBL Csb Boards Enable Default: Enable

CPC ON/OFF Cooler Pump Control Default: Off

PM1E YES/NO Cooler Pump 1 Enable

PM2E YES/NO Cooler Pump 2 Enable

PM.P.S YES/NO Cooler Pmp Periodic Strt Default: No

PM.SL X Cooler Pump Select Default: Automatic

0 = Automatic

1 = Pump 1 Starts first

2 = Pump 2 Starts first

PM.DY XX MIN Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly 0 to 10 minutes, Default: 1 min.

PM.DT XXXX HRS Pump Changeover Hours Default: 500 hours

ROT.P YES/NO Rotate Cooler Pumps Now User Entry

EMM YES/NO EMM Module Installed

CND.T X Cnd HX Typ:0=RTPF 1=MCHX

MOPS XX EXV MOP Set Point

APPR XX Config Approach Set Point

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

OPT2

UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS

CTRL X Control Method

Default: 0

0 = Enable/Off/Remote Switch

2 = Occupancy

3 = CCN Control

LOAD X Loading Sequence Select

Default: 1

1 = Equal

2 = Staged

LLCS X Lead/Lag Circuit Select

Default: 1

1 = Automatic

2 = Circuit A Leads

3 = Circuit B Leads

LCWT XX High LCW Alert Limit Default: 60

Range: 2 to 60 F

DELY XX Minutes Off Time Default: 0 Minutes

Range: 0 to 15 Minutes

ICE.M ENBL/DSBL Ice Mode Enable Default: Disable

LS.MD X Low Sound Mode Select Default: 0

0 = Mode Disable

1 = Fan Noise Only

2 = Fan/Compressor Noise

LS.ST 00:00 Low Sound Start Time Default: 00:00

LS.ND 00:00 Low Sound End Time Default: 00:00

LS.LT XXX % Low Sound Capacity Limit Default: 100%

Range: 0 to 100%

CCN

CCN NETWORK CONFIGS

CCNA XXX CCN Address Default: 1

Range: 0 to 239

CCNB XXX CCN Bus Number Default: 1

Range: 0 to 239

BAUD X CCN Baud Rate

Default: 3

1 = 2400

2 = 4800

3 = 9600

4 =19,200

5 =38,400

HP.A

HEAD PRESSURE CMP. DELTA

A1.DT XX SCT Delta For Comp A1 Default:12

Range: 0 to 50

A2.DT XX SCT Delta For Comp A2 Default:12

Range: 0 to 50

HP.B

HEAD PRESSURE CMP. DELTA

B1.DT XX SCT Delta For Comp B1 Default:12

Range: 0 to 50

B2.DT XX SCT Delta For Comp B2 Default:12

Range: 0 to 50

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

EXV.A

CIR A EXV CONFIGURATION

STR.A XXX EXV CIrc.A Start Pos Default: 50

0 to 100

MIN.A XXX EXV Circ.A Min Position Default: 8

0 to 100

RNG.A XXXXX EXVA Steps In Range 0 to 65535

SPD.A XXXXX EXVA STeps Per Second Default: 200

0 to 65535

POF.A XXX EXVA Fail Position In % Default: 0

0 to 100

MIN.A XXXXX EXVA Minimum Steps Default: 0

0 to 65535

MAX.A XXXXX EXVA Maximum Steps 0 to 65535

OVR.A XXX EXVA Overrun Steps Default: 167

0 to 65535

TYP.A 0,1 EXVA Stepper Type

Default: 1

0 = UNIPOLAR

1 = BIPOLAR

H.SCT XXX High SCT Threshold Default: 115

50 to 140

X.PCT XX Open EXV X% On 2nd Comp Default: 10

0 to 30

X.PER XX Move EXV X% On DISCRSOL Default: 5

0 to 30

A.PCT XXX Pre-open EXV - Fan Adding Default: 10

0 to 100

M.PCT XXX Pre-close EXV - Fan Sub Default: 10

0 to 100

S.PCT XXX Pre-close EXV - Lag Shut Default: 10

0 to 100

DELY XXX Lag Start Delay Default: 10

0 to 100

EXV.B

CIR B EXV CONFIGURATION

STR.B XXX EXV CIrc.B Start Pos Default: 50

0 to 100

MIN.B XXX EXV Circ.B Min Position Default: 8

0 to 100

RNG.B XXXXX EXVB Steps In Range 0 to 65535

SPD.B XXXXX EXVB STeps Per Second Default: 200

0 to 65535

POF.B XXX EXVB Fail Position In % Default: 0

0 to 100

MIN.B XXXXX EXVB Minimum Steps Default: 0

0 to 65535

MAX.B XXXXX EXVB Maximum Steps 0 to 65535

OVR.B XXX EXVB Overrun Steps Default: 167

0 to 65535

TYP.B 0,1 EXVB Stepper Type

Default: 1

0 = UNIPOLAR

1 = BIPOLAR

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

MOTORMASTER

MMR.S YES/NO Motormaster Select Default: NO

P.GAN XX Head Pressure P Gain Default: 1

Range: 1 to 4

I.GAN XX.X Head Pressure I Gain Default: 0.1

Range: -20 to 20

D.GAN XX.X Head Pressure D Gain Default: 0.0

Range: -20 to 20

MIN.S XX Minimum Fan Speed Default: 5

RSET

RESET COOL TEMP

CRST X Cooling Reset Type

Default: 0

0 = No Reset

1 = 4 to 20 mA Input

2 = Outdoor Air Temperature

3 = Return Fluid

4 = Space Temperature

MA.DG XX.XΔF4-20 - Degrees Reset Default: 0.0 ΔF

Range: -30 to 30 ΔF

RM.NO XXX.X °F Remote - No Reset Temp Default: 125 F

Range: 0° to125 F

RM.F XXX.X °F Remote - Full Reset Temp Default: 0 F

Range: 0° to125 F

RM.DG XX.X °F Remote - Degrees Reset Default: 0.0 ΔF

Range: -30 to 30 ΔF

RT.NO XXX.XΔFReturn - No Reset Temp Default: 10.0 ΔF

Range: 0° to125 F

RT.F XXX.XΔFReturn - Full Reset Temp Default: 0 ΔF

Range: 0° to125 F

RT.DG XX.X °F Return - Degrees Reset Default: 0.0 ΔF

Range: -30 to 30 ΔF

DMDC X Demand Limit Select

Default: 0

0 = None

1 = Switch

2 - 4 to 20 mA Input

3 = CCN Loadshed

DM20 XXX% Demand Limit at 20 mA Default: 100%

Range: 0 to 100%

SHNM XXX Loadshed Group Number Default: 0

Range: 0 to 99

SHDL XXX% Loadshed Demand Delta Default: 0%

Range: 0 to 60%

SHTM XXX Maximum Loadshed Time Default: 60 minutes

Range: 0 to 120 minutes

DLS1 XXX% Demand Limit Switch 1 Default: 80%

Range: 0 to 100%

DLS2 XXX% Demand Limit Switch 2 Default: 50%

Range: 0 to 100%

LLEN ENBL/DSBL Lead/Lag Chiller Enable Default: Disable

MSSL SLVE/MAST Master/Slave Select Default: Master

SLVA XXX Slave Address Default: 2

Range: 0 to 239

LLBL X Lead/Lag Balance Select

Default: Master Leads

0 = Master Leads

1 = Slave Leads

2 = Automatic

LLBD XXX Lead/Lag Balance Delta Default: 168 hours

Range: 40 to 400 hours

LLDY XXX Lag Start Delay Default: 5 minutes

Range: 0 to 30 minutes

PARA YES Parallel Configuration Default: YES (CANNOT BE

CHANGED)

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

SLCT

SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD

CLSP X Cooling Set Point Select

Default: Single

0 = Single

1 = Dual Switch

2 = Dual CCN Occupied

3 = 4 to 20 mA

Input (requires EMM)

RL.S ENBL/DSBL Ramp Load Select Default: Enable

CRMP ENBL/DSBL Cooling Ramp Loading Default: 1.0

Range: 0.3 to 2

SCHD XX Schedule Number Default: 1

Range: 1 to 99

Z.GN X.X Deadband Multiplier Default: 1

Range: 1 to 4

SERV

SERVICE CONFIGURATION

EN.A1 YES/NO Enable Compressor A1

EN.A2 YES/NO Enable Compressor A2

EN.B1 YES/NO Enable Compressor B1

EN.B2 YES/NO Enable Compressor B2

BCST

BROADCAST CONFIGURATION

T.D.B ON/OFF CCN Time/Date Broadcast

OAT.B ON/OFF CCN OAT Broadcast

G.S.BC ON/OFF Global Schedule Broadcst

BC.AK ON/OFF CCN Broadcast Ack'er

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

TIME TIME OF DAY

HH.MM XX.XX Hour and Minute Military (00:00 - 23:59)

DATE

MONTH, DATE, DAY, AND YEAR

MNTH XX Month of Year 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DOM XX Day of Month Range: 01 -31

DAY X Day of Week 1 - 7 (1 = Sunday,

2 = Monday, etc.)

YEAR XXXX Year of Century

DST

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME

STR.M XX Month Default: 4 Range 1- 12

STR.W X Week Default: 1 Range 1- 5

STR.D X Day Default: 7 Range 1- 7

MIN.A XX Minutes to Add Default: 60 Range 0 - 99

STP.M XX Month Default: 10 Range 1- 12

STP.W XX Week Default: 5 Range 1- 5

STP.D XX Day Default: 7 Range 1- 7

MIN.S XX Minutes to Subtract Default: 60 Range 0 - 99

HOL.L LOCAL HOLIDAY SCHEDULES

HD.01

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 01

MON XX Holiday Start Month

DAY XX Start Day

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.02

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 02

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.03

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 03

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.04

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 04

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.05

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 05

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.06

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 06

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.07

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 07

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.08

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 08

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

HD.09

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 09

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.10

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 10

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.11

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 11

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.12

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 12

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.13

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 13

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.14

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 14

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.15

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 15

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.16

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 16

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.17

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 17

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.18

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 18

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.19

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 19

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

HD.20

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 20

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.21

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 21

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.22

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 22

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.23

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 23

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.24

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 24

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.25

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 25

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.26

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 26

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.27

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 27

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.28

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 28

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.29

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 29

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

HD.30

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 30

MON XX Holiday Start Month 1 - 12 (1 = January,

2 = February, etc.)

DAY XX Start Day 01-31

LEN XX Duration (days)

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

SCH.N Schedule Number 0

SCH.L LOCAL OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE

PER.1

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 1

OCC.1 XX:XX Period Occupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

UNC.1 XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

MON.1 YES/NO Monday In Period

TUE.1 YES/NO Tuesday In Period

WED.1 YES/NO Wednesday In Period

THU.1 YES/NO Thursday In Period

FRI.1 YES/NO Friday In Period

SAT.1 YES/NO Saturday In Period

SUN.1 YES/NO Sunday In Period

HOL.1 YES/NO Holiday In Period

PER.2

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 2

OCC.2 XX:XX Period Occupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

UNC.2 XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

MON.2 YES/NO Monday In Period

TUE.2 YES/NO Tuesday In Period

WED.2 YES/NO Wednesday In Period

THU.2 YES/NO Thursday In Period

FRI.2 YES/NO Friday In Period

SAT.2 YES/NO Saturday In Period

SUN.2 YES/NO Sunday In Period

HOL.2 YES/NO Holiday In Period

PER.3

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 3

OCC.3 XX:XX Period Occupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

UNC.3 XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

MON.3 YES/NO Monday In Period

TUE.3 YES/NO Tuesday In Period

WED.3 YES/NO Wednesday In Period

THU.3 YES/NO Thursday In Period

FRI.3 YES/NO Friday In Period

SAT.3 YES/NO Saturday In Period

SUN.3 YES/NO Sunday In Period

HOL.3 YES/NO Holiday In Period

PER.4

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 4

OCC.4 XX:XX Period Occupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

UNC.4 XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

MON.4 YES/NO Monday In Period

TUE.4 YES/NO Tuesday In Period

WED.4 YES/NO Wednesday In Period

THU.4 YES/NO Thursday In Period

FRI.4 YES/NO Friday In Period

SAT.4 YES/NO Saturday In Period

SUN.4 YES/NO Sunday In Period

HOL.4 YES/NO Holiday In Period

PER.5

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 5

OCC.5 XX:XX Period Occupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

UNC.5 XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

MON.5 YES/NO Monday In Period

TUE.5 YES/NO Tuesday In Period

WED.5 YES/NO Wednesday In Period

THU.5 YES/NO Thursday In Period

FRI.5 YES/NO Friday In Period

SAT.5 YES/NO Saturday In Period

SUN.5 YES/NO Sunday In Period

HOL.5 YES/NO Holiday In Period

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont)

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

PER.6

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 6

OCC.6 XX:XX Period Occupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

UNC.6 XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

MON.6 YES/NO Monday In Period

TUE.6 YES/NO Tuesday In Period

WED.6 YES/NO Wednesday In Period

THU.6 YES/NO Thursday In Period

FRI.6 YES/NO Friday In Period

SAT.6 YES/NO Saturday In Period

SUN.6 YES/NO Sunday In Period

HOL.6 YES/NO Holiday In Period

PER.7

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 7

OCC.7 XX:XX Period Occupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

UNC.7 XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

MON.7 YES/NO Monday In Period

TUE.7 YES/NO Tuesday In Period

WED.7 YES/NO Wednesday In Period

THU.7 YES/NO Thursday In Period

FRI.7 YES/NO Friday In Period

SAT.7 YES/NO Saturday In Period

SUN.7 YES/NO Sunday In Period

HOL.7 YES/NO Holiday In Period

PER.8

OCCUPANCY PERIOD 8

OCC.8 XX:XX Period Occupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

UNC.8 XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time Military (00:00 - 23:59)

MON.8 YES/NO Monday In Period

TUE.8 YES/NO Tuesday In Period

WED.8 YES/NO Wednesday In Period

THU.8 YES/NO Thursday In Period

FRI.8 YES/NO Friday In Period

SAT.8 YES/NO Saturday In Period

SUN.8 YES/NO Sunday In Period

HOL.8 YES/NO Holiday In Period

OVR

SCHEDULE OVERRIDE

OVR.T X Timed Override Hours Default: 0 Range 0-4 hours

OVR.L X Override Time Limit Default: 0 Range 0-4 hours

T.OVR YES/NO Timed Override User Entry

APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Operating Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

Alarms Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

MODE

MODES CONTROLLING UNIT

MD01 ON/OFF CSM Controlling Chiller

MD02 ON/OFF WSM Controlling Chiller

MD03 ON/OFF Master/Slave Control

MD05 ON/OFF Ramp Load Limited

MD06 ON/OFF Timed Override in effect

MD07 ON/OFF Low Cooler Suction TempA

MD08 ON/OFF Low Cooler Suction TempB

MD09 ON/OFF Slow Change Override

MD10 ON/OFF Minimum OFF time active

MD13 ON/OFF Dual Set Point

MD14 ON/OFF Temperature Reset

MD15 ON/OFF Demand Limited

MD16 ON/OFF Cooler Freeze Protection

MD17 ON/OFF Low Temperature Cooling

MD18 ON/OFF High Temperature Cooling

MD19 ON/OFF Making Ice

MD20 ON/OFF Storing Ice

MD21 ON/OFF High SCT Circuit A

MD22 ON/OFF High SCT Circuit B

MD23 ON/OFF Minimum Comp. On Time

MD24 ON/OFF Pump Off Delay Time

MD25 ON/OFF Low Sound Mode

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMMENT

CRNT

CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARMS

AXXX

TXXX

PXXX

Current Alarms 1-25 Alarms are hown as AXXX

Alerts are shown as TXXX

RCRN YES/NO Reset All Current Alarms

HIST

ALARM HISTORY

AXXX

TXXX

PXXX

Alarm History 1-20 Alarms are shown as AXXX

Alerts are shown as TXXX

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — A_UNIT (General Unit Parameters)

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCA_AN (Circuit A Analog Parameters)

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME FORCIBLE

Control Mode 0 = Test

1 = Local Off

2 = CCN Off

3 = Clock Off

4 = Emergency Stop

5 = Local On

6 = CCN On

7 = Clock On

8 = Heat Enabled

9 = Pump Delay

STAT N

Occupied No/Yes OCC N

CCN Chiller Start/Stop CHIL_S_S Y

Low Sound Active No/Yes LSACTIVE N

Alarm State Normal/Alert/Alarm ALM N

Active Demand Limit 0 to 100 % DEM_LIM Y

Override Modes in Effect No/Yes MODE N

Percent Total Capacity 0 to 100 % CAP_T N

Requested Stage 0 to 99 STAGE N

Active Set Point –20 to 70 FSP N

Control Point –20 to 70 F CTRL_PNT Y

Entering Fluid Temp snnn.n FEWT N

Leaving Fluid Temp snnn.n FLWT N

Emergency Stop Enable/Emstop Enable EMSTOP Y

Minutes Left for Start 00:00 to 15:00 minutes MIN_LEFT N

PUMPS

Cooler Pump Relay 1 Off/On COOLPMP1 N

Cooler Pump Relay 2 Off/On COOLPMP2 N

Cooler Pump 1 Interlock Open/Close PMP1_FBK N

Cooler Pump 2 Interlock Open/Close PMP2_FBK N

Cooler Flow Switch Open/Close COOLFLOW N

Lead Pump LEADPUMP Y

Rotate Cooler Pumps Now No/Yes ROT_PUMP Y

Heat/Cool Select Heat/Cool HC_SEL N

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME FORCIBLE

CIRCUIT A ANALOG VALUES

Percent Total Capacity 0-100 % CAPA_T N

Percent Available Cap. 0-100 % CAPA_A N

Discharge Pressure nnn.n PSIG DP_A N

Suction Pressure nnn.n PSIG SP_A N

Head Setpoint nnn.n °F HSP N

Saturated Condensing Tmp snnn.n FTMP_SCTAN

Saturated Suction Temp snnn.n F TMP_SSTA N

EXV % Open nnn % EXV_A N

Var Head Press Output nnn.n milliamps VHP_ACT N

Compr Return Gas Temp nnn.n FTMP_RGTAN

Discharge Gas Temp nnn.n °F DISGAS N

Suction Superheat Temp nnn.n FSH_AN

Spare 1 Temperature nnn.n °F SPR1_TMP N

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCADIO (Circuit A Discrete Inputs/Outputs)

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCB_AN (Circuit B Analog Parameters)

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCBDIO (Circuit B Discrete Inputs/Outputs)

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME FORCIBLE

CIRC. A DISCRETE OUTPUTS

Compressor A1 Relay On/Off K_A1_RLY N

Compressor A2 Relay On/Off K_A2_RLY N

Minimum Load Valve Relay On/Off MLV_RLY N

CIRC. A DISCRETE INPUTS

Compressor A1 Feedback On/Off K_A1_FBK N

Compressor A2 Feedback On/Off K_A2_FBK N

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME FORCIBLE

CIRCUIT B ANALOG VALUES

Percent Total Capacity 0-100 % CAPB_T N

Percent Available Cap. 0-100 % CAPB_A N

Discharge Pressure nnn.n PSIG DP_B N

Suction Pressure nnn.n PSIG SP_B N

Head Setpoint nnn.n °F HSP N

Saturated Condensing Tmp snnn.n FTMP_SCTBN

Saturated Suction Temp snnn.n F TMP_SSTB N

EXV % Open nnn % EXV_B N

Var Head Press Output nnn.n milliamps VHP_ACT N

Compr Return Gas Temp nnn.n FTMP_RGTBN

Suction Superheat Temp nnn.n FSH_BN

Spare 2 Temperature nnn.n °F SPR2_TMP N

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME FORCIBLE

CIRC. B DISCRETE OUTPUTS

Compressor B1 Relay On/Off K_B1_RLY N

Compressor B2 Relay On/Off K_B2_RLY N

Minimum Load Valve Relay On/Off MLV_RLY N

CIRC. B DISCRETE INPUTS

Compressor B1 Feedback On/Off K_B1_FBK N

Compressor B2 Feedback On/Off K_B2_FBK N

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN DISPLAY TABLES — OPTIONS (Unit Parameters)

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — UNIT (Unit Configuration)

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — OPTIONS1 (Options 1 Configuration)

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME FORCIBLE

FANS

Fan 1 Relay Off/On FAN_1 N

Fan 2 Relay Off/On FAN_2 N

Cooler/Pump Heater Off/On COOL_HTR N

UNIT ANALOG VALUES

Cooler Entering Fluid snnn.n FCOOL_EWTN

Cooler Leaving Fluid snnn.n FCOOL_LWTN

Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid snnn.n F DUAL_LWT N

TEMPERATURE RESET

4-20 mA Reset Signal nn.n mA RST_MA N

Outside Air Temperature snnn.n FOAT Y

Space Temperature snnn.n F SPT Y

DEMAND LIMIT

4-20 mA Demand Signal nn.n mA LMT_MA N

Demand Limit Switch 1 Off/On DMD_SW1 N

Demand Limit Switch 2 Off/On DMD_SW2 N

CCN Loadshed Signal 0 = Normal

1 = Redline

2 = Loadshed

DL_STAT N

MISCELLANEOUS

Heat Request Off/On HEAT_REQ N

Dual Setpoint Switch Off/On DUAL_IN N

Cooler LWT Setpoint snnn.n FLWT_SPN

Ice Done Off/On ICE_DONE N

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

Unit Size nnn tons SIZE

Compressor A1 Size nnn tons SIZE_A1

Compressor A2 Size nnn tons SIZE_A2

Compressor B1 Size nnn tons SIZE_B1

Compressor B2 Size nnn tons SIZE_B2

Suction Superheat Setpt nn.n 9.0 FSH_SP

Number of Fans n FAN_TYPE

Compressor A1 Digital? No/Yes No CPA1TYPE

Maximum A1 Unload Time nn 12 sec MAXULTME

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

Cooler Fluid 1 = Water

2 = Med. Brine

1FLUIDTYP

Minimum Load Vlv Select No/Yes No MLV_FLG

CSB Board Enable Dsable/Enable Enable CSB_ENA

Cooler Pump Control Off/On Off CPC

Cooler Pump 1 Enable No/Yes No PMP1_ENA

Cooler Pump 2 Enable No/Yes No PMP2_ENA

Cooler Pmp Periodic Strt No/Yes No PUMP_PST

Cooler Pump Select 0 = Automatic, 1 =

Pump 1, 2 = Pump 2

0 PMP_SLCT

Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly 0 to 10 1 minutes PUMP_DLY

Pump Changeover Hours 10 to 2000 100 hours PMP_DLTA

EMM Module Installed No/Yes No EMM_BRD

Cnd HX Typ: 0=RTPF 1=MCHX 0/1 1 COILTYPE

EXV MOP Set Point nn.n °F MOP_SP

Config Approach Setpoint nn.n °F IAPPROSP

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — OPTIONS2 (Options 2 Configuration)

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — SCHEDOVR (Timed Override Setup)

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — RESETCON (Temperature Reset and Demand Limit)

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

Control Method 0 = Switch

2 = Occupancy

3 = CCN

0 CONTROL

Loading Sequence Select 1 = Equal Loading

2 = Staged Loading

1 SEQ_TYP

Lead/Lag Circuit Select 1 = Automatic

2 = Circuit A Leads

3 = Circuit B Leads

1 LEAD_TYP

Cooling Setpoint Select 0 = Single

1 = Dual, remote switch controlled

2 = Dual CCN occupancy

3 = 4-20 mA input

0 CLSP_TYP

Ramp Load Select Enable/Dsable Enable RAMP_EBL

Heat Cool Select Cool/Heat Cool HEATCOOL

High LCW Alert Limit 2 to 60 60.0 F LCW_LMT

Minutes off time 0 to 15 0 min DELAY

Deadband Multiplier 1.0 to 4.0 1.0 Z_GAIN

Ice Mode Enable Enable/Dsable Dsable ICE_CNFG

Low Sound Mode Select 0 = Disabled

1 = Fan only

2 = Capacity/Fans

0LS_MODE

Low Sound Start Time 00:00 to 23:59 00:00 LS_START

Low Sound End Time 00:00 to 23:59 00:00 LS_END

Low Sound Capacity Limit 0 to 100 100 % LS_LIMIT

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

Schedule Number 0 to 99 1 SCHEDNUM

Override Time Limit 0 to 4 0 hours OTL

Timed Override Hours 0 to 4 0 hours OVR_EXT

Timed Override No/Yes No TIMEOVER

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

COOLING RESET

Cooling Reset Type 0 = No Reset

1 = 4-20 mA input

2 = External temp – OAT

3 = Return Fluid

4 = External temp - SPT

0CRST_TYP

4-20 MA RESET

4-20 – Degrees Reset –30 to 30 0.0 F 420_DEG

REMOTE RESET

Remote – No Reset Temp 0 to 125 125.0 FREM_NO

Remote – Full Reset Temp 0 to 125 0.0 FREM_FULL

Remote – Degrees Reset –30 to 30 0.0 F REM_DEG

RETURN TEMPERATURE RESET

Return – No Reset Temp 0 to 125 10.0 FRTN_NO

Return – Full Reset Temp 0 to 125 0.0 FRTN_FULL

Return – Degrees Reset –30 to 30 0.0 FRTN_DEG

DEMAND LIMIT

Demand Limit Select 0 = None

1 = External switch input

2 = 4-20 mA input

3 = Loadshed

0DMD_CTRL

Demand Limit at 20 mA 0 to 100 100 % DMT20MA

Loadshed Group Number 0 to 99 0 SHED_NUM

Loadshed Demand Delta 0 to 60 0 % SHED_DEL

Maximum Loadshed Time 0 to 120 60 minutes SHED_TIM

Demand Limit Switch 1 0 to 100 80 % DLSWSP1

Demand Limit Switch 2 0 to 100 50 % DLSWSP2

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — DUALCHIL (Dual Chiller Configuration Settings)

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — DISPLAY (Marquee Display SETUP)

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — EXVACONF (EXV Circuit A Configuration)

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — EXVBCONF (EXV Circuit B Configuration)

CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — MM_CONF (Motormaster Configuration)

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

LEAD/LAG

Lead/Lag Chiller Enable Enable/Dsable Dsable LL_ENA

Master/Slave Select Master/Slave Master MS_SEL

Slave Address 0 to 239 2 SLV_ADDR

Lead/Lag Balance Select 0 = None 0 LL_BAL

Lead/Lag Balance Delta 40 to 400 168 hours LL_BAL_D

Lag Start Delay 0 to 30 5 minutes LL_DELAY

Parallel Configuration Yes Yes PARALLEL

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

Service Password nnnn 1111 PASSWORD

Password Enable Enable/Disable Enable PASS_EBL

Metric Display Off/On Off DISPUNIT

Language Selection 0 = ENGLISH

1 = FRANCAIS

2 = ESPANOL

3 = PORTUGUES

0LANGUAGE

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

EXV Circ. A Start Pos nnn.n 50.0 % EXVASTRT

EXV Circ. A Min Position nnn.n 8.0 % EXVAMINP

EXVA Steps in Range nnnnn 1596/2500 steps EVXARANG

EXVA Steps Per Second nnnnn 200 steps EXVARATE

EXVA Fail Position in % nnnn.nn 0 % EXVAPOSF

EXVA Minimum Steps nnnnn 0 steps EXVAMINS

EXVA Maximum Steps nnnnn 1596/2500 steps EXVAMAXS

EXVA Overrun Steps nnnnn 167 steps EXVAOVRS

EXVA Stepper Type nnn Bipolar EXVATYPE

High SCT Threshold nnn.n 115 °F HIGH_SCT

Open EXV X% on 2nd Comp nnn.n 10 % EXV_HSCT

Open EXV X% on DISCRSOL nnn.n 5 % EXVDISCR

Pre-Open EXV - Fan Adding nnn.n 10 % EXV_AFAN

Pre-Close EXV - Fan Sub nnn.n 10 % EXV_MFAN

Pre-Close EXV - Lag Shut nnn.n 10 % EXV_SLAG

Lag Start Delay nnn 10 secs DELAYLAG

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

EXV Circ. B Start Pos nnn.n 50.0 % EXVBSTRT

EXV Circ. B Min Position nnn.n 8.0 % EXVBMINP

EXVB Steps in Range nnnnn 1596/2500 steps EVXBRANG

EXVB Steps Per Second nnnnn 200 steps EXVBRATE

EXVB Fail Position in % nnnn.nn 0 % EXVBPOSF

EXVB Minimum Steps nnnnn 0 steps EXVBMINS

EXVB Maximum Steps nnnnn 1596/2500 steps EXVBMAXS

EXVB Overrun Steps nnnnn 167 steps EXVBOVRS

EXVB Stepper Type nnn Bipolar EXVBTYPE

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

Motormaster Select No/Yes No MM_SLCT

Head Pressure P Gain nnn.n 1.0 HP_PGAIN

Head Pressure I Gain nnn.n 0.1 HP_IGAIN

Head Pressure D Gain nnn.n 0.0 HP_DGAIN

Minimum Fan Speed nnn.n 5.0 % MIN_VHP

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN SERVICE TABLES — SERVICE

CCN SETPOINT TABLES — SETPOINT

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — CIRA_EXV

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

SERVICE

Brine Freeze Point nnn.n F BRN_FRZ

Pump Service Interval nnnnn hours SI_PUMPS

COMPRESSOR ENABLE

Enable Compressor A1 Disable/Enable ENABLEA1

Enable Compressor A2 Disable/Enable ENABLEA2

Enable Compressor B1 Disable/Enable ENABLEB1

Enable Compressor B2 Disable/Enable ENABLEB2

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

COOLING

Cooling Setpoint 1 –20 to 70 44.0 FCSP1

Cooling Setpoint 2 –20 to 70 44.0 FCSP2

ICE Setpoint –20 to 32 32.0 FCSP3

RAMP LOADING

Cooling Ramp Loading 0.2 to 2.0 1.0 CRAMP

Brine Freeze Point –20 to 34 34.0 F BRN_FRZ

Head Setpoint FHSP

Fan On Set Point F FANONSP

Fan Off Set Point FFANOFFSP

Fan Stage Delta FFSTGDLTA

Base Fan Off Delta Temp FB_FANOFF

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

EXV % Open nnn % EXV_A

Circuit A Approach nnn.n delta F CIRA_APP

Approach Setpoint nnn.n delta F APPRA_SP

EXVA Override nnnnn EXVAOVRR

Suction Superheat Temp nnn.n delta F SH_A

Active Superheat Setpt nn.n delta F ACTSH_SP

Active MOP Setpt nn.n delta F ACMOP_SP

Cir A EXV Position Limit nnn % PLMA

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — CIRB_EXV

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — STRTHOUR

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — CURRMODS

DESCRIPTION VALUE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

EXV % Open nnn % EXV_B

Circuit B Approach nnn.n delta F CIRB_APP

Approach Setpoint nnn.n delta F APPRB_SP

EXVB Override nnnnn EXVBOVRR

Suction Superheat Temp nnn.n delta F SH_B

Active Superheat Setpt nn.n delta F ACTSH_SP

Active MOP Setpt nn.n delta F ACMOP_SP

Cir B EXV Position Limit nnn % PLMB

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME

Machine Operating Hours nnnnnn hours HR_MACH

Machine Starts nnnnnn CY_MACH

Circuit A Run Hours nnnnnn hours HR_CIRA

Compressor A1 Run Hours nnnnnn hours HR_A1

Compressor A2 Run Hours nnnnnn hours HR_A2

Circuit B Run Hours nnnnnn hours HR_CIRB

Compressor B1 Run Hours nnnnnn hours HR_B1

Compressor B2 Run Hours nnnnnn hours HR_B2

Circuit A Starts nnnnnn CY_CIRA

Compressor A1 Starts nnnnnn CY_A1

Compressor A2 Starts nnnnnn CY_A2

Circuit B Starts nnnnnn CY_CIRB

Compressor B1 Starts nnnnnn CY_B1

Compressor B2 Starts nnnnnn CY_B2

PUMP HOURS

Pump 1 Run Hours nnnnnn hours HR_PUMP1

Pump 2 Run Hours nnnnnn hours HR_PUMP2

DESCRIPTION VALUE POINT NAME

CSM controlling Chiller On/Off MODE_1

WSM controlling Chiller On/Off MODE_2

Master/Slave control On/Off MODE_3

Ramp Load Limited On/Off MODE_5

Timed Override in effect On/Off MODE_6

Low Cooler Suction TempA On/Off MODE_7

Low Cooler Suction TempB On/Off MODE_8

Slow Change Override On/Off MODE_9

Minimum OFF time active On/Off MODE_10

Dual Setpoint On/Off MODE_13

Temperature Reset On/Off MODE_14

Demand/Sound Limited On/Off MODE_15

Cooler Freeze Protection On/Off MODE_16

Low Temperature Cooling On/Off MODE_17

High Temperature Cooling On/Off MODE_18

Making ICE On/Off MODE_19

Storing ICE On/Off MODE_20

High SCT Circuit A On/Off MODE_21

High SCT Circuit B On/Off MODE_22

Minimum Comp. On Time On/Off MODE_23

Pump Off Delay Time On/Off MODE_24

Low Sound Mode On/Off MODE_25

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — ALARMS

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — VERSIONS

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — LOADFACT

DESCRIPTION VALUE POINT NAME

Active Alarm #1 Axxx or Txxx ALARM01C

Active Alarm #2 Axxx or Txxx ALARM02C

Active Alarm #3 Axxx or Txxx ALARM03C

Active Alarm #4 Axxx or Txxx ALARM04C

Active Alarm #5 Axxx or Txxx ALARM05C

Active Alarm #6 Axxx or Txxx ALARM06C

Active Alarm #7 Axxx or Txxx ALARM07C

Active Alarm #8 Axxx or Txxx ALARM08C

Active Alarm #9 Axxx or Txxx ALARM09C

Active Alarm #10 Axxx or Txxx ALARM10C

Active Alarm #11 Axxx or Txxx ALARM11C

Active Alarm #12 Axxx or Txxx ALARM12C

Active Alarm #13 Axxx or Txxx ALARM13C

Active Alarm #14 Axxx or Txxx ALARM14C

Active Alarm #15 Axxx or Txxx ALARM15C

Active Alarm #16 Axxx or Txxx ALARM16C

Active Alarm #17 Axxx or Txxx ALARM17C

Active Alarm #18 Axxx or Txxx ALARM18C

Active Alarm #19 Axxx or Txxx ALARM19C

Active Alarm #20 Axxx or Txxx ALARM20C

Active Alarm #21 Axxx or Txxx ALARM21C

Active Alarm #22 Axxx or Txxx ALARM22C

Active Alarm #23 Axxx or Txxx ALARM23C

Active Alarm #24 Axxx or Txxx ALARM24C

Active Alarm #25 Axxx or Txxx ALARM25C

DESCRIPTION VERSION VALUE

EXV CESR131172- nn-nn

AUX CESR131333- nn-nn

MBB CESR131460- nn-nn

EMM CESR131174- nn-nn

MARQUEE CESR131171- nn-nn

NAVIGATOR CESR130227- nn-nn

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME

CAPACITY CONTROL

Load/Unload Factor snnn.n SMZ

Control Point snnn.n F CTRL_PNT

Entering Fluid Temp snnn.n FEWT

Leaving Fluid Temp snnn.n FLWT

Ramp Load Limited On/Off MODE_5

Slow Change Override On/Off MODE_9

Cooler Freeze Protection On/Off MODE_16

Low Temperature Cooling On/Off MODE_17

High Temperature Cooling On/Off MODE_18

Minimum Comp. On Time On/Off MODE_23

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — PM-PUMP

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — PM-STRN

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — PM-COIL

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — TESTMODE

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME

Pump Service Interval nnnnnn hours SI_PUMPS

Pump 1 Service Countdown nnnnnn hours P1_CDOWN

Pump 1 Maintenance Done Yes/No P1_MAINT

Pump 2 Service Countdown nnnnnn hours P2_CDOWN

Pump 2 Maintenance Done Yes/No P2_MAINT

Pump 1 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP1_PM0

Pump 1 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP1_PM1

Pump 1 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP1_PM2

Pump 1 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP1_PM3

Pump 1 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP1_PM4

Pump 2 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP2_PM0

Pump 2 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP2_PM1

Pump 2 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP2_PM2

Pump 2 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP2_PM3

Pump 2 Maintenance Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm PMP2_PM4

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME

Strainer Srvc Interval nnnnnn hours SI_STRNR

Strainer Srvc Countdown nnnnnn hours ST_CDOWN

Strainer Maint. Done Yes/No ST_MAINT

Strainer Maint. Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm STRN_PM0

Strainer Maint. Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm STRN_PM1

Strainer Maint. Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm STRN_PM2

Strainer Maint. Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm STRN_PM3

Strainer Maint. Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm STRN_PM4

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME

Coil Cleaning Srvc Inter nnnnnn hours SI_COIL

Coil Service Countdown nnnnnn hours CL_CDOWN

Coil Cleaning Maint.Done Yes/No CL_MAINT

Coil Cleaning Maint.Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm COIL_PM0

Coil Cleaning Maint.Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm COIL_PM1

Coil Cleaning Maint.Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm COIL_PM2

Coil Cleaning Maint.Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm COIL_PM3

Coil Cleaning Maint.Date mm/dd/yy hh:mm COIL_PM4

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME

Service Test Mode On/Off NET_CTRL

Compressor A1 Relay On/Off S_A1_RLY

Compressor A2 Relay On/Off S_A2_RLY

Compressor B1 Relay On/Off S_B1_RLY

Compressor B2 Relay On/Off S_B2_RLY

Fan 1 Relay On/Off S_FAN_1

Fan 2 Relay On/Off S_FAN_2

Cooler Pump Relay 1 On/Off S_CLPMP1

Cooler Pump Relay 2 On/Off S_CLPMP2

Comp A1 Unload Time nn sec S_A1ULTM

Minimum Load Valve Relay On/Off S_MLV

Remote Alarm Relay On/Off S_ALM

EXV % Open nn % S_EXV_A

EXV % Open nn % S_EXV_B

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — RUNTEST

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME

Percent Total Capacity nnn % CAPA_T

Percent Available Cap. nnn % CAPA_A

Discharge Pressure nnn.n psig DP_A

Suction Pressure nnn.n psig SP_A

Head Setpoint nnn.n FHSP

Saturated Condensing Tmp nnn.n FTMP_SCTA

Saturated Suction Temp nnn.n FTMP_SSTA

Compr Return Gas Temp nnn.n FTMP_RGTA

Discharge Gas Temp nnn.n FDISGAS

Suction Superheat Temp nnn.n ^F SH_A

Compressor A1 Relay On/Off K_A1_RLY

Compressor A2 Relay On/Off K_A2_RLY

Minimum Load Valve Relay On/Off MLV_RLY

Compressor A1 Feedback On/Off K_A1_FBK

Compressor A2 Feedback On/Off K_A2_FBK

Percent Total Capacity nnn % CAPB_T

Percent Available Cap. nnn % CAPB_A

Discharge Pressure nnn.n psig DP_B

Suction Pressure nnn.n psig SP_B

Head Setpoint nnn.n FHSP

Saturated Condensing Tmp nnn.n FTMP_SCTB

Saturated Suction Temp nnn.n FTMP_SSTB

Compr Return Gas Temp nnn.n FTMP_RGTB

Suction Superheat Temp nnn.n ^F SH_B

Compressor B1 Relay On/Off K_B1_RLY

Compressor B2 Relay On/Off K_B2_RLY

Minimum Load Valve Relay On/Off MLV_RLY

Compressor B1 Feedback On/Off K_B1_FBK

Compressor B2 Feedback On/Off K_B2_FBK

Fan 1 Relay On/Off FAN_1

Fan 2 Relay On/Off FAN_2

Outside Air Temperature nnn.n FOAT

Space Temperature nnn.n F SPT

Cooler Pump Relay 1 On/Off COOLPMP1

Cooler Pump Relay 2 On/Off COOLPMP2

Cooler Pump 1 Interlock Open/Closed PMP1_FBK

Cooler Pump 2 Interlock Open/Closed PMP2_FBK

Cooler Entering Fluid nnn.n F COOL_EWT

Cooler Leaving Fluid nnn.n F COOL_LWT

Compressor A1 Size nnn tons SIZE_A1

Compressor A2 Size nnn tons SIZE_A2

Compressor B1 Size nnn tons SIZE_B1

Compressor B2 Size nnn tons SIZE_B2

Cooler Flow Switch On/Off COOLFLOW

100

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — DUALCHIL

DESCRIPTION VALUE UNITS POINT NAME

Dual Chiller Link Good? Yes/No DC_LINK

Master Chiller Role Stand Alone,

Lead Chiller,

Lag Chiller

MC_ROLE

Slave Chiller Role Stand Alone,

Lead Chiller,

Lag Chiller

SC_ROLE

Lead Chiller Ctrl Point snnn.n F LEAD_CP

Lag Chiller Ctrl Point snnn.n FLAG_CP

Control Point snnn.n F CTRL_PNT

Cool EnteringFluid-Slave snnn.n FCOOLEWTS

Cool Leaving Fluid-Slave snnn.n FCOOLLWTS

Cooler Entering Fluid snnn.n F COOL_EWT

Cooler Leaving Fluid snnn.n FCOOL_LWT

Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid snnn.n F DUAL_LWT

Percent Avail.Capacity 0-100 % CAP_A

Percent Avail.Cap.Slave 0-100 % CAP_A_S

Lag Start Delay Time hh:mm LAGDELAY

Load/Unload Factor snnn.n SMZ

Load/Unload Factor-Slave snnn.n SMZSLAVE

Lead SMZ Clear Commanded Yes/No LEADSMZC

Lag SMZ Clear Commanded Yes/No LAG_SMZC

Lag Commanded Off? Yes/No LAG_OFF

Dual Chill Lead CapLimit 0-100 % DCLDCAPL

Dual Chill Lag CapLimit 0-100 % DCLGCAPL

101

APPENDIX C — FACTORY SETTINGS FOR PUMP AND MANUAL STARTERS

PUMP OPTION PUMP SIZE UNIT VOLTAGE

V-Hz (3 Ph)

OVERLOAD

SETTING

1, 8 1.0 HP

208/230-60 4.0

380-60 2.0

460-60 1.6

575-60 2.4

2, 9 1.5 HP

208/230-60 5.4

380-60 2.7

460-60 2.2

575-60 3.3

3, B 2.0 HP

208/230-60 6.6

380-60 3.3

460-60 2.6

575-60 4.0

4, C 3.0 HP

208/230-60 8.8

380-60 4.4

460-60 3.5

575-60 5.3

5, 6, D, F 5.0 HP

208/230-60 14.0

380-60 7.0

460-60 5.6

575-60 8.5

7, G 7.5 HP

208/230-60 22.8

380-60 11.4

460-60 9.1

575-60 13.8

102

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING

Optional BACnet Communications Wiring —

The following section is used to configure the UPC Open con-

troller which is used when the BACnet communications option

is selected. The UPC Open controller is mounted in the main

control box per unit components arrangement diagrams.

TO ADDRESS THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER — The

user must give the UPC Open controller an address that is

unique on the BACnet* network. Perform the following proce-

dure to assign an address:

1. If the UPC Open controller is powered, pull the screw ter-

minal connector from the controller's power terminals la-

beled Gnd and HOT. The controller reads the address

each time power is applied to it.

2. Using the rotary switches (see Fig. A and B), set the con-

troller's address. Set the Tens (10's) switch to the tens dig-

it of the address, and set the Ones (1's) switch to the ones

digit.

As an example in Fig. B, if the controller’s address is 25,

point the arrow on the Tens (10's) switch to 2 and the arrow on

the Ones (1's) switch to 5.

BACNET DEVICE INSTANCE ADDRESS — The UPC

Open controller also has a BACnet Device Instance address.

This Device Instance MUST be unique for the complete BAC-

net system in which the UPC Open controller is installed. The

Device Instance is auto generated by default and is derived by

adding the MAC address to the end of the Network Number.

The Network Number of a new UPC Open controller is 16101,

but it can be changed using i-Vu® Tools or BACView device.

By default, a MAC address of 20 will result in a Device In-

stance of 16101 + 20 which would be a Device Instance of

1610120.

10's

1's

Fig. B — Address Rotary Switches

Fig. A — UPC Open Controller

BACNET

BAUD RATE

DIP SWITCHES

ADDRESS

ROTARY

SWITCHES

POWER LED

RUN LED

ERROR LED

BACNET

CONNECTION

(BAS PORT)

BT485

TERMINATOR

Tx2 LED

Rx2 LED

Tx1 LED

Rx1 LED

EIA-485

JUMPERS

* Sponsored by ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerat-

ing, and Air Conditioning Engineers).

103

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)

CONFIGURING THE BAS PORT FOR BACNET MS/

TP — Use the same baud rate and communication settings for

all controllers on the network segment. The UPC Open con-

troller is fixed at 8 data bits, No Parity, and 1 Stop bit for this

protocol's communications.

If the UPC Open controller has been wired for power, pull

the screw terminal connector from the controller's power termi-

nals labeled Gnd and HOT. The controller reads the DIP

Switches and jumpers each time power is applied to it.

Set the BAS Port DIP switch DS3 to “enable.” Set the BAS

Port DIP switch DS4 to “E1-485.” Set the BMS Protocol DIP

switches DS8 through DS5 to “MSTP.” See Table A.

Table A — SW3 Protocol Switch Settings

for MS/TP

Verify that the EIA-485 jumpers below the CCN Port are set

to EIA-485 and 2W.

The example in Fig. C shows the BAS Port DIP Switches

set for 76.8k (Carrier default) and MS/TP.

Set the BAS Port DIP Switches DS2 and DS1 for the appro-

priate communications speed of the MS/TP network (9600,

19.2k, 38.4k, or 76.8k bps). See Fig. D and Table B.

Table B — Baud Selection Table

WIRING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER TO THE MS/

TP NETWORK — The UPC Open controller communicates

using BACnet on an MS/TP network segment communications

at 9600 bps, 19.2 kbps, 38.4 kbps, or 76.8 kbps.

Wire the controllers on an MS/TP network segment in a dai-

sy-chain configuration. Wire specifications for the cable are

22 AWG (American Wire Gage) or 24 AWG, low-capacitance,

twisted, stranded, shielded copper wire. The maximum length

is 2000 ft.

Install a BT485 terminator on the first and last controller on

a network segment to add bias and prevent signal distortions

due to echoing. See Fig. A, D, and E.

To wire the UPC Open controller to the BAS network:

1. Pull the screw terminal connector from the controller's

BAS Port.

2. Check the communications wiring for shorts and

grounds.

3. Connect the communications wiring to the BAS port’s

screw terminals labeled Net +, Net -, and Shield.

NOTE: Use the same polarity throughout the network

segment.

4. Insert the power screw terminal connector into the UPC

Open controller's power terminals if they are not current-

ly connected.

5. Verify communication with the network by viewing a

module status report. To perform a module status report

using the BACview keypad/display unit, press and hold

the “FN” key then press the “.” Key.

DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3

OffOffOffOffOnOff

BAUD RATE DS2 DS1

9,600 Off Off

19,200 On Off

38,400 Off On

76,800 On On

Fig. C — DIP Switches

Fig. D — Network Wiring

104

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)

To install a BT485 terminator, push the BT485 terminator

on to the BT485 connector located near the BACnet connector.

NOTE: The BT485 terminator has no polarity associated with

it.

To order a BT485 terminator, consult Commercial Products

i-Vu Open Control System Master Prices.

MS/TP WIRING RECOMMENDATIONS — Recommen-

dations are shown in Tables C and D. The wire jacket and UL

temperature rating specifications list two acceptable alterna-

tives. The Halar specification has a higher temperature rating

and a tougher outer jacket than the SmokeGard specification,

and it is appropriate for use in applications where the user is

concerned about abrasion. The Halar jacket is also less likely to

crack in extremely low temperatures.

NOTE: Use the specified type of wire and cable for maximum

signal integrity.

Table C — MS/TP Wiring Recommendations

LEGEND

Fig. E — BT485 Terminator Installation

SPECIFICATION RECOMMMENDATION

Cable Single twisted pair, low capacitance, CL2P, 22 AWG (7x30), TC foam FEP, plenum rated cable

Conductor 22 or 24 AWG stranded copper (tin plated)

Insulation Foamed FEP 0.015 in. (0.381 mm) wall 0.060 in. (1.524 mm) O.D.

Color Code Black/White

Twist Lay 2 in. (50.8 mm) lay on pair 6 twists/foot (20 twists/meter) nominal

Shielding Aluminum/Mylar shield with 24 AWG TC drain wire

Jacket SmokeGard Jacket (SmokeGard PVC) 0.021 in. (0.5334 mm) wall 0.175 in. (4.445 mm) O.D.

Halar Jacket (E-CTFE) 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) wall 0.144 in. (3.6576 mm) O.D.

DC Resistance 15.2 Ohms/1000 feet (50 Ohms/km) nominal

Capacitance 12.5 pF/ft (41 pF/meter) nominal conductor to conductor

Characteristic Impedance 100 Ohms nominal

Weight 12 lb/1000 feet (17.9 kg/km)

UL Temperature Rating SmokeGard 167°F (75°C)

Halar -40 to 302°F (-40 to 150°C)

Voltag e 300 Vac, power limited

Listing UL: NEC CL2P, or better

AWG — American Wire Gage

CL2P — Class 2 Plenum Cable

DC — Direct Current

FEP — Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer

NEC — National Electrical Code

O.D. — Outside Diameter

TC — Tinned Copper

UL — Underwriters Laboratories

105

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)

Table D — Open System Wiring Specifications and Recommended Vendors

LEGEND

LOCAL ACCESS TO THE UPC OPEN CONTROL-

LER — The user can use a BACview6 handheld keypad dis-

play unit or the Virtual BACview software as a local user inter-

face to an Open controller. These items let the user access the

controller network information. These are accessory items and

do not come with the UPC Open controller.

The BACview6 unit connects to the local access port on the

UPC Open controller. See Fig. F. The BACview software must

be running on a laptop computer that is connected to the local

access port on the UPC Open controller. The laptop will re-

quire an additional USB link cable for connection.

See the BACview Installation and User Guide for instruc-

tions on connecting and using the BACview6 device.

To order a BACview6 Handheld (BV6H), consult Commer-

cial Products i-Vu Open Control System Master Prices.

CONFIGURING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER'S

PROPERTIES — The UPC Open device and ComfortLink

control must be set to the same CCN Address (Element) num-

ber and CCN Bus number. The factory default settings for

CCN Element and CCN Bus number are 1 and 0 respectively.

If modifications to the default Element and Bus number are

required, both the ComfortLink and UPC Open configurations

must be changed.

The following configurations are used to set the CCN Ad-

dress and Bus number in the ComfortLink control. These con-

figurations can be changed using the scrolling marquee display

or accessory Navigator handheld device.

Configuration→CCN→CCN.A (CCN Address)

Configuration→CCN→CCN.B (CCN Bus Number)

The following configurations are used to set the CCN Ad-

dress and Bus Number in the UPC Open controller. These con-

figurations can be changed using the accessory BACview6 dis-

play.

Navigation: BACview→CCN

Home: Element Comm Stat

Element: 1

Bus: 0

WIRING SPECIFICATIONS RECOMMENDED VENDORS AND PART NUMBERS

Wire Type Description Connect Air

International Belden RMCORP Contractors

Wire and Cable

MS/TP

Network (RS-485)

22 AWG, single twisted shielded pair, low capacitance, CL2P,

TC foam FEP, plenum rated. See MS/TP Installation Guide for

specifications.

W221P-22227 — 25160PV CLP0520LC

24 AWG, single twisted shielded pair, low capacitance, CL2P,

TC foam FEP, plenum rated. See MS/TP Installation Guide

for specifications.

W241P-2000F 82841 25120-OR —

Rnet 4 conductor, unshielded, CMP, 18 AWG, plenum rated. W184C-2099BLB 6302UE 21450 CLP0442

AWG — American Wire Gage

CL2P — Class 2 Plenum Cable

CMP — Communications Plenum Rated

FEP — Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer

TC — Tinned Copper

Fig. F — BACview6 Device Connection

106

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)

If the UPC Open is used with the chiller application of

Lead/Lag/Standby, all chillers and UPC Open's CCN element

numbers must be changed to a unique number in order to fol-

low CCN specifications. In this application, there can only be a

maximum of 3 UPC Open controllers on a CCN bus.

For the CCN Alarm Acknowledger configuration, the UPC

Open defaults to CCN Acknowledger. If a Chiller Lead/Lag/

Standby application is being used, then the Carrier technician

must change the configuration to only one CCN Acknowledger

on the CCN bus.

For the CCN Time Broadcaster configuration, the UPC

Open defaults to CCN Time Broadcaster. If the Chiller Lead/

Lag/Standby application is used, then the Carrier technician

must change the configuration to only one CCN Time Broad-

caster on the CCN bus.

TROUBLESHOOTING — If there are problems wiring or

addressing the UPC Open controller, contact Carrier Technical

Support.

COMMUNICATION LEDS — The LEDs indicate if the

controller is communicating with the devices on the network.

See Tables E and F. The LEDs should reflect communication

traffic based on the baud rate set. The higher the baud rate the

more solid the LEDs become. See Fig. A for location of LEDs

on UPC Open module.

REPLACING THE UPC OPEN BATTERY — The UPC

Open controller's 10-year lithium CR2032 battery provides a

minimum of 10,000 hours of data retention during power out-

ages.

Remove the battery from the controller, making note of the

battery's polarity. Insert the new battery, matching the battery's

polarity with the polarity indicated on the UPC Open

controller.

NETWORK POINTS LIST — The points list for the control-

ler is shown in Table G.

Refer to Appendix B for additional information on CCN

point name.

Table E — LED Status Indicators

Table F — Run and Error LEDs Controller and Network Status Indication

IMPORTANT: Power must be ON to the UPC Open when

replacing the battery, or the date, time, and trend data will

be lost.

LED STATUS

Power

Lights when power is being supplied to the controller. The UPC Open controller is protected by internal solid-state polyswitches on

the incoming power and network connections. These polyswitches are not replaceable and will reset themselves if the condition

that caused the fault returns to normal.

Rx Lights when the controller receives data from the network segment; there is an Rx LED for Ports 1 and 2.

Tx Lights when the controller transmits data to the network segment; there is an Rx LED for Ports 1 and 2.

Run Lights based on controller status. See Table F.

Error Lights based on controller status. See Table F.

RUN LED ERROR LED STATUS

2 flashes per second Off Normal

2 flashes per second 2 flashes, alternating with Run LED Five minute auto-restart delay after system error

2 flashes per second 3 flashes, then off Controller has just been formatted

2 flashes per second 1 flash per second Controller is alone on the network

2 flashes per second On Exec halted after frequent system errors or control programs halted

5 flashes per second On Exec start-up aborted, Boot is running

5 flashes per second Off Firmware transfer in progress, Boot is running

7 flashes per second 7 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED Ten second recovery period after brownout

14 flashes per second 14 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED Brownout

107

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)

Table G — Network Points List

LEGEND

POINT DESCRIPTION CCN POINT

NAME

READ/

WRITE UNITS DEFAULT

VALUE RANGE BACNET

OBJECT ID

BACNET

OBJECT NAME

4-20 ma Demand Signal LMT_MA R mA AV:36 lmt_ma_1

4-20 ma Reset Signal RST_MA R °F AV:33 rst_ma_1

Active Demand Limit DEM_LIM R/W % 100 0 - 100 AV:2 dem_lim_1

Active Setpoint SP R °F AV:4 sp_1

Alarm State ALM R

1 = Normal

2 = Alert

3 = Alarm

MSV:1 alm_msv_1

CCN Chiller CHIL_S_S R/W Start Start/Stop BV:4 chil_s_s_1

CCN Loadshed Signal DL_STAT R AV:37 dl_stat_1

Circuit A Run Hours HR_CIRA R hr AV:59 hr_cira_1

Circuit A Starts CY_CIRA R AV:65 cy_cira_1

Circuit B Run Hours HR_CIRB R hr AV:62 hr_cirb_1

Circuit B Starts CY_CIRB R AV:68 cy_cirb_1

Coil Cleaning Maint.Done CL_MAINT R/W No Yes/No BV:54 cl_maint_1

Coil Cleaning Srvc Inter SI_COIL R/W hr 8760 0 - 65535 AV:50 si_coil_1

Coil Service Countdown CL_CDOWN R hr AV:49 cl_cdown_1

Comp A1 Unload Time A1UNLTME R AV:73 a1unltme_1

Compr Return Gas Temp TMP_RGTA R °F AV:20 tmp_rgta_1

Compr Return Gas Temp TMP_RGTB R °F AV:28 tmp_rgtb_1

Compressor A1 Feedback K_A1_FBK R BV:16 k_a1_fbk_1

Compressor A1 Relay K_A1_RLY R BV:13 k_a1_rly_1

Compressor A1 Run Hours HR_A1 R hr AV:60 hr_a1_1

Compressor A1 Starts CY_A1 R AV:66 cy_a1_1

Compressor A2 Feedback K_A2_FBK R BV:17 k_a2_fbk_1

Compressor A2 Relay K_A2_RLY R BV:14 k_a2_rly_1

Compressor A2 Run Hours HR_A2 R hr AV:61 hr_a2_1

Compressor A2 Starts CY_A2 R AV:67 cy_a2_1

Compressor B1 Feedback K_B1_FBK R BV:20 k_b1_fbk_1

Compressor B1 Relay K_B1_RLY R BV:18 k_b1_rly_1

Compressor B1 Run Hours HR_B1 R hr AV:63 hr_b1_1

Compressor B1 Starts CY_B1 R AV:69 cy_b1_1

Compressor B2 Feedback K_B2_FBK R BV:21 k_b2_fbk_1

Compressor B2 Relay K_B2_RLY R BV:19 k_b2_rly_1

Compressor B2 Run Hours HR_B2 R hr AV:64 hr_b2_1

Compressor B2 Starts CY_B2 R AV:70 cy_b2_1

Control Mode CONTROL R

1 = Test

2 = Local Off

3 = CCN Off

4 = Clock Off

5 = Emergency Stop

6= Local On

7 = CCN On

8 = Clock On

9 = Heat Enabled

10 = Pump Delay

MSV:2 stat_msv_1

Control Point CTRL_PNT R/W °F 44.0 -20 - 70 AV:5 ctrl_pnt_1

Cooler Entering Fluid COOL_EWT R °F AV:30 cool_ewt_1

Cooler Flow Switch COOLFLOW R BV:11 coolflow_1

Cooler Freeze Protection MODE_16 R BV:42 mode_16_1

Cooler Leaving Fluid COOL_LWT R °F AV:31 cool_lwt_1

Cooler LWT Setpoint LWT_SP R °F AV:38 lwt_sp_1

Cooler Pump 1 Interlock PMP1_FBK R BV:9 pmp1_fbk_1

Cooler Pump 2 Interlock PMP2_FBK R BV:10 pmp2_fbk_1

Cooler Pump Relay 1 COOLPMP1 R BV:7 coolpmp1_1

Cooler Pump Relay 2 COOLPMP2 R BV:8 coolpmp2_1

Cooler Pump Select PMP_SLCT R AV:40 pmp_slct_1

Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly PUMP_DLY R/W min 1 0 - 10 AV:41 pump_dly_1

Cooler/Pump Heater COOL_HTR R BV:24 cool_htr_1

Cooling Ramp Loading CRAMP R/W 1.0 0.2 - 2.0 AV:56 cramp_1

Cooling Setpoint 1 CSP1 R/W °F 44.0 -20 - 70 AV:53 csp1_1

R—Read

W—Write

108

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)

Table G — Network Points List (cont)

LEGEND

POINT DESCRIPTION POINT NAME READ/

WRITE UNITS DEFAULT

VALUE RANGE BACNET

OBJECT ID

BACNET

OBJECT NAME

Cooling Setpoint 2 CSP2 R/W °F 44.0 -20 - 70 AV:54 csp2_1

CSM Controlling Chiller MODE_1 R BV:30 mode_1_1

Demand Level 1 R % AV:75 dmv_lvl_1_perct_1

Demand Level 2 R % AV:76 dmv_lvl_2_perct_1

Demand Level 3 R % AV:77 dmv_lvl_3_perct_1

Demand Limit Switch 1 DMD_SW1 R BV:25 dmd_sw1_1

Demand Limit Switch 2 DMD_SW2 R BV:26 dmd_sw2_1

Demand/Sound Limited MODE_15 R BV:41 mode_15_1

Discharge Gas Temp DISGAS R °F AV:15 disgas_1

Discharge Pressure DP_A R psig AV:13 dp_a_1

Discharge Pressure DP_B R psig AV:23 dp_b_1

Dual Setpoint MODE_13 R BV:39 mode_13_1

Dual Setpoint Switch DUAL_IN R BV:29 dual_in_1

Element Comm Status R BV:2999 element_stat_1

Element Communications

Alarm R BV:58 comm_lost_alm_1

Emergency Stop EMSTOP R/W Enabled Enabled/Emstop BV:6 emstop_1

Entering Fluid Temp EWT R °F AV:6 ewt_1

EXV % Open EXV_A R % AV:18 exv_a_1

EXV % Open EXV_B R % AV:27 exv_b_1

Fan 1 Relay FAN_1 R BV:22 fan_1_1

Fan 2 Relay FAN_2 R BV:23 fan_2_1

Head Setpoint HSP R °F AV:29 hsp_1

Heat Request HEAT_REQ R BV:28 heat_req_1

High SCT Circuit A MODE_21 R BV:47 mode_21_1

High SCT Circuit B MODE_22 R BV:48 mode_22_1

High Temperature Cooling MODE_18 R BV:44 mode_18_1

Ice Done ICE_DONE R BV:27 ice_done_1

Ice Setpoint CSP3 R/W °F 32.0 -20 - 32 AV:55 csp3_1

Lead/Lag Circuit Select LEAD_TYP R/W 1

1 = Automatic

2 = Circuit A Leads

3 = Circuit B Leads

AV:43 lead_typ_1

Lead/Lag Circuit Select LEAD_TYP R MSV:6 lead_typ_msv_1

Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid DUAL_LWT R °F AV:32 dual_lwt_1

Leadpump LEADPUMP R MSV:9 leadpump_msv_1

Leaving Fluid Temp - Prime

Variable LWT R °F AV:7 lwt_1

Loading Sequence Select SEQ_TYPE R AV:74 seq_type_1

Local Schedule R BV:1 schedule_1

Low Cooler Suction Temp A MODE_7 R BV:35 mode_7_1

Low Cooler Suction Temp B MODE_8 R BV:36 mode_8_1

Low Sound Active LSACTIVE R BV:2 lsactive_1

Low Sound Mode MODE_25 R BV:51 mode_25_1

Low Temperature Cooling MODE_17 R BV:43 mode_17_1

Machine Operating Hours HR_MACH R hr AV:57 hr_mach_1

Machine Starts CY_MACH R AV:58 cy_mach_1

Making ICE MODE_19 R BV:45 mode_19_1

Master/Slave Control MODE_3 R BV:32 mode_3_1

Minimum Comp. On Time MODE_23 R BV:49 mode_23_1

Minimum Load Valve Relay MLV_RLY R BV:15 mlv_rly_1

Minimum OFF Time Active MODE_10 R BV:38 mode_10_1

Minutes Off Time DELAY R/W min 0 0 - 15 AV:42 delay_1

Occupied OCC R BV:3 occ_1

Outside Air Temperature OAT R °F AV:34 oat_1

Override Modes in Effect MODE R BV:5 mode_1

Percent Available Cap. CAP_A R % AV:12 capa_a_1

Percent Available Cap. CAPB_A R % AV:22 capb_a_1

R—Read

W—Write

109

APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont)

Table G — Network Points List (cont)

LEGEND

POINT DESCRIPTION POINT NAME READ/

WRITE UNITS DEFAULT

VALUE RANGE BACNET

OBJECT ID

BACNET

OBJECT NAME

Percent Total Capacity CAP_T R % AV:3 cap_t_1

Percent Total Capacity CAPA_T R % AV:11 capa_t_1

Percent Total Capacity CAPB_T R % AV:21 capb_t_1

Pump 1 Maintenance Done P1_MAINT R/W No Yes/No BV:52 p1_maint_1

Pump 1 Run Hours HR_PUMP1 R hr AV:71 hr_pump1_1

Pump 1 Service Countdown P1_CDOWN R hr AV:46 p1_cdown_1

Pump 2 Maintenance Done P2_MAINT R/W No Yes/No BV:53 p2_maint_1

Pump 2 Run Hours HR_PUMP2 R hr AV:72 hr_pump2_1

Pump 2 Service Countdown P2_CDOWN R hr AV:47 p2_cdown_1

Pump Changeover Hours PMP_DLTA R/W hr 500 10 - 2000 AV:39 pmp_dlta_1

Pump Off Delay Time MODE_24 R BV:50 mode_24_1

Pump Service Interval SI_PUMPS R/W hr 8760 0 - 65535 AV:48 si_pumps_1

Ramp Load Limited MODE_5 R BV:33 mode_5_1

Requested Stage STAGE R AV:9 stage_1

Rotate Cooler Pumps Now ROT_PUMP R/W No No/Yes BV:12 rot_pump_1

Saturated Condensing Tmp TMP_SCTA R °F AV:16 tmp_scta_1

Saturated Condensing Tmp TMP_SCTB R °F AV:25 tmp_sctb_1

Saturated Suction Temp TMP_SSTA R °F AV:17 tmp_ssta_1

Saturated Suction Temp TMP_SSTB R °F AV:26 tmp_sstb_1

Slow Change Override MODE_9 R BV:37 mode_9_1

Space Temperature SPT R/W °F 8760 -40.0 - 245 AV:35 spt_1

Storing ICE MODE_20 R BV:46 mode_20_1

Strainer Maint. Done ST_MAINT R/W No Yes/No BV:55 st_maint_1

Strainer Srvc Countdown ST_CDOWN R hr AV:52 st_cdown_1

Strainer Srvc Interval SI_STRNR R/W hr 8760 0 - 65535 AV:51 si_strnr_1

Suction Pressure SP_A R psig AV:14 sp_a_1

Suction Pressure SP_B R psig AV:24 sp_b_1

Suction Superheat Temp SH_A R °^F AV:44 sh_a_1

Suction Superheat Temp SH_B R °^F AV:45 sh_b_1

System Cooling Demand

Level R AV:9006 cool_demand_level_1

System Demand Limiting R BV:57 dem_lmt_act_1

Temperature Reset MODE_14 R BV:40 mode_14_1

Timed Override In Effect MODE_6 R BV:34 mode_6_1

User Defined Analog 1 R/W sq m AV:2901 user_analog_1_1

User Defined Analog 2 R/W sq m AV:2902 user_analog_2_1

User Defined Analog 3 R/W sq m AV:2903 user_analog_3_1

User Defined Analog 4 R/W sq m AV:2904 user_analog_4_1

User Defined Analog 5 R/W sq m AV:2905 user_analog_5_1

User Defined Binary 1 R/W sq m BV:2911 user_binary_1_1

User Defined Binary 2 R/W sq m BV:2912 user_binary_2_1

User Defined Binary 3 R/W sq m BV:2913 user_binary_3_1

User Defined Binary 4 R/W sq m BV:2914 user_binary_4_1

User Defined Binary 5 R/W sq m BV:2915 user_binary_5_1

Var Head Press Output VHP_ACT R mA AV:19 vhp_act_1

WSM Controlling Chiller MODE_2 R BV:31 mode_2_1

R—Read

W—Write

110

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS

30RAP Maintenance Interval Requirements

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Main-

tenance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.

WEEKLY

Compressor Check oil level. Economizer None.

Cooler None. Controls Review Alarm/Alert History.

Condenser None. Starter None.

MONTHLY

Compressor Check oil level. Economizer None.

Cooler None. Controls Inspect sight glass for moisture and refrigerant level.

Condenser None. Starter None.

QUARTERLY

Compressor Check oil level Economizer None.

Cooler Check refrigerant charge. Check all connec-

tions for leaks. Controls Perform an Automated Controls test. Run all compressors

and ensure proper operation.

Condenser None. Starter Ensure operation of units flow switch.

ANNUALLY

Compressor Check Oil Level. Obtain and test an oil

sample. Economizer Verify proper operation of EXVs and TXVs

Cooler

Check refrigerant charge. Check all connec-

tions for leaks. Check approach on unit to

determine if tubes need cleaning. Check for

temperature drop across filter drier to deter-

mine if filter needs replacement.

Controls

Perform an Automated Controls test. Run all compressors

and ensure proper operation. Ensure operation of unit flow

switch.

Condenser

Inspect all coils and clean. Check condenser

approach to determine if tubes need to be

cleaned.

Starter

Inspect all electrical connections and tighten as needed.

Measure current to each compressor and inspect contac-

tors.

111

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont)

30RAP Weekly Maintenance Log

Plant ___________________________

Machine Model No. ________________

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Main-

tenance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.

DATE OIL LEVEL CHECK ALARMS

/ FAULTS

OPERATOR

INITIALS REMARKS

112

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont)

30RAP Monthly Maintenance Log

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements

are not covered under warranty.

Month 123456789101112

Date / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Operator

UNIT SECTION ACTION UNIT ENTRY

Compressor

Check Oil Level yes/no

Send Oil Sample Out for Analysis yes/no Annually

Leak Test ppm

Cooler

Inspect and Clean Cooler yes/no Every 3 - 5 Years

Inspect Cooler Heater amps

Leak Test yes/no

Record Water Pressure Differential (PSI) PSI

Inspect Water Pumps yes/no

Condenser Leak Test ppm

Inspect and Clean Condenser Coil yes/no Annually

Controls

General Cleaning and Tightening Connections yes/no Annually

Check Pressure Transducers yes/no

Confirm Accuracy of Thermistors yes/no

Starter General Tightening & Cleaning Connections yes/no Annually

Inspect All Contactors yes/no

System

Check Refrigerant Charge yes/no

Verify Operation Of EXVs And Record Position 0-100%

Record System Super Heat deg. F

113

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont)

30RAP Seasonal Shutdown Log

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements

are not covered under warranty.

Month 123456789101112

Date / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Operator

UNIT SECTION ACTION ENTRY

Cooler Isolate and Drain Cooler

Add Glycol for Freeze Protection

Controls Do Not Disconnect Control Power

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.

Catalog No. 04-53300067-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RAP-2T Pg 114 12-10 Replaces: 30RAP-1T

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.

Catalog No. 04-53300067-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RAP-2T Pg CL-1 12-10 Replaces: 30RAP-1T

START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30RAP LIQUID CHILLER

(Remove and use for Job File)

I. Project Information

JOB NAME ______________________________________________________________________________

ADDRESS _______________________________________________________________________________

CITY ____________________________________________ STATE _______________ ZIP______________

INSTALLING CONTRACTOR ________________________________________________________________

SALES OFFICE ___________________________________________________________________________

START-UP PERFORMED BY ________________________________________________________________

Design Information

UNIT MODEL ______________________________ SERIAL ________________________________

II. Preliminary Equipment Check

IS THERE ANY PHYSICAL DAMAGE? YES NO

DESCRIPTION ____________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

1. UNIT IS INSTALLED LEVEL AS PER THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. YES NO

2. POWER SUPPLY AGREES WITH THE UNIT NAMEPLATE. YES NO

3. ELECTRICAL POWER WIRING IS INSTALLED PROPERLY. YES NO

4. UNIT IS PROPERLY GROUNDED. YES NO

5. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION HAS BEEN SIZED AND INSTALLED PROPERLY. YES NO

6. ALL TERMINALS ARE TIGHT. YES NO

7. ALL PLUG ASSEMBLIES ARE TIGHT. YES NO

8. ALL CABLES AND THERMISTORS HAVE BEEN INSPECTED FOR CROSSED WIRES. YES NO

9. ALL THERMISTORS ARE FULLY INSERTED INTO WELLS. YES NO

Chilled Water System Check

1. ALL CHILLED WATER VALVES ARE OPEN. YES NO

2. ALL PIPING IS CONNECTED PROPERLY. YES NO

3. ALL AIR HAS BEEN PURGED FROM THE SYSTEM. YES NO

4. CHILLED WATER PUMP IS OPERATING WITH THE CORRECT ROTATION. YES NO

CAPACITY CEAT EWT LWT FLUID TYPE FLOW RATE P.D.

CL-2

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE

5. CHILLED WATER PUMP STARTER INTERLOCKED WITH CHILLER. YES NO

6. CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH IS OPERATIONAL. YES NO

7. WATER LOOP VOLUME GREATER THAN MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS. (See Table 40). YES NO

8. PROPER LOOP FREEZE PROTECTION PROVIDED TO _____ °F (°C). YES NO

ANTIFREEZE TYPE _____________________ CONCENTRATION __________%.

IF OUTDOOR AMBIENT IS BELOW 32 F (0° C) THEN ITEMS 9-11 HAVE TO BE

COMPLETED TO PROVIDE COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION TO –20 F (–29 C). (REFER

TO WINTER SHUTDOWN FOR PROPER COOLER WINTERIZATION PROCEDURE.)

9. OUTDOOR PIPING WRAPPED WITH ELECTRIC HEATER TAPE, YES NO

INSULATED AND OPERATIONAL.

10. COOLER HEATERS INSTALLED AND OPERATIONAL. YES NO

11. CHILLED WATER PUMP CONTROLLED BY CHILLER. YES NO

III. Unit Start-Up

1. COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL IS CORRECT. YES NO

2. VERIFY COMPRESSOR MOUNTING BOLT TORQUE IS 7-10 FT-LB. (9.5-13.5 N-M). YES NO

3. LEAK CHECK UNIT. LOCATE, REPAIR AND REPORT ANY REFRIGERANT LEAKS. YES NO

4. VOLTAGE IS WITHIN UNIT NAMEPLATE RANGE. YES NO

5. CONTROL TRANSFORMER PRIMARY CONNECTION SET FOR PROPER VOLTAGE. YES NO

6. CONTROL TRANSFORMER SECONDARY VOLTAGE =

7. CHECK VOLTAGE IMBALANCE: A-B A-C B-C

AVERAGE VOLTAGE = (A-B + A-C + B-C)/3

MAXIMUM DEVIATION FROM AVERAGE VOLTAGE =

VOLTAGE IMBALANCE = ____________% (MAX. DEVIATION/AVERAGE VOLTAGE) X 100

VOLTAGE IMBALANCE LESS THAN 2%. YES NO

(DO NOT START CHILLER IF VOLTAGE IMBALANCE IS GREATER THAN 2%.

CONTACT LOCAL UTILITY FOR ASSISTANCE.)

8. VERIFY COOLER FLOW RATE. YES NO

PRESSURE ENTERING COOLER ________ psig (kPa)

PRESSURE LEAVING COOLER ________ psig (kPa)

COOLER PRESSURE DROP ________ psig (kPa)

Psig X 2.31 ft./psi = ________ ft of water

kPa X 0.334 m/psi ________ m of water

COOLER FLOW RATE ________ gpm (l/s) (See Cooler Pressure

Drop Curves from

Installation Instructions)

Start and Operate Machine. Complete the Following:

1. COMPLETE COMPONENT TEST. YES NO

2. CHECK REFRIGERANT AND OIL CHARGE. YES NO

3. RECORD COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT. YES NO

4. RECORD CONFIGURATION SETTINGS. YES NO

5. RECORD OPERATING TEMPERATURES AND PRESSURES. YES NO

6. PROVIDE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER’S PERSONNEL. Instruction Time ________ hours.

CL-3

OPERATING DATA:

RECORD THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION FROM THE PRESSURES AND TEMPERATURES MODES WHEN

MACHINE IS IN A STABLE OPERATING CONDITION:

PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE

*Readings taken with a digital thermometer.

Compressor Running Current — All readings taken at full load.

CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B

DISCHARGE PRESSURE DP.A DP.B

SUCTION PRESSURE SP.A SP.B

SATURATED CONDENSING TEMP SCT.A SCT.B

SATURATED SUCTION TEMP SST.A SST.B

RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE RGT.A RGT.B

LIQUID LINE TEMPERATURE*

DISCHARGE LINE TEMPERATURE*

COOLER EWT EWT

COOLER LWT LWT

OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE OAT

CONTROL POINT CTPT

PERCENT TOTAL CAPACITY CAP

LEAD/LAG LEAVING FLUID DLWT (Dual Chiller Control Only)

COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT L1 L2 L3

COMPRESSOR A1

COMPRESSOR A2

COMPRESSOR B1

COMPRESSOR B2

CONDENSER FAN MOTOR CURRENT L1 L2 L3

FAN MOTOR 1

FAN MOTOR 2

FAN MOTOR 3

FAN MOTOR 4

COOLER PUMP MOTOR CURRENT L1 L2 L3

COOLER PUMP 1

COOLER PUMP 2

CL-4

CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE

Record Software Versions

MODE — RUN STATUS

(PRESS ENTER AND ESCAPE SIMULTANEOUSLY TO OBTAIN

SOFTWARE VERSIONS)

COMMENTS:

_________________________________________________________________________________________

SIGNATURES:

START-UP CUSTOMER

TECHNICIAN _____________________________ REPRESENTATIVE _____________________________

DATE ___________________________________ DATE ________________________________________

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION

VERS MBB CESR-131460- _ _-_ _

AUX1 CESR-131333- _ _-_ _

EXV CESR-131172- _ _-_ _

EMM CESR-131174- _ _-_ _

MARQUEE CESR-131171- _ _-_ _

NAVIGATOR CESR-131227- _ _-_ _

CL-5

III. Unit Start-Up (cont)

RECORD CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

UNIT (Configuration Settings)

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘UNIT’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘OPT1’.

PRESS ENTER KEY. RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW:

OPTIONS1 (Options Configuration)

SUBMODE ITEM ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY ENTRY

UNIT

UNIT CONFIGURATION

SIZE UNIT SIZE XXX

SZA.1 COMPRESSOR A1 SIZE XX

SZA.2 COMPRESSOR A2 SIZE XX

SZA.3 COMPRESSOR A3 SIZE XX

SZA.4 COMPRESSOR A4 SIZE XX

SZB.1 COMPRESSOR B1 SIZE XX

SZB.2 COMPRESSOR B2 SIZE XX

SZB.3 COMPRESSOR B3 SIZE XX

SZB.4 COMPRESSOR B4 SIZE XX

SH.SP SUPERHEAT SETPOINT XX.X F

FAN.S FAN STAGING SELECT X

EXV EXV MODULE INSTALLED YES/NO

A1.TY COMPRESSOR A1 DIGITAL? YES/NO

MAX.T MAXIMUM A1 UNLOAD TIME XX

SUBMODE ITEM ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY ENTRY

OPT1

UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE

FLUD COOLER FLUID X

MLV.S MINIMUM LOAD VALVE SELECT YES/NO

D.G.EN DISCHARGE GAS TEMP ENABLE ENBL/DSBL

CSB.E CSB BOARDS ENABLE ENBL/DSBL

CPC COOLER PUMP CONTROL ON/OFF

PM1E COOLER PUMP 1 ENABLE YES/NO

PM2E COOLER PUMP 2 ENABLE YES/NO

PM.P.S COOLER PMP PERIODIC STRT YES/NO

PM.SL COOLER PUMP SELECT X

PM.DY COOLER PUMP SHUTDOWN DLY XX MIN

PM.DT PUMP CHANGEOVER HOURS XXXX HRS

ROT.P ROTATE COOLER PUMPS NOW YES/NO

EMM EMM MODULE INSTALLED YES/NO

CND.T CND HX TYP 0=RTPF 1=MCHX 0/1

MOPS EXV MOP SET POINT XX

APPR CONFIG APPROACH SETPOINT XX

CL-6

CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE

III. Unit Start-Up (cont)

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘OPT1’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘OPT2’.

PRESS ENTER KEY.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.

OPTIONS2 (Options Configuration)

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘OPT2’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘CCN’.

PRESS ENTER KEY.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.

CCN (CCN Network Configuration)

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘CCN’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘HP.A’.

PRESS ENTER KEY.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.

HP.A (Head Pressure Cmp. Delta Configuration)

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘HP.A’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘HP.B’.

PRESS ENTER KEY.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.

HP.B (Head Pressure Cmp. Delta Configuration)

SUBMODE ITEM ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY ENTRY

OPT2

UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS

CTRL CONTROL METHOD X

LOAD LOADING SEQUENCE SELECT X

LLCS LEAD/LAG CIRCUIT SELECT X

LCWT HIGH LCW ALERT LIMIT XX.X F

DELY MINUTES OFF TIME XX

ICE.M ICE MODE ENABLE ENBL/DSBL

CLS.C CLOSE CONTROL SELECT ENBL/DSBL

LS.MD LOW SOUND MODE SELECT X

LS.ST LOW SOUND START TIME 00:00

LS.ND LOW SOUND END TIME 00:00

LS.LT LOW SOUND CAPACITY LIMIT XXX %

CTRL CONTROL METHOD X

CCNA CCN ADDRESS XXX

CCNB CCN BUS NUMBER XXX

SUB-MODE ITEM ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY ENTRY

CCN

CCNA CCN ADDRESS XXX

CCNB CCN BUS NUMBER XXX

BAUD CCN BAUD RATE X

SUB-MODE ITEM ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY ENTRY

HP.A A1.DT SCT DELTA FOR COMP A1 XX

A2.DT SCT DELTA FOR COMP A2 XX

SUB-MODE ITEM ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY ENTRY

HP.B B1.DT SCT DELTA FOR COMP B1 XX

B2.DT SCT DELTA FOR COMP B2 XX

CL-7

III. Unit Start-Up (cont)

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘HP.B’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘EXV.A’.

PRESS ENTER KEY.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.

EXV.A (Circuit A EXV Configuration)

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘EXV.A’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘EXV.B’.

PRESS ENTER KEY.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.

EXV.B (Circuit B EXV Configuration)

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘EXV.B’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘MM’.

PRESS ENTER KEY.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.

MM (Motormaster Configuration Settings)

SUB-MODE ITEM ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY ENTRY

EXV.A

STR.A EXV CIRC.A START POS XXX

MIN.A EXV CIRC.A MIN POSITION XXX

RNG.A EXVA STEPS IN RANGE XXXXX

SPD.A EXVA STEPS PER SECOND XXXXX

POF.A EXVA FAIL POSITION IN % XXX

MIN.A EXVA MINIMUM STEPS XXXXX

MAX.A EXVA MAXIMUM STEPS XXXXX

OVR.A EXVA OVERRUN STEPS XXX

TYP.A EXVA STEPPER TYPE 0,1

H.SCT HIGH SCT THRESHOLD XXX

X.PCT OPEN EXV X% ON 2ND COMP XX

X.PER MOVE EXV X% ON DISCRSOL XX

A.PCT PRE-OPEN EXV - FAN ADDING XXX

M.PCT PRE-CLOSE EXV - FAN SUB XXX

S.PCT PRE-CLOSE EXV - LAG SHUT XXX

DELY LAG START DELAY XXX

SUB-MODE ITEM ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY ENTRY

EXV.B

STR.B EXV CIRC.B START POS XXX

MIN.B EXV CIRC.B MIN POSITION XXX

RNG.B EXVB STEPS IN RANGE XXXXX

SPD.B EXVB STEPS PER SECOND XXXXX

POF.B EXVB FAIL POSITION IN % XXX

MIN.B EXVB MINIMUM STEPS XXXXX

MAX.B EXVB MAXIMUM STEPS XXXXX

OVR.AB EXVB OVERRUN STEPS XXX

TYP.B EXVB STEPPER TYPE 0,1

SUB-MODE ITEM ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY ENTRY

MMR.S MOTORMASTER SELECT YES/NO

P.GAN HEAD PRESSURE P GAIN XX

I.GAN HEAD PRESSURE I GAIN XX.X

D.GAN HEAD PRESSURE D GAIN XX.X

MIN.S MINIMUM FAN SPEED XX

CL-8

CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE

III. Unit Start-Up (cont)

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘MM’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘RSET’.

PRESS ENTER KEY.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.

RSET (Reset Configuration Settings)

PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘RSET’. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘SLCT’.

PRESS ENTER KEY.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW:

SLCT (Setpoint and Ramp Load Configuration)

SUBMODE ITEM ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY ENTRY

RSET RESET COOL TEMP

CRST COOLING RESET TYPE X

MA.DG 4-20 - DEGREES RESET XX.X °F

RM.NO REMOTE - NO RESET TEMP XXX.X °F

RM.F REMOTE - FULL RESET TEMP XXX.X °F

RM.DG REMOTE - DEGREES RESET XX.X °F

RT.NO RETURN - NO RESET TEMP XXX.X °F

RT.F RETURN - FULL RESET TEMP XXX.X °F

RT.DG RETURN - DEGREES RESET XX.X °F

DMDC DEMAND LIMIT SELECT X

DM20 DEMAND LIMIT AT 20 MA XXX %

SHNM LOADSHED GROUP NUMBER XXX

SHDL LOADSHED DEMAND DELTA XXX %

SHTM MAXIMUM LOADSHED TIME XXX

DLS1 DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1 XXX %

DLS2 DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2 XXX %

LLEN LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE ENBL/DSBL

MSSL MASTER/SLAVE SELECT SLVE/MAST

SLVA SLAVE ADDRESS XXX

LLBL LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT X

LLBD LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA XXX

LLDY LAG START DELAY XXX

PARA PARALLEL CONFIGURATION YES/NO

SUBMODE ITEM ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY ENTRY

SLCT SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD

CLSP COOLING SETPOINT SELECT X

RL.S RAMP LOAD SELECT ENBL/DSBL

CRMP COOLING RAMP LOADING X.X

SCHD SCHEDULE NUMBER XX

Z.GN DEADBAND MULTIPLIER X.X

CL-9

III. Unit Start-Up (cont)

PRESS ESCAPE KEY SEVERAL TIMES TO GET TO THE MODE LEVEL (BLANK DISPLAY). USE THE

ARROW KEYS TO SCROLL TO THE SET POINT LED. PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY SETPOINTS.

RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW:

SETPOINT

SUBMODE ITEM ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY ENTRY

COOL COOLING SETPOINTS

CSP.1 COOLING SETPOINT 1 XXX.X °F

CSP.2 COOLING SETPOINT 2 XXX.X °F

CSP.3 ICE SETPOINT XXX.X °F

HEAD

HEAD PRESSURE SETPOINTS

H.DP HEAD SET POINT XXX.X °F

F.ON FAN ON SET POINT XXX.X °F

F.OFF FAN OFF SET POINT XXX.X °F

B.OFF BASE FAN OFF DELTA TEMP XX.X °F

F.DLT FAN STAGE DELTA XX.X °F

FRZ BRINE FREEZE SETPOINT

BR.FZ BRINE FREEZE POINT XXX.X °F

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.

Catalog No. 04-53300067-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RAP-2T Pg CL-10 12-10 Replaces: 30RAP-1T

CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE

III. Unit Start-Up (cont)

COMPONENT TEST

USE ESCAPE/ARROW KEYS TO ILLUMINATE CONFIGURATION LED. PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY ‘DISP’.

PRESS ENTER AGAIN TO DISPLAY ‘TEST’ FOLLOWED BY ‘OFF’. PRESS ENTER TO STOP DISPLAY AT

‘OFF’ AND ENTER AGAIN SO ‘OFF’ DISPLAY FLASHES. ‘PASS’ AND ‘WORD’ WILL FLASH IF PASSWORD

NEEDS TO BE ENTERED. PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY PASSWORD FIELD AND USE THE ENTER KEY FOR

EACH OF THE FOUR PASSWORD DIGITS. USE ARROW KEYS IF PASSWORD IS OTHER THAN STANDARD.

AT FLASHING ‘OFF’ DISPLAY, PRESS THE UP ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘ON’ AND PRESS ENTER. ALL LED

SEGMENTS AND MODE LEDS WILL LIGHT UP. PRESS ESCAPE TO STOP THE TEST. PRESS ESCAPE TO

RETURN TO THE ‘DISP’ DISPLAY. PRESS THE ESCAPE KEY AGAIN AND USE THE ARROW KEYS TO ILLU-

MINATE THE SERVICE TEST LED. PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY ‘TEST’. PRESS ENTER TO STOP DISPLAY

AT ‘OFF’ AND ENTER AGAIN SO ‘OFF’ FLASHES. PRESS THE UP ARROW KEY AND ENTER TO ENABLE

THE MANUAL MODE. PRESS ESCAPE AND DISPLAY NOW SAYS ‘TEST’ ‘ON’. REFER TO THE TABLE

BELOW.

Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory

NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit, the Circuit B items will not appear in the display, except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.

SUB-MODE KEYPAD

ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM

EXPANSION COMMENT Completed

(Yes/No)

TEST

ON/OFF SERVICE TEST MODE To Enable Service Test Mode,

move Enable/Off/Remote

Contact switch to OFF. Change

TEST to ON. Move switch to

ENABLE.

OUTS

OUTPUTS AND PUMPS

FAN1 ON/OFF FAN 1 RELAY Condenser fan contactor 1

FAN2 ON/OFF FAN 2 RELAY Condenser fan contactor 2

FAN3 ON/OFF FAN 3 RELAY Condenser fan contactor 3

FAN4 ON/OFF FAN 4 RELAY Condenser fan contactor 4

FAN5 ON/OFF FAN 5 RELAY Condenser fan contactor 5

FAN6 ON/OFF FAN 6 RELAY Condenser fan contactor 6

V.HPA XXX% VAR HEAD PRESS %

V.HPB XXX% VAR HEAD PRESS %

CLP.1 ON/OFF COOLER PUMP 1 RELAY

CLP.2 ON/OFF COOLER PUMP 2 RELAY

CL.HT ON/OFF COOLER/PUMP HEATER

RMT.A ON/OFF REMOTE ALARM RELAY

CMPA

CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TEST

CC.A1 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY

UL.TM 0 to 15 COMP A1 UnLOAD TIME

CC.A2 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY

CC.A3 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A3 RELAY

CC.A4 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A4 RELAY

MLV ON/OFF MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY

CMPB

CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TEST

CC.B1 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY See Note

CC.B2 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY See Note

CC.B3 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B3 RELAY See Note

CC.B4 ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B4 RELAY See Note

ENTER

Carrier Aquasnap Air Cooled Chillers With Comfortlink Controls 30Rap010 060 Users Manual 30rap 2t

30RAP010-060 to the manual 556e3ae9-fcb8-42ef-b900-abf4bd5d8276

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation